3. 譬喻品显示巴利原文
3. Opammavaggo
1. 锯喻经注释显示巴利原文
1. Kakacūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
222 “Moḷi”指发髻的装饰。“Vehāyasa”指在虚空之中。“Ratanacaṅkoṭavarena”:即以宝石所成的最胜宝匣,千眼(帝释天王)用头顶接取。另有异本读作“Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakavarena”(以殊胜的金匣)。(《佛种姓经注》23 远因缘谈;《本生经注》1.2 近因缘谈)显示巴利原文
222.Moḷinti kesaracanaṃ. Vehāyasanti ākāse. Ratanacaṅkoṭavarenāti ratanasilāmayavaracaṅkoṭakena sahassanetto sirasā paṭiggahi. ‘‘Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakavarenā’’tipi (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 23 dūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.2 avidūrenidānakathā) pāṭho.
“Sā”指发髻。凡有此发髻者,称为“Moḷiko”(有髻者),“Moḷiko”亦即“Moḷiyo”(髻者)。而“Phagguna”是他的名字。“Saṅkhā”即共许的名称。“Velā”(时分):它依剎那、须臾、日子等被指示出来,故为时分,因此说“在那时分……这称为时之分”。“Velā”(界限)是依分际而安立,故为界限。“Velā”(戒)则令染污分动摇,故称为戒。而那不可逾越的意思,即对于染污法之相绝不动摇。在没有智者的情况下,大约五六句话被衡量为一个教诫的量。“Davasahagataṃ katvā”(带着嬉戏而作):即带着嬉戏地作。显示巴利原文
Sāti moḷi. Moḷi etassa atthīti moḷiko, moḷiko eva moḷiyo. Phaggunoti pana nāmaṃ. Saṅkhāti samaññā. Velīyati khaṇamuhuttādivasena upadisīyatīti velā, kāloti āha ‘‘tāyaṃ velāyaṃ…pe… ayaṃ kālavelā nāmā’’ti. Velayati paricchedavasena tiṭṭhatīti velā, sīmā. Velayati saṃkilesapakkhaṃ cālayatīti velā, sīlaṃ. Anatikkamanaṭṭhopi cassa saṃkilesadhammanimittaṃ acalanameva. Viññupurisābhāve chapañcavācāmattaṃ ovāde pamāṇaṃ nāma.Davasahagataṃ katvāti kīḷāsahitaṃ katvā.
「混合者」:由于不随顺的交往而混在一起。为了详细解释简略所说的「说坏话」,便展开「热恼、烹煮、捣碎等」的叙述。「亦作诉讼」:在此,为了显示他是如何致力于诉讼,故说「对这些比丘……」。「引发诉讼」:指因为诉讼而牵累那些比丘,或者在他们当中制造诉讼而牵累他们。「或仅示要目之词」:或者只是依文句作简略的标示。「非为求喜乐」:不是为了令导师对自己生起喜爱。「非以破僧之意」:并非导师本人与那位比丘一起带有破僧的意图。「以利乐意」:指为了牟利破群那的利益。显示巴利原文
Missībhūtoti ananulomikasaṃsaggavasena missībhūto. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tāpanapacanakoṭṭanādīnī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhikaraṇampi karotīti ettha yathā so adhikaraṇāya parisakkati, taṃdassanaṃ ‘‘imesaṃ bhikkhūna’’ntiādi. Adhikaraṇaṃ ākaḍḍhatīti adhikaraṇaṃ uddissa te bhikkhū ākaḍḍhati, adhikaraṇaṃ vā tesu uppādento ākaḍḍhati. Uddesapadaṃ vāti padaso uddesamattaṃ vā. Neva piyakamyatāyāti neva attani satthuno piyabhāvakāmatāya. Na bhedādhippāyenāti na satthuno tena bhikkhunā bhedādhippāyena. Atthakāmatāyāti moḷiyaphaggunassa hitakāmatāya.
224 224.「说坏话」:即谈论比丘尼们的过失。因为贪等作为事由的所依,那些五欲功德如同家宅,故称为「家」;而这些又依止、附着于此,所以称为「依家者」(居家者)。渴爱之欲与她们对于那事想做之欲,两者都是渴爱之欲;然而,嗔恚之欲则仅仅是他们对于那事想做之欲。如同水晶般本性光净的心相续,贪等就像障碍,是造成变易的原因,因此说「有染污的心也是变易的」等。「以利乐与悲愍」:这是说明以悲悯显现。正如在「凡于内没有忿怒的人」等(《自说》20)文句中,「内」这个词是心的同义词,因此说「内有嗔者」即「嗔心者」。显示巴利原文
224.Avaṇṇabhāsaneti bhikkhunīnaṃ aguṇakathane. Chandādīnaṃ vatthubhāvato kāmaguṇā gehaṃ viya gehaṃ, te ca te sitā nissitāti gehassitāti vuttā. Taṇhāchandāpi tāsaṃ kattukāmatāpīti ubhayepi taṇhāchandā, paṭighachandā pana tesaṃ kattukāmatā eva. Phalikamaṇi viya pakatipabhassarassa cittasantānassa upasaṅgo viya vipariṇāmakāraṇaṃ rāgādayoti āha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’ntiādi. Hitānukampīti karuṇāya paccupaṭṭhāpanamāha. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) viya antara-saddo cittapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dosantaroti dosacitto’’ti.
225 225. 由于禀性难以教导,他不接受教诫,心意对立,僵持不动。意思是:他们抓住了心,践行了那摄心的方法。意思是:他们满足了心愿。一时,即在初成正觉的时候。关于食物的一坐食,是指仅在唯一的时段进食。而且那只是在午前,因此说「一种午前之食」等。即使受用七次食物,在这部经中也只被认可为一坐食,并非指一食者仅在单一座位上进食。如同在「无蚊蚋……触」等文句中,「少」这个词带有「无」的意思,因此说「无病、无苦」。依于精勤等而能轻快、不费力地起身,就是轻快起身。「非一次打击」:意指不是一次,也不是在唯一的一个时机。「二种食」:指依时间而说的「在下午、在夜间」两种进食。「五种功德」:指少病等的五种功德。「仅是令念生起所应作之事而已」:即仅仅是令念生起一点应作之事罢了,而对于那些应当遮止的事,并没有反复地劝说勉励。显示巴利原文
225. Dubbacatāya ovādaṃ asampaṭicchanto citteneva paṭiviruddho aṭṭhāsi. Gaṇhiṃsu cittaṃ, hadayagāhiniṃ paṭipajjiṃsūti attho. Pūrayiṃsu ajjhāsayanti attho. Ekasmiṃ samaye paṭhamabodhiyaṃ. Ekāsanaṃ bhojanassa ekāsanabhojanaṃ, ekavelāyameva bhojanaṃ. Tañca kho pubbaṇhe evāti āha ‘‘ekaṃ purebhattabhojana’’ntiādi. Sattakkhattuṃ bhuttabhojanampi imasmiṃ sutte ekāsanabhojananteva adhippetaṃ, na ekāsanikatāya ekāya eva nisajjāya bhojanaṃ. ‘‘Appaḍaṃsa…pe… samphassa’’ntiādīsu viya appa-saddo abhāvatthoti āha ‘‘nirābādhataṃ, niddukkhata’’nti. Padhānādivasena sallahukaṃ akicchaṃ uṭṭhānaṃ sallahukauṭṭhānaṃ. Na ekappahārenāti na ekavārena, na ekasmiṃyeva kāleti adhippāyo. Dve bhojanānīti ‘‘aparaṇhe rattiya’’nti kālavasena dve bhojanāni. Pañca guṇeti appābādhādike pañca ānisaṃse. Satuppādakaraṇīyamattamevāti satuppādamattakaraṇīyameva, nivāretabbassa punappunaṃ samādapanañca nāhosi.
“味地”(Maṇḍabhūmi):指肥沃的土地,不须灌溉,庄稼便能自然成熟。应当套上轭的牲畜称为“应调御者”(yoggāni),训练它们的老师便是“调御师”(yoggācariyo),也就是它们的调训者。村长、象等也被称作“应调御者”,因此在经文中说“精于调教马匹的御者”(assadammasārathī)。于四种行进方式中,他想要以哪一种行进,便以哪一种行进。在疾速、均等种种步态中,他想要哪一种步态,便现哪一种步态。无论他踏上哪一条路,都已如其所愿。无需勒紧缰绳去制止,也不必用刺棒去戳刺,只需看着它们的行走即可:这些训练有素的动物,会顺着我的心意,缓步而行、平稳而行、疾速而行。御者只需于蹄上作意取相后,观察其行走,并不必在那儿加以驱策。那些比丘,舍弃了应当舍弃的。“毁坏娑罗树者”(Sāladūsanā):指破坏娑罗树的蔓藤,以及其他缠绕娑罗树而立的蔓藤。通过向外移除:即通过从娑罗林向外丢弃。善安立的:具有善好的形态。筑起界限:指为了做成树根周围的围土圈而筑起界限。显示巴利原文
Maṇḍabhūmīti ojavantabhūmi, yattha parisiñcanena vinā sassāni kiṭṭhāni sampajjanti. Yuge yojetabbāni yoggāni, tesaṃ ācariyo yoggācariyo, tesaṃ sikkhāpanako. Gāmaṇihatthiādayopi ‘‘yoggā’’ti vuccantīti āha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘assadammasārathī’’ti. Catūsu maggesu yena yena maggena icchati. Javasamagādibhedāsu gatīsu yaṃ yaṃ gatiṃ. Taṃ taṃ maggaṃ āruḷhāva otiṇṇāyeva. Neva vāretabbā rasmiviniggaṇhanena. Na vijjhitabbā patodalaṭṭhiyā. Gamanamevāti ime yuttā mama icchānurūpaṃ mandaṃ gacchanti, samaṃ gacchanti, sīghaṃ gacchantīti khuresu nimittaggahaṇaṃ paṭṭhapetvā sārathinā tesaṃ gamanameva passitabbaṃ hoti, na tattha niyojanaṃ . Tehipi bhikkhūhi. Pajahiṃsu pajahitabbaṃ. Sāladūsanāti sālarukkhavisanāsakā. Aññā ca valliyo sālarukkhe vinandhitvā ṭhitā. Bahi nīharaṇenāti sālavanato bahi chaḍḍanena. Susaṇṭhitāti saṇṭhānasampannā, mariyādaṃbandhitvāti ālavālasampādanavasena mariyādaṃ bandhitvā. Kipillapuṭakaṃ tambakipillakapuṭakaṃ. Sukkhadaṇḍakaharaṇaṃ ālavālabbhantarā.
226 “韦德希咖”(Vedehikā):因在毗提诃国出生、长大,故称韦德希咖。“慧”(paṇḍā)即智慧。依此智慧而行转的人,便称为“智者”(paṇḍitā)。“家主妇”:即家的女主人。“以柔和”:指因自制而柔和。“谦下”:指行礼敬、谦卑之人。“寂灭者”:止息了恶行热恼的人。“能奋起”:具足奋起精进的人。“残酷”:指凶恶。显示巴利原文
226. Videharaṭṭhe jātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya vedehikā. Paṇḍā vuccati paññā, tāya itā gatā pavattāti paṇḍitā. Gahapatānīti gehasāminī. Soraccenāti saṃyamena. Nivātavuttīti paṇipātakārī. Nibbutāti nibbutaduccaritapariḷāhā. Uṭṭhāhikāti uṭṭhānavīriyavatī. Kibbisāti kurūrā.
227 这样,显示了不忍的过患后:即便是在世间享有“具德者”之称、名声远播之人,也会因不忍之相招致失去名声、功德减损等过患。如此宣说了不忍的过患之后。“于语道”:指在言语现起的适当时机等情况下。因为即使柔和的状况,也是言语现起的一种方式,故称之为“语道”。此处即针对那些时机等而言。“具足慈”:即具足慈心。他们对那个人生起慈心,故称“已生起慈心者”。另外,诸如“诸比丘,于适当时……”等(《律藏·附随》362, 363)圣典文句,其现起是为了显示法的实相,意在说明:“凡为教诫他人而说者,他们是以这些方式来说的。”“作意后”:以极大的欢喜,对彼补特伽罗,释放、放下修习之心,专注安住。“以彼为所缘”:那个补特伽罗是心的所缘,这里指的是慈心。那么,若是如此,此心便是有个别对象的(有限所缘),为何又说它好像没有个别对象(无限所缘)呢?有人质问:“怎能以彼为所缘,而将一切世间悉皆包纳?”对方则以“于五种语道中”等文回答。“在此,以彼为所缘”:意思是于此处圣典中,应理解为省略了“唯”字。显示巴利原文
227.Evaṃ akkhantiyā dosaṃ dassetvāti ‘‘guṇavanto’’ti loke patthaṭakittisaddānampi akkhantinimittaṃ ayasuppattiguṇaparihāniādiṃ akkhamatāyaādīnavaṃ pakāsetvā. Vacanapatheti vacanamagge yuttakālādike. Saṇhābhāvopi hi vacanassa pavattiākāroti katvā ‘‘vacanapatho’’ tveva vutto. Tesaṃyeva kālādīnaṃ. Mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, uppannaṃ mettacittaṃ etesanti uppannamettacittā. Puna ‘‘kālena vā, bhikkhave’’tiādi (pari. 362, 363) pāḷi dhammasabhāvadassanavasena pavattā ‘‘paraṃ codanāvasena vadantā nāma imehi ākārehi vadantī’’ti. Adhimuñcitvāti abhirativasena tasmiṃ puggale bhāvanācittaṃ muñcitvā vissajjetvā. So puggalo ārammaṇaṃ etassāti tadārammaṇaṃ, mettacittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ padesavisayaṃ taṃ kathaṃ nippadesavisayaṃ viya hotīti codento ‘‘kathaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ sabbāvantaṃ lokaṃ karotī’’ti āha, itaro ‘‘pañca vacanapathe’’tiādinā pariharati. Idha tadārammaṇañcāti tasseva mettacittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvāti pāḷiyaṃ vacanaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘puna tassevā’’tiādi. Sabbā sattakāyasaṅkhātā pajā etassa atthīti sabbāvantoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbāvanta’’nti āha. Vipulenāti mahājanārammaṇena. Mahantapariyāyo hi vipula-saddo, mahattañcettha bahukabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘anekasattārammaṇenā’’ti. Tañca puggalanti pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalaṃ. Cittassāti mettāsahagatacittassa. Ettha ca mettāsahagatena cetasā viharissāmāti sambandho. Tattha kathanti āha ‘‘tañca puggalaṃ sabbañca lokaṃ tassa cittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā adhimuccitvā’’ti.
228 「阐明其义者」:指已正确修习慈心解脱而安住者,由于已无嗔恚,无论遇到何种状况,心都不会变异,这便是阐明其义。「非地」:即非地,因为不是地,故称非地。「全无非地」:指完全没有任何地的性质。为何说「在横向上则没有分齐」呢?难道不是由铁围山分隔一个个轮围界吗?并非如此,因为其他轮围界的大地与这个轮围界的大地是连成一片的。就像三个轮子之间的空隙处,在三个、三个世界之间没有大地,因为那里是世界中间地狱的所在。而在铁围山彼此相连接之处,大地是一体的。劫初形成之时,正在形成的大地也是与既成的大地连成一片而形成的。因此说「在横向上则没有分齐」。正是以此甚深之理,说明在所述大小范围之外,再无其他。显示巴利原文
228.Tadatthadīpikanti yā mettaṃ cetovimuttiṃ sammadeva bhāvetvā ṭhitassa nibbikārato kenaci vikāraṃ na āpādetabbatā, tadatthajotikaṃ. Apathavinti pathavī na hotīti apathavī. Nippathavinti sabbena sabbaṃ pathavībhāvābhāvaṃ. Tiriyaṃ pana aparicchinnāti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu cakkavāḷapabbatehi taṃ taṃ cakkavāḷaṃ paricchindati? Na, tadaññacakkavāḷapathaviyā ekābaddhabhāvato. Tiṇṇañhi cakkānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antareyeva pathavī natthi lokantaranirayabhāvato. Cakkavāḷapabbatantarehi sambaddhaṭṭhāne pathavī ekābaddhāva. Vivaṭṭakāle hi saṇṭhahamānāpi pathavī yathāsaṇṭhitapathaviyā ekābaddhāva saṇṭhahati. Tenāha ‘‘tiriyaṃ pana aparicchinnā’’ti. Imināva gambhīrabhāvena vuttaparimāṇato paraṃ natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti.
229 「姜黄色」:指如同姜黄那样的颜色,因此说「任何黄色的东西」。「有色」:指拥有名为颜色的色法;「非有色」:即不具有,故说「无色」。因此说「这是遮止了可见性的缘故」。显示巴利原文
229.Haliddīti haliddivaṇṇaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci pītakavaṇṇa’’nti. Vaṇṇasaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī, na rūpīti arūpīti āha ‘‘arūpo’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘sanidassanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti.
230 「五百由旬」:这是依从雪山进入大海之处而言,并非从无热恼池的湖口算起。与其他河流相比,因其深度极深、水量无可测量,故说「甚深、不可测量」。而在义注中,这只是为了说明它不能被小小草炬烧热,才说「以这种情况」等。显示巴利原文
230.Pañca yojanasatānīti himavantato samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, na anotattadahamukhato. Aññā nadiyo upādāya labbhamānaṃ gambhīrataṃ appameyyaudakatañca gahetvā ‘‘gambhīrā appameyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tiṇukkāya tāpetabbattābhāvadassanaparametanti vuttaṃ ‘‘etena payogenā’’tiādi.
231 「像棉的」:如同木棉攀缘茎上的棉絮,故说「像木棉之绵者」。「嘶嘶声」:指发出如“嘶嘶”这般的声音,用以表示嘶叫声。同样地,「嗡嗡声」也是如此。这一切都是为了显示:安住于慈者的心不可破坏。在此,其略义为:犹如大地不能被任何人变成非地,犹如不能在虚空中安立任何色法,犹如恒河水不能以小草炬烧热,犹如猫皮所做的气囊无法变得硬涩粗糙;同样地,对于已修习、数数修习、广大修习的慈心解脱,那个以五种语道前来的人,无论用何种方法,都不能令心变异。显示巴利原文
231. Tūlinī viya tūlinīti āha ‘‘simbalitūlalatātūlasamānā’’ti. Sassaranti evaṃpavatto saddo sassarasaddo. Anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Tathā bhabbharasaddo. Sabbametaṃ mettāvihārino cittassa dūsetuṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvadassanaparaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yathā mahāpathavī kenaci purisena apathaviṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, yathā ākāse kiñci rūpaṃ paṭṭhapetuṃ na sakkā, yathā gaṅgāya udakaṃ tiṇukkāya tāpetuṃ na sakkā, yathā ca biḷārabhastaṃ thaddhaṃ pharusañca samphassaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, evamevaṃ mettāya cetovimuttiyā āsevitāya bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapurisena kenaci pariyāyena cittassa aññathattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkāti.
232 「密探」:指那些通过伤害他人而从事卑劣行业的人,因此说「从事卑微行业的人」。「以不能忍受故」:即不能忍耐。当他人做了对自己不利之事时,若因内心嗔恨而生起愤怒,他便不算是「于我教法中如法行道之人」。显示巴利原文
232.Ocarakāti parūpaghātavasena hīnakammakārino. Tenāha ‘‘nīcakammakārakā’’ti. Anadhivāsanenāti akkhamanena. Mayhaṃ ovādakaro na hotīti paramhi anatthakārimhi cittapadosanena āghātuppādanena mama sāsane sammāpaṭipajjamāno nāma na hoti.
233 「细」:指微小的、薄的、少量的。「粗」:指大的、粗重的。此处所指为「语道」,故应依其有过失的类别来理解,因而说「小过失或大过失」。由于以忍辱应对这些便不成重负,故他们说道:「不能忍受……我们看」。「长时间」:指极长的时间,意即毕竟、究竟。而所谓的毕竟利益与安乐,必定是通过证得阿拉汉果才能达到的,故说「以阿拉汉果掌握究竟」。显示巴利原文
233.Aṇunti appakaṃ tanu parittakaṃ. Thūlanti mahantaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Vacanapathassa pana adhippetattā taṃ sāvajjavibhāgena gahetabbanti āha ‘‘appasāvajjaṃ vā mahāsāvajjaṃ vā’’ti. Khantiyā idaṃ bhāriyaṃ na hotīti avocuṃ ‘‘anadhi…pe… passāmā’’ti. Dīgharattanti cirakālaṃ, accantamevāti attho. Accantañca hitasukhaṃ nāma aññādhigamenevāti āha ‘‘arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto’’ti.
第二、《蛇喻经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Alagaddūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
234 「伤害」指打击。「障碍」:以系缚种种成就的方式,来到众生相续的中间,即现法利益等无义,因为不可逾越,所以与那障碍相应的、或应得障碍之果的、或具有造作障碍之性质的,就称为「障碍法」。因此说‘因为能造作障碍,所以称为障碍法’。无间法:指具有无间自性的思心所法。在这里,它的词义是——死后的无间果报,称为无间;与这无间相应的,或者由它产生而无间造作的性质,或者以无间为作用的,就是无间法。这些也就是无间。业本身即是障碍法,所以叫「业障碍法」。只障碍解脱,不障碍生天,因为不具有邪行的特相。比丘尼中确实没有以法护身的情况,这是针对普通比丘尼来说的;如果是圣者比丘尼,她所造作的业,必定是能招感恶趣的。这里的例证就是南达童子。又或者说,由于两者有共同的意乐,所以不是生天的障碍;但解脱的障碍性,是由于破坏了解脱道的修行。不过,如果造作的力量过于强烈,也不能阻止它成为生天的障碍。无因见、无作见、无有见,这三种见当它们成为决定性的状态时,就是「决定邪见法」。「结生法」指的是结生心的生起。这里提到黄门等,只是举例而已,因为一切无因的结生都是异熟障。如果是诽谤圣者,那个思心所就是「诽谤圣者法」。「从此以后」指从请求原谅之后。其余在这里应当说的,都已在《大狮子吼经》的义解中讲过了。只要宣称拥有比丘身份,便是犯了波罗夷。对于其他重罪,不出罪;轻罪,不忏悔。显示巴利原文
234.Bādhayiṃsūti (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417) haniṃsu. Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho, anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Ānantariyadhammāti ānantariyasabhāvacetanādhammā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – cutianantaraphalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttā, tannibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlā, anantarapayojanāti vā ānantarikā, te eva ānantariyāti vuttā. Kammāni eva antarāyikāti kammantarāyikā. Mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassa micchācāralakkhaṇābhāvato. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunīvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattaniyameva. Nandamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā asaggantarāyikatā, mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthapaṭipattiyā vidūsanato, abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyaṃ saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti. Ahetukadiṭṭhiakiriyadiṭṭhinatthikadiṭṭhiyova niyatabhāvaṃ pattā niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammāti paṭisandhicittuppādamāha. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Yā hi ariye upavadati, sā cetanā ariyūpavādadhammā. Tato paranti khamāpanato upari. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāsīhanādassa līnatthapakāsane vuttameva. Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti pārājikaṃ āpanno. Na vuṭṭhāti sesaṃ garukāpattiṃ. Na deseti lahukāpattiṃ.
这位比丘名为阿利吒。“将味与味混合”:即把无过失的资具受用味,混同于有过失的五欲受用味,并使之等同。“如同导向”:谓如同导向束缚。也有版本读作“如同连结”。“如同引合”:把一向有过失的东西,通过投入无过失性的方式,引合它们相似。“邪恶”:因具卑劣之义及导致恶趣之义,故称邪恶。恰似想用造桥的方法来束缚大海一般。他将一切知智所见为“有过失”的,执取为“无过失”,由此而违背了那位尊者。他以执取“决定非障碍”,排斥了无畏智。他说欲刺不能染污圣道的正行道,因此被说成“在圣道上投入树桩荆棘等”。这里是指在第一部波罗夷学处的教轮之中,以及在“舍弃非梵行”等教诫的教轮之中。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ bhikkhu ariṭṭho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjaṃ kāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ samānetvā. Upanento viyāti bandhanaṃ upanento viya. ‘‘Ghaṭento viyā’’tipi pāṭho. Upasaṃharanto viyāti sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ekantasāvajje anavajjabhāvapakkhepena. Pāpakanti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakaṃ. Setukaraṇavasena mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘anavajja’’nti gahaṇena tena paṭivirujjhanto. Ekantato anantarāyikanti gahaṇena vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto. Kāmakaṇṭakehi ariyamaggasammāpaṭipatti na upakkilissatīti vadanto ‘‘ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīnipakkhipanto’’ti vutto. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadasaṅkhāte, ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.8, 194) ādidesanāsaṅkhāte ca āṇācakke.
当被询问时,即是“审问”。因为询问也就是审问的意思。为了反驳凭借该见解所得的主张,通过再次反诘让他重新承认并确立——这就好像拿着它让他接受一样,因此说“正教导”。当那个见解被审问时,他所说的理由也仅仅是看似合理的,因此对他的询问便称为“一同劝说”。以灼烧的意义——因为是错误的修行方式,能在现世与来世灼烧;以大热恼的意义——因为没有恒常稳固的自性;以短暂现前的意义——因为只有片刻的愉悦;以暂时的意义——因为会被其他所制伏;以毁坏所有肢节的意义——因为有割截、破坏等诉讼的性质;以如同拔除的意义——因为如同掘凿;以在无疮处生疮、向内侵入的自性之义——因为能刺穿;以成为现世与来世无义之相的意义——即具有危险与怖畏的意义。“以见力”:即由于那个见已达到强而有力的状态。“以见取”:即由于称为见的执取。因为见本身超越了法的自性,向外执取,所以称为执取。“倾向”——显示巴利原文
Pucchamānā samanuyuñjanti nāma. Pucchā hi anuyogoti. Tenādhigatāya laddhiyā anuvajjanatthaṃ paccanubhāsanena puna paṭijānāpanaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ, taṃ panassa ādāya samādāpanaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘samanugāhanti nāmā’’ti. Tassā pana laddhiyā anuyuñjitāya vuccamānampi kāraṇaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakamevāti tassa pucchanaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ. Anudahanaṭṭhena anupāyapaṭipattiyā sampati āyatiñca anudahanaṭṭhena. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya. Ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena muhuttaramaṇīyatāya. Tāvakālikaṭṭhena parehi abhibhavanīyatāya. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena chedanabhedanādiadhikaraṇabhāvena. Ugghāṭasadisatāya adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena. Avaṇe vaṇaṃ uppādetvā anto anupavisanasabhāvatāya vinivijjhanaṭṭhena. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthanimittatāya sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.Diṭṭhithāmenāti tassā diṭṭhiyā thāmagatabhāvena. Diṭṭhiparāmāsenāti diṭṭhisaṅkhātaparāmasanena. Diṭṭhiyeva hi dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanena parāmāso. Abhinivissāti taṇhābhinivesapubbaṅgamena diṭṭhābhinivesena ‘‘idamevettha tatha’’nti abhinivisitvā. Yasmā hi abhinivesanaṃ tattha abhiniviṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti.Tasmā āha ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā’’ti.
235 「即使想说『没有』」:指由于想要隐藏自己的见解,也想加以贬低。他接受并承认。「两种说」:指相违的说法。因先前所说的真实语与现在所说的不实语,依这两种情况而称为两种说。显示巴利原文
235.Natthīti vattukāmopīti attano laddhiṃ niguhetukāmatāya avajānitukāmopi. Sampaṭicchati paṭijānāti. Dve kathāti visaṃvādanakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Abhūtakathā hi pubbe pavattā bhūtakathāya vasena dve kathāti vuccati.
236 「到底是为了谁呢?」——导师以此显示:「像你这样的人,过去从未有过为了你而说法开示的事。」因此说「或是为了刹帝利」等等。显示巴利原文
236.Kassa kho nāmāti iminā satthā ‘‘na mama tuyhaṃ tādisassa atthāya dhammadesanā nāma bhūtapubbā’’ti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘khattiyassa vā’’tiādi.
拥有由智所生的暖(usmā)者,称为「有暖者」(usmī)。由于那样的缘而使其得暖,在那有身之中,即使尚未通达的胎藏也因此得暖——即已被耕耘——所以世尊问比丘们:「于此法律中,是否仍有慧种?」比丘们予以否定的回答,是因为他们看到了由于已串习的恶行导致其智慧被破坏的状态。「成为无热」:即变成无有热力,达到了热力衰退的状态。因此,他无力在比丘们面前抬头正视,只是垂肩低头。因为丝毫说不出任何如法之语,所以是「无辩才者」。「带来成就」:即能带来成就。「予以止息」:即遮止。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇamayā usmā etassa atthīti usmī, tathārūpehi paccayehi anusmīkato tasmiṃ attabhāve paṭivedhagabbhoapi usmīkatoti vikatabhāvato paññābījamassa imasmiṃ dhammavinaye api nu atthīti bhagavā bhikkhū pucchati. Te paṭikkhipantā vadanti ṭhānagatena duccaritena ñāṇupahatabhāvaṃ sampassantā. Nittejabhūtoti nittejaṃ bhūto tejohānippatto. Tato eva bhikkhūnampi sammukhā oloketuṃ asamatthatāya pattakkhandho adhomukho. Sahadhammikaṃ kiñci vattuṃ avisahanato appaṭibhāno. Sampattūpaganti sampattiāvahaṃ. Paṭippassambhentoti paṭisedhento.
237 他通过揭示与障碍相关之见的本质,来清净大众,将持不清净见者予以除遣。这是针对某些不知佛陀威神力的人而言。因为那些人可能会这样想:‘这是佛陀随口说的。’然而,佛陀绝无轻率行事之时。此处的‘他’,即前文所说的那位比丘。‘即使听了也可能保持沉默’是与‘或者可能’相关联而说的。凡此‘假如……’等言论,皆为假设。‘他们不会造作’这句话,则是与‘清净大众之见’相关联而说。‘显示其见解’:即通过指出那极为重大的罪过性来显示。‘通过想与寻’:是由执取净相、随好等而生起的想与寻,因此注释书说‘与烦恼欲相应’。‘行淫’:这是就特定情况而说。除此之外,如‘然而,比丘接受女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、擦身’等经文所提到的,都是关于与法不相应、涉于物质享受的染着行为。至于‘离开了诸欲、离开了欲想、离开了欲寻而行淫’,这样的道理是绝不存在的。显示巴利原文
237. Antarāyakaraladdhiyā sabhāvavibhāvanena parisaṃ sodheti. Nissāreti nīharati avisuddhadiṭṭhitāya. Kassaci buddhānubhāvaṃ ajānantassa. Tassa hi evaṃ bhaveyya ‘‘sahasā kathita’’nti. Na hi kadāci buddhānaṃ sahasā kiriyā nāma atthi. Assāti ‘‘kassacī’’ti vuttabhikkhussa. Sutvāpituṇhībhāvaṃ āpajjeyyāti athāpi siyāti sambandho. Taṃ sabbanti ‘‘sace hī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ sabbaṃ parikappanaṃ. Na karissantīti parisāya laddhiṃ sodhetīti sambandho. Laddhiṃ pakāsentoti mahāsāvajjatāvasena pakāsento. Saññāvitakkehīti subhanimittānubyañjanaggāhādivasena pavattehi saññāvitakkehi. Tenāha ‘‘kilesakāmasampayuttehī’’ti. Methunasamācāranti idaṃ adhikāravasena vuttaṃ. Tadaññampi pana – ‘‘apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaṃ parimaddanaṃ nahāpanaṃ sambāhanaṃ sādiyatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) āgataṃ visabhāgavatthuvisayaṃ āmisaparibhogaṃ. ‘‘Aññatreva kāmehi aññatra kāmasaññāhi aññatra kāmavitakkehi samācarissatī’’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati.
238 通过如理观察,发现对此无有欲贪,故称‘离欲贪者’,即离欲贪的状态。对于那些有时持守布萨戒、有时不持的戒行不定在家人,由于他们受持戒律的状态不恒定,这本身便成为障碍。其中也包括带着欲贪去受用所缘的欲乐。若不如理观察,对比丘而言也会成为障碍。这也包括带着欲贪去受用资具。‘这位阿利吒比丘由于错误地执取了所学的教法,既诽谤了我们,也伤害了自己,还生起了大量非福。’为了让这样的念头不要生起,世尊在指出错误执取教法的过失时如此说道。‘学习’:即包括背诵,也包括能熟练地口头诵出并牢记不忘。显示巴利原文
238. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇena natthi ettha chandarāgoti nicchandarāgo, taṃ nicchandarāgaṃ. Kadāci uposathikabhāvena samādinnasīlāpi honti kadāci noti anibaddhasīlānaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlasamādānabhāvato antarāyakaraṃ. Vatthukāmānaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca. Apaccavekkhaṇena bhikkhūnaṃ āvaraṇakaraṃ. Paccayānaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca. Ayaṃ ariṭṭho duggahitāya pariyattiyā vasena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khanati, bahuñca apuññaṃ pasavatīti evaṃ saññā mā hontūti duggahitāya pariyattiyā dosaṃ dassento āha. Uggaṇhantīti sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggataṃ karontā dhārenti cāti attho.
以‘经’等为代表,涵盖了整个九分教的圣典教法。为什么说经典有九种分类?因为带偈颂的经属于应颂,无偈颂的经属于记说;而既非此二者、又无自说等别立名称的经,实际上并不存在。如果说应归入经分,那么像《吉祥经》这样的经典,由于它没有偈颂,便无法归入经分,就如同《法句经》一样;或者说,由于它带有偈颂,就应像《有偈品》那样归入应颂分。同样的道理,对于《分别论》等中带有偈颂的部分……那么,究竟应如何解说呢?答案是:显示巴利原文
Suttantiādinā navappabhedampi pariyattidhammaṃ pariyādiyati. Kathaṃ suttaṃ navappabhedaṃ? Sagāthakañhi suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, tadubhayavinimuttañca suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññāvirahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnañca suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya, geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthāvaggassa viya, tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
它们依各自的相而安立,虽与其它特征共存,却不因此而转为别类。
显示巴利原文 Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare; Sanimittā nirūḷhattā, sahatāññena naññato. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.nidānakathāvaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.6; sārattha. ṭī. 1.bāhiranidānakathā);
因为,对于世尊的一切教法而言,“经”是一总称。是故,尊者大迦旃延在《导论》中说“探求九分教之经”,正如“这些世尊之教说入于经、摄于经”以及“自宗中有五百经”等所说。然而在细分中,应颂等类别则依各自不同的特征而安立。例如,应颂即以“含有偈颂”之相而确立。世间也将具有诗律、偈颂或首卢伽陀的作品称为“应颂”。若全无偈颂,则以“有问有答”之相作为记说立名,因为一问一答即称为“记说”,也就是veyyākaraṇa。显示巴利原文
Sabbassapi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tenevāha āyasmā mahākaccāno nettiyaṃ (netti. 1.saṅgahavāra) ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti. ‘‘Ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ (pāci. 655, 1242), sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) evamādi ca etassa atthassa sādhakaṃ. Tadekadesesu pana geyyādayo visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ vā cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti. Gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati, byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ.
若是如此,那些带有偈颂、却以提问后作解答的方式展开的经文,是否也会变成记说呢?并不会,因为‘应颂’等名称于此根本没有安立的余地,而且已特别限定为‘无偈颂时’。正如在《法句》等纯粹由偈颂构成的作品中,在虽带有偈颂却与喜悦与智慧所成偈颂相应的作品中,在与‘如是我闻’等开篇语相连接的作品中,以及在与未曾有法相关的特定经典中,依次安立了‘偈颂’、‘自说’、‘如是语’、‘未曾有法’的名称;同样地,虽是偈颂的形式,但在阐明世尊过去生中行持与威神力的经典中,便安立了‘本生’的名称;虽具有问答形式并带有偈颂,但在某些经典中,因能令人获得智慧,便安立了‘吠陀罗’的名称。如此,凭借着各自具有的‘带有偈颂’等特征,在那些特定的经典上确立了‘应颂’等名称。这些不同的分类,是在‘经’这个总称之外别立的‘应颂’等分支。而对于那些不具有应颂等分支特征的,就保留‘经’这个总称,这是在排除了特殊名称后,以普通名称来称呼它。难道不是这样吗:带有偈颂的经是应颂,没有偈颂的经是记说,如此一来,‘经分’这个概念不就不能成立了吗?这个责难现在还继续存在吗?不,它已经显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato, ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā ca. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu, sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāyuttesu, ‘‘vuttañheta’’nti (itivu. 1) ādivacanasambandhesu, abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthā-udāna-itivuttaka-abbhutadhamma-saññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā, satipi pañhavissajjanabhāve sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo. Yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgaṃ visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanatoti. Nanu ca sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti suttaṅgaṃ na sambhavatīti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe ‘‘gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimitta’’nti.
而所谓‘因无偈颂,《吉祥经》等便不应归入经分’,此说并不成立,因他们久已成为定称。事实上,《吉祥经》等正是以‘经’的形式而为人公认的。它们并非如《法句》、《佛史》等那样,因无偈颂而为人所知,而是以其为‘经’的形式而广为人知。正因如此,注疏中才称其为‘名为经’。而所谓‘因带有偈颂,故应归入应颂支’,此说也不成立,因为‘伴随’意味着与另一者共存。‘与偈颂一起’即是‘带有偈颂’,而所谓‘伴随’,其义理确实是与他者一同存在。然而在《吉祥经》等之中,并没有任何一段脱离偈颂而单独存在的经文可被称为‘与偈颂一起’,也没有一个脱离偈颂的独立集合体。还有人说的‘在《分别论》等之中,那些带有偈颂的段落应归入应颂支’,这也不对,因为那些偈颂属于其他分类。那些偈颂本身是属于本生等所摄的,因此,不会因为它们而使《分别论》等变成应颂支。应当这样理解:经分等各个分类之间是决不会彼此混淆的。显示巴利原文
Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti (khu. pā. 5.1; su. ni. 261), taṃ na, niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena paññātāni, kintu suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘suttanāmaka’’nti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti , tadapi natthi, yasmā sahatāññena. Saha gāthāhīti hi sagāthakaṃ, sahabhāvo ca nāma atthato aññena hoti, na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttapadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya, na ca samudāyo nāma koci atthi. Yadapi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tadapi na aññato. Aññā eva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā, ato na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti. Evaṃ suttādīnaṃ aṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabbo.
‘Atthattha’指的是真实的义,即‘如实之义’。有些人却因颠倒,将‘非义’执取为‘义’,所以才特别加上‘Atthattha’一词来加以简别。而‘Kāraṇattha’指的是‘作为因的义’,意思是:戒是定的因,定又是观的因,像这样,它就是指那一层层作为原因的义。所以,经文才说‘在此处,戒’等等。这是在阐明:他们无法了知——‘这里讲戒,完全是为了定;讲定是为了观;讲观是为了道;讲道是为了果;讲流转,完全是为了证得还灭。’像这样,他们无法了知。因此我们应当明白,在经典中,‘attha’这个词包含了‘所说之义’和‘目的义’这两个层面。‘不摄持’,是指他们不仔细抉择,不能成为堪忍审查智慧的人。意思就是,他们不是那种能在审查后、以智慧欢喜信受法义的人。就这样,他们学习这教法,竟是为了‘脱开论诤’的利益,把学习佛法变成了脱开别人加给自己的非难、使自己获得解脱的手段;或者说,‘vādappamokkha’就是指从毁谤中脱身。所谓‘为彼之义’,是指为了通过圆满戒律等所应证得的,或显示巴利原文
Atthatthanti atthabhūtaṃ yathābhūtaṃ atthaṃ. Anatthampi keci vipallāsavasena ‘‘attho’’ti gaṇhantīti ‘‘atthattha’’nti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Kāraṇatthanti kāraṇabhūtaṃ atthaṃ, sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyāti evaṃ tassa tassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ atthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīla’’ntiādi. Tenetaṃ dasseti – imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, tañca yāvadeva samādhatthaṃ, samādhi vipassanattho, vipassanā maggatthā, maggo phalattho, vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ yāvadeva vivaṭṭādhigamatthanti jānituṃ na sakkontīti. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘attha’’nti iminā bhāsitatthapayojanatthānaṃ gahitatā veditabbā. Na pariggaṇhantīti na vicārenti, nijjhānapaññākkhamā na honti, nijjhāyitvā paññāya rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo. Iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā attano upari parehi āropitavādassa niggahassa mokkhapayojanā hutvā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti. Vādappamokkho vā nindāpamokkho. Yassa cāti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇena pattabbassa, maggassa vā tadadhigamena pattabbassa, phalassa vā tadadhigamena pattabbassa, anupādāvimokkhassa vā atthāya. Dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, ñāyena pariyāpuṇantīti adhippāyo. Nānubhonti na vindanti. Tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitā upārambhamānadappamakkhapaḷāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti.
239 「Alagaddo(蛇喻)」:意为「蛇」,在此指教理。此词由省略鼻音并增入「d」音而构成,即「alaṃ pariyatto gado assāti alagaddo」。为渡越轮回的苦荒漠而修学的教理,名为「渡越教理」。被委任守护库房者,称为「库管」;仅如库管般唯以守护法宝为事的教理,即是「库管式教理」。所谓「就是护持传承者」,是以狮子回顾般的决断语气,指出其纯然只是「持教者」、「护传统者」;这一界定同样适用于前述那两种教理。显示巴利原文
239. Alaṃ pariyatto gado assāti alagaddo anunāsikalopaṃ da-kārāgamañca katvā. Vaṭṭadukkhakantārato nittharaṇatthāya pariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti. Bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, bhaṇḍāgāriko viya bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammaratanānupālako. Aññaṃ atthaṃ anapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti. ‘‘Vaṃsānurakkhakovā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ sīhāvalokanañāyena tantidhārakova paveṇipālakovāti purimapadadvayepi yojetabbaṃ.
若有问难:「若为持诵佛语等目的而学习佛语,便属库管式教理,那为何特别指明是『诸漏尽者』?难道某些凡夫不也存在这种方式吗?」对此,答复道:「然而,凡夫……」「于自位」,即处在渡越之位上。纵然凡夫也抱着「我将守护传统」的发心而学,然因其自身尚未渡越有爱的浩瀚荒漠,其教理终究只是「库管式教理」——这是意趣所在。故说「凡夫」云云。显示巴利原文
Yadi tantidhāraṇādiatthaṃ buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavassā’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ, nanu ekaccassa puthujjanassapi ayaṃ nayo labbhatīti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi. Attano ṭhāneti nittharaṇaṭṭhāne. Kāmaṃ puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti. Attano pana bhavakantārato anittiṇṇattā tassa sā pariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti eva nāma hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘puthujjanassā’’tiādi.
「堪能审查」:指能够审察的智慧。于各处开示的戒等法,他们能在细密思择之后,以智慧感到欢喜,然后如实地去领受。因此说「此处,戒」云云。为了说明并非仅仅依靠善巧持守教理便能成就道的修习与果的证悟,就连降伏外道论难、建立自宗等事,也都能够成功,故说「他宗」等。所以才引述:「降伏已起的他宗论难,以正法善加降伏后」云云(长部2.268)。「所欲之处」:指以解开邪见等方式,所期望的任何一处经文段落。「解脱」:指排除、摆脱。错误把持虽会招致不利与痛苦,但善巧持守的教理一旦确立,其本身即是未来利益与安乐生起的直接原因。同样应当看到,善于把持蛇喻之人,是能够带来利益与安乐的。显示巴利原文
Nijjhānaṃ khamantīti nijjhānapaññaṃ khamanti. Tattha tattha āgate sīlādidhamme nijjhāyitvā paññāya rocetvā yāthāvato gahetabbā honti. Tenāha ‘‘idha sīla’’ntiādi. Na kevalaṃ suggahitaṃ pariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyā, paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanādīnipi ijjhantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘paravāde’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahaṃ niggahitvā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.268). Icchiticchitaṭṭhānanti diṭṭhiviniveṭhanādivasena icchitaṃ icchitaṃ pāḷipadesaṃ. Mocetunti apanetuṃ. Ahitāya dukkhāya asaṃvattanampi tadabhāve uppajjanakahitasukhassa kāraṇameva tasmiṃ sati bhāvatoti. Suggahitaalagaddassapi hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanatā daṭṭhabbā.
240 “渡越桥”(uttarasetu):‘uttaro’意为由此渡越,‘setu’意为捆绑;它既是能渡越者,又是桥,故称“渡越桥”。“筏”:指能将人运载、送达彼岸的工具。“结扎成束”:即将竹子或芦苇等结扎成束而缚成筏。“细”:指以八种等至为所缘的结缚。“粗”:指其余之外的结缚。“见”:指如实见,也就是观。如此清净、如此洁白:指于三界一切法,皆了知“这不是我的,这并非我,这并非我的我”;以此灭除渴爱与邪见的染污而彻底清净,正因如此清净,才说“洁白”。“不应依止”:指不应以贪喜之心去倚靠。“不应取著”:指不应执取为“我所拥有的”。“不应视为财物”:指不应将其视作财物或资产。“双方面”:指在止与观二者之上。显示巴利原文
240. Uttaranti etenāti uttaro, sinanti bandhantīti setu, uttaro ca so setu cāti uttarasetu. Kūlaṃ paratīraṃ vahati pāpetīti kullaṃ. Kalāpaṃ katvā baddhoti veḷunaḷādīhi kalāpavasena baddho. Aṇunti idaṃ aṭṭhasamāpattiārammaṇaṃ saññojanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Thūlanti itaraṃ. Diṭṭhinti yathābhūtadassanaṃ, vipassananti attho. Evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātanti tebhūmakesu dhammesu ñātaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti, evaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkilesābhāvena sabbaso visuddhaṃ, parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ. Na allīyethāti nikantivasena na nissayetha. Na kelāyethāti na mamāyetha. Na dhanāyethāti dhanaṃ drabyaṃ na kayirātha. Ubhayatthāti samathe vipassanāya ca.
关于“非正法”(asaddhamma)等词:“asataṃ hīnajjhāsayānaṃ dhammo”,下劣意乐者的法,名为“非正法”。村居者的法,名为“村法”(gāmadhammo)。因诸烦恼具流漏之性,故名“卑劣法”(vasaladhammo)。为由烦恼所染、粗重故,名“秽恶”(duṭṭhullo)。以用水净为究竟,故名“水净者”(odakantiko)。纵使以“诸比丘,法亦当舍”这一教诫来告诫比丘们,世尊也正是为了指出:如此固执之人正是冷酷愚顽之辈。显示巴利原文
Asaddhammetiādīsu asataṃ hīnajjhāsayānaṃ dhammoti asaddhammo. Gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammoti gāmadhammo. Kilesānaṃ vassanasabhāvatāya vasaladhammo. Kilesehi dūsitattā thūlattā ca duṭṭhullo. Udakasuddhipariyosānatāya odakantiko. ‘‘Dhammāpi vo pahātabbā’’ti imināpi ovādena bhikkhū uddissa kathentopi ariṭṭhaṃyeva niggaṇhāti.
241 “由三种执取”:是指由渴爱、慢、见这三种方式去执取。若如是,为何通常只说“执取我”和“执取我所”这两种执取呢?这并不矛盾,因为在说那两种时,其实也已将三种执取全部含摄了。说到“我”一词时,因通于“我是”这一执取的通称,所以便同时说了慢的执取与见的执取。所谓“见”,即是“见处”,因为它能成为前起的见、后续的见、有身见、常见等生起的原因。它的所缘是五蕴,以及色所缘等。见的缘有无明、触、想、寻、非理作意、恶友、外闻等等,这些便是见的依止等缘。其实《无碍解道》中也已说过:“什么是八种见处?无明、触、想、寻、非理作意、恶友、外闻都是见处”等等。“色所缘”:是指以具有坏灭性质的法作为所缘。然而此处,不应说“色是我”,因为这里并非在说“以见色为我”的那种执取(相应部3.81, 345)。那种执取在后文以“那种见处”的语句加以阐述。此处若有人认为指的是“见我有色、我中有色、色中有我”这三种执取,那是不合理的。理由在于:色本身并非我,它只是执取“我”时所依的所缘;显示巴利原文
241.Tividhaggāhavasenāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhavasena. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mamāti gaṇhātī’’ti gāhadvayameva kasmā vuttanti? Nayidamevaṃ tatthāpi gāhattayasseva vuttattā. ‘‘Aha’’nti hi iminā mānadiṭṭhiggāhā vuttā ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti gāhasāmaññato. Diṭṭhipi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ purimuppannāya diṭṭhiyā uttaradiṭṭhiyā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā sassatadiṭṭhiyā ca kāraṇabhāvato. Ārammaṇaṃ pañca khandhā, rūpārammaṇādīni ca. Diṭṭhiyā paccayo avijjā-phassa-saññā-vitakka-ayonisomanasikāra-pāpamittaparatoghosādiko diṭṭhiyā upanissayādipaccayo. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.124)‘‘katamāni aṭṭha diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni avijjāpi phassopi saññāpi vitakkopi ayonisomanasikāropi pāpamittopi paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Rūpārammaṇāti ruppanasabhāvadhammārammaṇā. Rūpaṃ pana attāti na vattabbaṃ idha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.81, 345) imassa gāhassa anadhippetattā. So hi ‘‘yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā parato vuccati. Idha pana ‘‘rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, attani rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ attāna’’nti ime tayo gāhā adhippetāti keci, tadayuttaṃ. Yasmā rūpaṃ attā na hoti, attaggāhassa pana ālambanaṃ hoti, attasabhāveyeva vā rūpādidhamme ārabbha attadiṭṭhi uppajjati, na attānaṃ tassa paramatthato anupalabbhanato, tasmā rūpādiārammaṇāva attadiṭṭhīti katvā vuttaṃ, rūpaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti na vattabbanti ayamettha attho. ‘‘Yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pana vipassanāpaṭivipassanā viya diṭṭhianupassanā nāma dassitā.
香处、味处、触处:因属‘到达后方执取’的根的境域,故必须到达(碰触)后方可执取。即于受用自境后,与之建立关系,然后执取。其余七处,则称为‘所识’,因为是由意来识知的;否则,其他处亦会成为‘所识’。‘已到达’指已证得者;‘已遍寻’指已遍搜寻者;‘已遍思’指已以意遍思察者,故说‘以意’。此处,为显示‘已到达、已遍寻’而后‘已遍思’的差别,乃以‘不遮已到达与已遍寻’、‘各别遮’及‘总遮’四种情况,而说‘在世间的已到达’等。遍寻而后到达,是先以意、后以身到达,故称‘已到达’。遍寻而未到达,唯属遍寻状态,故仅称‘已遍寻’。未曾遍寻而到达者,以及未到达者,唯由意识遍思,故称‘意所遍思’。显示巴利原文
Gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanānaṃ sampattagāhindriyavisayatāya patvā gahetabbatā. Tañhi tassa attano visayaṃ paribhutvā sambandhaṃ hutvā gaṇhāti. Avasesāni sattāyatanāni viññātaṃ nāma manasā viññātabbato. Aññathā itaresampi viññātatā siyā. Pattanti adhigataṃ. Pariyesitanti gavesitaṃ. Anuvicaritanti cintitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘manasā’’ti. Ettha ca pattapariyesanānaṃ apaṭikkhepassa, visuṃ, ekajjhaṃ paṭikkhepassa ca vasena catukkoṭikaṃ dassetvā pattapariyesitehi anuvicaritassa bhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘lokasmiñhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariyesitvā pattaṃ paṭhamaṃ cetasā pacchā kāyena pattattā pattaṃ nāma. Pariyesitvā nopattaṃ pariyesitaṃ nāma kevalaṃ pariyesitabhāvato. Apariyesitvā pattañca nopattañca manasā anuvicaritabbato manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma.
而此区分似显杂乱,因此说‘或者’等。所谓‘已到达’义,即依已到达的状态、已到达的共通性而说。‘未曾遍寻、未到达而意所遍思’,因无到达亦无遍寻,故称意所遍思。或者说,这一切即是‘遍寻而到达者’等所说的四种。由‘凡彼见处’等语句,是依以识为所缘的渴爱、慢、见,以剩余智(排除法)来说明。那么,以剩余智来摄持有何作用?答:‘为开示之庄严’等。对于应调伏者,若不触及所应开示之法自体,而须经由阐明所缘的作用、相应法、果的差别等他方面方能通达,便以这些种种差别法教导;对于仅需单一方面或仅阐明自体即能通达者,则唯宣说彼法——以如来是法自在者故,亦能以无余方式作阐明,此即开示之庄严。因此说‘依见等之所缘而显示识’。显示巴利原文
Ayañca vikappo ākulo viyāti ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pattaṭṭhenāti pattabhāvena pattatāsāmaññena. Apariyesitvā nopattaṃ manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma pattiyā pariyesanāya ca abhāvato. Sabbaṃ vā etanti ‘‘pariyesitvā pattampī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ catubbidhampi. Imināti ‘‘yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ’’tiādivacanena. Viññāṇārammaṇā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo kathitā pārisesañāyena . Evaṃ pārisesañāyapariggahe kiṃ payojananti āha ‘‘desanāvilāsenā’’tiādi. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ desetabbadhammassa sarūpaṃ anāmasitvā ārammaṇakicca-sampayuttadhamma-phalavisesādi-pakārantaravibhāvanena paṭivedho hoti, tesaṃ tappakārabhedehi dhammehi, yesaṃ pana yena ekeneva pakārena sarūpeneva vā vibhāvane kate paṭivedho hoti, tesaṃ taṃ vatvā dhammissarattā tadaññaṃ niravasesākāravibhāvanañca desanāvilāso. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhādiārammaṇavasena viññāṇaṃ dassita’’nti.
‘见处’即见本身作为见处,也就是前文所说之理。此见于色中执取‘世间与自我’,故针对彼色而说‘彼世间、彼我’之语,应如此连结。‘我死后当有’——此依死后有想论者之立场而说此见,故言‘彼我往他世而成常恒’等。其中,‘常恒’即坚固,‘常住’即一切时存续,‘不变易之法’即不依老、死而变易的自性,意为无变异。彼见也如是执取,以渴爱与见执取的殊胜而执取,故说‘此是我所’等。‘以见为所缘’即以见为境域。复次,见如何成为见的境域?答:‘以观……’等。于逆观时,即从双观等时,应知犹如文法家之于音声、明智者之于明智论,于见上,唯有见行者才能生起见执取。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhiṭṭhānanti diṭṭhi eva diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Yaṃ rūpaṃ esā diṭṭhi ‘‘loko ca attā cā’’ti gaṇhāti. Taṃ rūpaṃ sandhāya ‘‘so loko so attā’’ti vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā. So peccabhavissāmīti uddhamāghātanikavādavasenāyaṃ diṭṭhīti āha ‘‘so ahaṃ paralokaṃ gantvā nicco bhavissāmī’’tiādi. Dhuvoti thiro. Sassatoti sabbadābhāvī. Avipariṇāmadhammoti jarāya maraṇena ca avipariṇāmetabbasabhāvo, nibbikāroti attho. Tampi dassananti tampi tathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhidassanaṃ attānaṃ viya taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavisesena gaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādi. Diṭṭhārammaṇāti diṭṭhivisayā. Kathaṃ pana diṭṭhi diṭṭhivisayā hotīti āha ‘‘vipassanāyā’’tiādi. Paṭivipassanākāleti yamakato sammasanādikālaṃ sandhāyāha. Tattha akkharacintakānaṃ sadde viya, vedajjhāyīnaṃ vedasatthe viya ca diṭṭhiyaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ diṭṭhiggāhappavatti daṭṭhabbā.
「观」这个字,与它“观”的意义相结合。由此显示所谓的“观”有四种。其中,智是如理地、正确地、如实而观,所以称为「等观」;其余的则依据杂染辗转地随观,所以也称为「等观」。如果这样,见等观因为有了邪观,那么渴爱与慢又怎么成为等观呢?在渴爱中,众生做恶时也有似慧的转起,由此而有欺诳、诡诈、曲心相应;慢也是通过观见“我为胜”等而如此推度。因此应当知道,这渴爱与慢有似等观的转起。在“此是我所”这样执取的渴爱所依处——内五蕴中,当它们无所得、已灭时,他不战栗,因为怖畏战栗与渴爱战栗已经被道断除了。显示巴利原文
Samanupassatīti padassa ca tasso samanupassanā atthoti yojanā. Tena samanupassanā nāma catubbidhāti dasseti. Tattha ñāṇaṃ tāva samavisamaṃ sammā yāthāvato anupassatīti samanupassanā. Itarā pana saṃkilesavasena anu anu passantīti samanupassanā. Yadi evaṃ hotu tāva diṭṭhisamanupassanā micchādassanabhāvato, kathaṃ taṇhāmānāti? Taṇhāyapi sattānaṃ pāpakaraṇe upāyadassanavasena paññāpatirūpikā pavatti labbhateva, yāya vañcananikatisāciyogā sambhavanti. Mānopi seyyādinā dassanavaseneva tathā attānaṃ ūhatīti taṇhāmānānaṃ samanupassanāpatirūpikā pavatti labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avijjamāneti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti evaṃ gahetabbe taṇhāvatthusmiṃ ajjhattakhandhapañcake anupalabbhamāne vinaṭṭhe. Na paritassati bhayaparittāsataṇhāparittāsānaṃ maggena samugghātitattā.
242 说“以四因”,是将“无有则不战栗”所说的与其余三种一起合说为四因。四因即阐述四边空理的因。“外无有”是指外在的所依不存在时。这种不存在,或是已经得到而灭失,或是未得而未获得,因此在圣典中说:“我曾有,而今无有;我将有,而我不获。”将此二者依资具来分别,为了显示其中的战栗,故说“于外资具坏失时”等。其中,车舆指车、乘舆等,坐骑指象、马等。显示巴利原文
242.Catūhi kāraṇehīti ‘‘asati na paritassatī’’ti vuttampi itarehi tīhi saha gahetvā vuttaṃ. Catūhi kāraṇehīti catukkoṭikasuññatākathanassa kāraṇehi. Bahiddhā asatīti bāhire vatthusmiṃ avijjamāne. Sā panassa avijjamānatā laddhavināsena vā aladdhālābhena vāti pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘ahu vata me, taṃ vata me natthi, siyā vata me, taṃ vatāhaṃ na labhāmī’’ti vuttanti tadubhayaṃ parikkhāravasena vibhajitvā tattha paritassanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bahiddhā parikkhāravināse’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yānaṃ ‘‘ratho vayha’’nti evamādi. Vāhanaṃ hatthiassādi.
“以哪些烦恼?”即以未得之希求等诸烦恼。“如是而有”即“我曾有”等的呵责而有。在“见处、见依止、见缠、执取、随眠”中,于辗转生起的诸见中,后生的诸见对于前生的诸见,以因之义为见处,以增上之义为见依止;当到达缠缚的状态时,一切即成为见缠;以“唯此是真实,余为虚妄”的生起而为执取;以未断除之性眠伏于相续中,故为随眠——应当这样了知见处等诸词的区别。由于被渴爱等所摇动,一切行皆为动,故称“一切行动”,其余两句同理。“依”是指苦依止于此,蕴即是依,所以称为“蕴依”,其余也相同。也就是缘于它,渴爱耗尽、离染、灭尽,如此结合。在“我将断灭,我将无有名”等句中,仅仅是语助词,或者表示疑惑。而那些恐惧,是缘于无我所而生的渴爱战栗与怖畏战栗。所以说“彼为此恐惧……”等。“若我无,我所亦无”——据说如果“我”全然没有,“我所”也就无所存。这便是显示恐惧的对治。显示巴利原文
Yehikilesehīti yehi asantapatthanādīhi kilesehi. Evaṃ bhaveyyāti evaṃ ‘‘ahu vata me’’tiādinā codanādi bhaveyya. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapariyuṭṭhānābhinivesānusayānanti ettha aparāparaṃ pavattāsu diṭṭhīsu yā parato uppannā diṭṭhiyo, tāsaṃ purimuppannā diṭṭhiyo kāraṇaṭṭhena diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni. Adhikaraṇaṭṭhena diṭṭhādhiṭṭhānāni, pariyuṭṭhānappattiyā sabbāpi diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānāni. ‘‘Idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.202, 427; 3.27-29; udā. 55; mahāni. 20; netti. 59) pavattiyā abhinivesā. Appahīnabhāvena santāne sayantīti anusayāti evaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānādīnaṃ padānaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Taṇhādīhi kampaniyatāya sabbasaṅkhārāva iñjitānīti sabbasaṅkhāraiñjitāni. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhi, khandhāva upadhi khandhūpadhi. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tadeva ca āgamma taṇhā khīyati virajjati nirujjhatīti yojanā. Ucchijjissāmi nāmassūtiādīsu nipātamattaṃ, saṃsaye vā. Tāsoti attaniyābhāvaṃ paṭicca taṇhāparittāso ceva bhayaparittāso ca. Tenāha ‘‘tāso heso’’tiādi. No cassaṃ,no ca me siyāti ‘‘aha’’nti kira koci no cassaṃ, ‘‘me’’ti ca kiñci no siyāti. Tāsappatīkāradassanañhetaṃ.
243 “至此”,即如“作如是说时”等语所示,或依提问的脉络而展开的“诸比丘,此六见处”等经文。那也是在展示了于内蕴坏灭时有所恐惧者之后,再显示无所恐惧者,因此,对于恐惧者而言,显示空性虽非直接成办其利,却也依然是显示空性,依此而说“四边之空已说”。“外之资具”是指外在的、有识或无识的有情资具,因其作为活命资具的意义而被称为“资具”。于中起了“我所执”,即由于执取“此是我所”而称为摄受。一切的见执,都以“我是常、坚固、常住”或“我断灭、坏灭”这样的有身见为所依,故说“以有身见为首的六十二见”。因为不如实的执取即是执取与施设的支撑,而见本身就是所依,故称“见所依”。“可执取”即结合常等殊胜相而执取。能如此执取的是什么呢?在“诸比丘,汝等可执取彼我语取,可依止彼见所依”等处,其义也是如此。显示巴利原文
243.Ettāvatāti ‘‘evaṃ vutte’’tiādinā, pucchānusandhivasena pavattāya ‘‘chayimāni, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṭṭhānānī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.241) vā. Sāpi hi ajjhattakhandhavināse paritassanakaṃ dassetvā aparitassanakaṃ dassentī pavattāti tassanakassa suññatādassanaṃ akiccasādhakampi suññatādassanamevāti imesaṃ vasena ‘‘catukkoṭikā suññatā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bahiddhā parikkhāranti bāhiraṃ saviññāṇakaṃ aviññāṇakañca sattopakaraṇaṃ. Tañhi jīvitavuttiyā parikkhārakaṭṭhena ‘‘parikkhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Pariggahaṃ nāma katvāti ‘‘mama ida’’nti pariggahetabbatāya pariggahitaṃ nāma katvā. Sabbopi diṭṭhiggāho ‘‘attā nicco dhuvo sassato, attā ucchijjati vinassatī’’tiādinā attadiṭṭhisannissayoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhā dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo’’ti. Ayāthāvaggāhinā abhinivesanapaññāpanānaṃ upatthambhabhāvato diṭṭhi eva nissayoti diṭṭhinissayo. Pariggaṇheyyāti niccādivisesayuttaṃ katvā pariggaṇheyya. Kimevaṃ pariggahetuṃ sakkuṇeyya ? Sabbatthāti ‘‘taṃ, bhikkhave, attavādupādānaṃ upādiyetha, taṃ, bhikkhave, diṭṭhinissayaṃ nissayethā’’ti etesupi.
244 “若于我存在时”:意思是,如果有某个我,能因拥有属于我的东西而被称为“我所”,那么当那样的我存在时——然而,那个我于胜义中并不存在,这才是意旨所在。难道可以承认外道所施设的我是“胜义”吗?五蕴作为所知法的自性,好比瓶等一样,如果在此之外另有一个所谓“我”,难道不会与之必然相违吗?然而,那个我于胜义中并不存在,因为以正量寻求而不可得,犹如兔角。“或于我有我所时”:即是指,当在任何境上,怀着“这属于我”的决定而存在着“彼属于我”这样的关系时。因为所谓“我所”,就是指“这是我的”。如果存在“我”,即在胜义上能确立自体的某种“我慢事”上,那个“我”才可能存在;因为有了“属于我的”这层关系,对于“我所”的执取才可能成立。如果说“我所”存在,那么对于“我”来说也同此理。如此,由于在胜义中“我”了不可得,所以“我所”在胜义中同样完全不存在。以此显示:因为一切行法无我,所以没有我所性;因为没有我所性,所以没有作者。“以真实”,即真实之义。“以如性”,即如其自性。“以坚固”,即安住的自性、无变异性。显示巴利原文
244.Attani vā satīti yassa attano santakabhāvena kiñci attaniyanti vucceyya, tasmiṃ attani sati, so eva pana attā paramatthato natthīti adhippāyo. Sakkā hi vattuṃ bāhirakaparikappito attā ‘‘paramattho’’ti? Siyā khandhapañcakaṃ ñeyyasabhāvattā yathā taṃ ghaṭo, yadi pana tadaññaṃ nāma kiñci abhavissa, na taṃ niyamato viparītaṃ siyāti? Na ca so paramatthato atthi pamāṇehi anupalabbhamānattā turaṅgamavisāṇaṃ viyāti. Attaniye vā parikkhāre satīti ‘‘idaṃ nāma attano santaka’’nti tassa kiñcanabhāvena nicchite kismiñci vatthusmiṃ sati. Attano idanti hi attaniyanti. Ahanti satīti ‘‘ahaṃ nāmāya’’nti ahaṃkāravatthubhūte paramatthato niddhāritasarūpe kismiñci sati tassa santakabhāvena mamāti kiñci gahetuṃ yuttaṃ bhaveyya. Mamāti sati ‘‘aha’’nti etthāpi eseva nayo. Iti paramatthato attano anupalabbhamānattā attaniyaṃ kiñci paramatthato natthevāti sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ anattatāya anattaniyataṃ, anattaniyatāya ca anattakataṃ dasseti. Bhūtatoti bhūtatthato. Tathatoti tathasabhāvato. Thiratoti ṭhitasabhāvato nibbikārato.
“因为有了之后又归于无”:因为先前并不存在,依诸缘和合而生起之后,又归于坏灭而无,故非恒常,即是无常,意为不坚固。正因如此,它便具有生灭的转起,即依着生起与坏灭的方式而流转。自性的离去,于此称为变易;刹那性即是暂时性;常恒自性的不存在,即是对常的遮遣。因为无常之法,正是以其自身的无常性,在实义上遮遣了常性。正如所说“非恒常即是无常”。由于生、老、坏灭的逼迫,色法不断地被逼恼,故以其逼迫之相而有苦性。热恼,即是以苦苦等方式而令热恼、燃烧,故它不堪忍,而成为苦性。作为三种苦与轮回苦的依止,故是苦的所依处。乐的自性不存在,即是对乐的遮遣。“变易法”,是指其自性由老、死而变易。因为此色由缘和合而生,生起后必然趣向老、坏,坏灭之后唯一归于坏灭,绝无任何迁移往来于他世的情形——通过显示没有“往来他世”的迁移,来彰显其变易法性,故说“无有转至他世、入他世的自性”。舍离本性,即自性离去,也就是坏灭。如此,此色是无常、苦、变易法。以“尊者,此实无有”来遮遣色成为渴爱等执取之所依。因为已经生起的色,不能令其停驻;已停驻者,不能令其不老;已衰老者,不能令其不坏。显示巴利原文
Yasmā hutvā na hotīti yasmā pubbe asantaṃ paccayasamavāyena hutvā uppajjitvā puna bhaṅgupagamena na hoti, tasmā na niccanti aniccaṃ, adhuvanti attho. Tato eva uppādavayavattitoti uppajjanavasena nirujjhanavasena ca pavattanato. Sabhāvavigamo idha vipariṇāmo, khaṇikatā tāvakālikatā, niccasabhāvābhāvo eva niccapaṭikkhepo. Aniccadhammā hi teneva attano aniccabhāvena atthato niccataṃ paṭikkhipanti nāma. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na niccanti anicca’’nti. Uppādajarābhaṅgavasena rūpassa nirantarabādhatāti paṭipīḷanākārenassa dukkhatā. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ, tato evassa dussahatāya dukkhamatā. Tissannaṃ dukkhatānaṃ saṃsāradukkhassa ca adhiṭṭhānatāya dukkhavatthukatā. Sukhasabhāvābhāvo eva sukhapaṭikkhepo. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya maraṇena ca vipariṇamanasabhāvaṃ. Yasmā idaṃ rūpaṃ paccayasamavāyena uppādaṃ, uppādānantaraṃ jaraṃ patvā avassameva bhijjati, bhinnañca bhinnameva, nāssa kassaci saṅkamoti bhavantarānupagamanasaṅkhātena saṅkamābhāvena vipariṇāmadhammataṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘bhavasaṅkanti upagamanasabhāva’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakatibhāvavijahanaṃ sabhāvavigamo nirujjhanameva. Nti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ rūpaṃ. Imināti ‘‘no hetaṃ, bhante’’ti rūpassa taṇhādiggāhānaṃ vatthubhāvapaṭikkhepena. Rūpañhi uppannaṃ ṭhitiṃ mā pāpuṇātu, ṭhitippattaṃ mā jīratu, jarappattaṃ mā bhijjatu, udayabbayehi mā kilamiyatūti na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo atthi, svāyamassa avasavattanaṭṭho anattatāsallakkhaṇassa kāraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘avasavattanākārena rūpaṃ, bhante, anattāti paṭijānantī’’ti. Nivāsikārakavedakaadhiṭṭhāyakavirahena tato suññatā suññaṭṭho, sāmibhūtassa kassaci abhāvo assāmikaṭṭho, yathāvuttavasavattibhāvābhāvo anissaraṭṭho, paraparikappitaattasabhāvābhāvo eva attapaṭikkhepaṭṭho.
如同以无常相容易令人理解苦相,以无常与苦两者,则更容易使人明白无我相。不仅如此,为了说明此处正是以这两者来阐明无我相,所以说:“世尊……”等语。其中,“以无常”即依于无常性;“以苦”即依于苦性;“不适用”即不相应。为显示这种不相应的道理,便说:“眼的生起……”等。主张有“我”者,将“我”安立为常恒,然而“眼”却是无常的,因此如同眼是无常,“我”也就成了无常。故说:“若有人……”等。此处,“舍去”即消失、坏灭。因此,“眼是无我”:由于眼有生灭,故为无常;而主张有“我”者对此无常并不认同,所以眼便是无我。显示巴利原文
Yasmā aniccalakkhaṇena viya dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ, tadubhayena anattalakkhaṇaṃ suviññāpayaṃ, na kevalaṃ, tasmā tadubhayenettha anattalakkhaṇavibhāvanaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha aniccavasenāti aniccatāvasena. Dukkhavasenāti dukkhatāvasena. Na upapajjatīti na yujjati. Tameva ayujjamānataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhussa uppādopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā attavādī attānaṃ niccaṃ paññapeti, cakkhuṃ pana aniccaṃ, tasmā cakkhu viya attāpi anicco āpanno. Tenāha ‘‘yassa kho panā’’tiādi. Tattha vetīti vigacchati nirujjhati. Iti cakkhu anattāti cakkhussa udayabbayavantatāya aniccatā, attano ca attavādinā aniccatāya anicchitattā cakkhu anattā.
虽然在《无我相经》中:“比丘们,因为色是无我,所以色会导致病患”——此语看似以色的无我性来显示苦性,然而,由于“色会导致病患,故是无我”之理昭然,所以实际上是以色的有患性来显示它没有“我”的坚实;并由此说出“对于色,不能命令‘让我的色成为这样,不要让我的色成为那样’”,这便显示出对于色,无有任何可自主主宰者,以及它有不得自在的特性。故论中说:“是由苦而显示无我性”。“凡是无常的,那就是苦”:意指凡是无常的事物,即是苦,因为它为生灭所逼迫;而凡是常恒的,则无此逼迫,即是乐,如涅槃一般。此为意旨所在。“凡是那”之语,是指出原因,意思是“因为色是无常的,所以它是……”。“凡是苦的,那就是无我”这一句,应当依照前面所说的道理来理解。“无常”一词,是说明色犹如瓶等事物,由缘而生,故是无常。虽可依此理说其为“无我”,却完全没有什么可称为“我”的东西。同样地,说“是苦”等,也应当随之说明,如:“犹如眼疾等种种变异之时”。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ anattalakkhaṇasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 20) – ‘‘yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattatī’’ti rūpassa anattatāya dukkhatā vibhāvitā viya dissati, tathāpi ‘‘yasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, tasmā anattā’’ti pākaṭatāya sābādhatāya rūpassa attasārābhāvo vibhāvito, tato eva ca ‘‘na labbhati rūpe evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’ti rūpe kassaci anissaratā, tassa ca avasavattanākāro dassitoti āha ‘‘dukkhavasena anattataṃdassetī’’ti. Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhanti yaṃ vatthu aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā, yaṃ pana niccaṃ tadabhāvato, taṃ sukhaṃ yathā taṃ nibbānanti adhippāyo. Yaṃ tanti kāraṇaniddesovāyaṃ, yasmā rūpaṃ aniccaṃ, taṃ tasmāti attho. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattāti ettha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Aniccanti iminā ghaṭādi viya paccayuppannattā rūpaṃ aniccanti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Imināva nayena ‘‘anattā’’ti vattuṃ labbhamānepi ‘‘anattā’’ti vattā nāma natthi. Evaṃ dukkhanti vadantīti etthāpi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘akkhisūlādivikārappattakāle viya paccayuppannattā dukkhaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā. Duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tathā hi sarabhaṅgādayopi satthāro nāddasaṃsu, kuto paññāpanā. Tayidaṃ anattalakkhaṇaṃ.
因此,以“tasmātiha”等语开头,这是将三相安置于三世色法之后所说,所以才说“现在或其他时候也一样”。而那种色,无论何种状态,皆如前面所述,所以也应说明内色等的差别。或者,由“pi”字,也可视为涵盖了那种色。显示巴利原文
Tasmātihātiādinā tiyaddhagatarūpaṃ lakkhaṇattayaṃ āropetvā vuttanti āha ‘‘etarahi aññadāpī’’ti. Taṃ pana yādisaṃ tādisampi tathā vuttanti ajjhattādivisesopi vattabbo. Pi-saddena vā tassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
245 245.“Ukkaṇṭhatī”(嫌厌),意为心不安住、不喜乐。在他处,“nibbidā”(厌离)指强力观,而与之随顺的“行舍智”则称为“出起观”。那么,此处的厌离又是如何得名的呢?答言:“由出起观的厌离性……”等。这是为了表明:因已达厌离的极致,故于此将出起观称为厌离。显示巴利原文
245.Ukkaṇṭhatīti nābhiramati. Aññattha ‘‘nibbidā’’ti balavavipassanā vuccati, sānulomā pana saṅkhārupekkhā ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī’’ti, sā idha kathaṃ nibbidā nāma jātāti āha ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya hī’’tiādi. Iminā sikhāpattanibbedatāya vuṭṭhānagāminī idha nibbidānāmena vuttāti dasseti.
在宣说“他次第触达想之顶”(《长部》1.414, 415)之后,又有“布咤婆楼,想先生起,智在其后”(《长部》1.416)之语。因此,所谓“想顶”,是就世间断想中已达极致而言的。而“法住智”,则是因对缘起的洞见已达顶点而得此称。此后,便是以无为法为所缘的智。故佛陀言:“须尸摩,法住智在先,涅槃智在后。”(《相应部》2.70)“清净精进支”,是指证得道果的障碍——一切染污皆得清净,这属于精进行者的支分,或由精进修习而生起的支分,故得此名。“行道智见清净”,是因为它达到了行道智见清净的最高状态,故得此称。“atammayatā”(非彼所成性):此处,“彼所成性”即指渴爱。因为依于欲爱等种种渴爱而生起,三有流转中的一切存有便称为“彼所成”。缘于此种状态,故称“彼所成性”。由于彻底断尽了那种渴爱,出起观便被称为“非彼所成性”。“nissāya”(依止):即以彼非彼所成性为条件。“āgamma”(趣向):这是它的同义词。显示巴利原文
‘‘So anupubbena saññaggaṃ phusatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.414, 415) vatvā ‘‘saññā kho poṭṭhapāda paṭhamaṃ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇa’’nti (dī. ni. 1.416) vuttattā saññagganti vuttā lokiyāsu pahānasaññāsu sikhāpattabhāvato. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti vuttā idappaccayatādassanassa matthakappattīti katvā. Tato parañhi asaṅkhatārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘pubbe kho susima dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.70). Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti vuttā maggādhigamassa paripanthabhūtasabbasaṃkilesavisuddhi padhānikassa yogino, padhānabhāvanāya vā jātaṃ aṅganti katvā. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vuttā paramukkaṃsagatapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhibhāvato. Atammayatanti ettha tammayatā nāma taṇhā, kāmataṇhādīsu tāya tāya nibbattattā tammayaṃ nāma tebhūmikappavattaṃ, tassa bhāvoti katvā. Tassā taṇhāya pariyādānato vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā atammayatāti vuccati. Nissāyāti taṃ atammayataṃ paccayaṃ katvā. Āgammāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nānattāti nānāsabhāvā bahū anekappakārā. Nānattasitāti nānārammaṇanissitā rūpādivisayā. Ekattāti ekasabhāvā. Ekattasitāti ekaṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ nissitā. Taṃ nissāyāti taṃ ekattasitaṃ upekkhaṃ paccayaṃ katvā. Etissāti etissā upekkhāya. Pahānaṃ hotīti aññāṇupekkhato pabhuti sabbaṃ upekkhaṃ pajahitvā ṭhitassa ‘‘atammayatā’’ti vuttāya vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya arūpāvacarasamāpattiupekkhāya vipassanupekkhāya ca pahānaṃ hotīti pariyādānanti vuttāti. Sabbasaṅkhāragatassa muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānassa sikhāpattabhāvato vuṭṭhānagāminī muñcitukamyatā paṭisaṅkhānanti ca vuttā. Mudumajjhādivasena pavattiākāramattaṃ, atthato ekatthā muñcitukamyatādayo, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Dvīhi nāmehīti gotrabhu, vodānanti imehi dvīhi nāmehi.
“Virāgo”(离贪),即是道。因依此而彻底离贪,故称“离贪”。以此道为因,(心)得以解脱,这是由寂止解脱的方式而解脱。故最终说:“这开示了果。”显示巴利原文
Virāgoti maggo, accantameva virajjati etenāti virāgo, tena. Maggena hetubhūtena. Vimuccatīti paṭippassaddhivimuttivasena vimuccati. Tenāha ‘‘phalaṃ kathita’’nti.
“大漏尽者”,是赞美之词,如同称“大王”一般。世尊在赞叹时确实这样说过:“比丘们,这位比丘称为‘已拔除门闩者’等等……”为阐明其义,今说“对此……”等。“如实者”,即如其真实而存在者。“难被提起”之义:难以为众人所拔除的意思。它犹如城门之门闩,障碍进入涅槃之城,故以“门闩”为喻。树根被截断的多罗树,不再成为叶、果等之因,正如“吉祥草”被称为“sivā”一般。因此说“被做成截头多罗树那样”。“后有”:能给予后有,或系属于后有果报者。以其能给出后有,故称“给与后有者”。“后有蕴之缘”,这是以果的名称说因,指明其因即是生、轮回。“周围”:因为围绕相续,故称周围。“散乱”:完全散乱、破坏的意思。“深入”:深入之义。“拔除”:即根除。“这些”:指欲贪结缚等。“门闩”:以遮止、确定等义而名门闩。显示巴利原文
Mahākhīṇāsavoti pasaṃsāvacanaṃ yathā ‘‘mahārājā’’ti. Tathā hi taṃ pasaṃsanto satthā ‘‘ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho itipī’’tiādimāhāti. Tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idāni tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtehīti yāthāvato bhūtehi. Durukkhipanaṭṭhenāti pacurajanehi ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena. Nibbānanagarappavese vibandhanena paligho viyāti palighoti vuccati. Matthakacchinno tālo pattaphalādīnaṃ anaṅgato tālāvatthu asive ‘‘sivā’’ti samaññā viya. Tenāha ‘‘sīsacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Punabbhavassa karaṇasīlo, punabbhavaṃ vā phalaṃ arahatīti ponobhaviko. Evaṃbhūto pana punabbhavaṃ deti nāmāti āha ‘‘punabbhavadāyako’’ti. Punabbhavakhandhānaṃ paccayoti iminā jātisaṃsāroti phalūpacārena kāraṇaṃ vuttanti dasseti. Parikkhāti vuccati santānassa parikkhipanato. Saṃkiṇṇattāti sabbaso kiṇṇattā vināsitattā. Gabbhīrānugataṭṭhenāti gambhīraṃ anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena. Luñcitvāti uddharitvā. Etānīti kāmarāgasaññojanādīni. Aggaḷāti vuccanti avadhāraṇaṭṭhena. Aggamaggena patito mānaddhajo etassāti patitamānaddhajo. Itarabhāroropanassa purimapadehi pakāsitattā ‘‘mānabhārasseva oropitattā pannabhāroti adhippeto’’ti vuttaṃ. Mānasaṃyogeneva visaṃyuttattāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañcapi khandhe avisesato asmīti gahetvā pavattamāno ‘‘asmimāno’’ti adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpe asmīti māno’’tiādi.
人们为防御城门之险并令其庄严,在两侧竖立大柱,因此说“在城门竖立的大柱”。毁坏城墙本身便能让护城河与地面填平,所以说“破坏城墙,填平护城河”。“这样……”等是结合譬喻。“有身”:指存在之身,是诸法的集合体,即五取蕴。三十二种业所生身,属于苦之聚集。眼病、头病等九十八种病。王难等二十五种大怖畏。显示巴利原文
Nagaradvārassa parissayapaṭibāhanatthañceva sobhanatthañca ubhosu passesu esikatthambhe nikhaṇitvā ṭhapentīti āha ‘‘nagaradvāre ussāpite esikatthambhe’’ti. Pākāraviddhaṃsaneneva parikkhāya bhūmisamakaraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘pākāraṃ bhindanto parikkhaṃ saṃkiritvā’’ti. Evantiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Santo saṃvijjamāno kāyo dhammasamūhoti sakkāyo, upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā dukkhakkhandhe āgatā. Akkhirogasīsarogādayo aṭṭhanavuti rogā. Rājabhayādīni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni.
246 “不可了知的心之状态”,指那难以了知的心性:“此心依什么、以什么方式转起?”如此难以了知。“anvesanti”是反身语态的单数动词,故解释为“anvesanto”(正在探寻者)。有情亦可称为“如来”,如“如来死后”等经文中的用法。因为某一有情由业与烦恼而来到此世的状态,另一有情也同样到来,故称“如来”。而“最上士”则指世尊。任何一位漏尽者也称为“如来”。如同某位瑜伽行者,其心善住于四念处,如实修习七觉支,证得无上阿拉汉果而到达;另一位也如此证得而到达,故称“如来”。“不存在”:在究竟义上不可得。“不可寻得”:不应被寻得,意为难以了知。显示巴利原文
246.Anadhigamanīyaviññāṇatanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma nissāya iminā nāma ākārena pavattatī’’ti evaṃ duviññeyyacittataṃ. Anvesanti paccatte ekavacananti āha ‘‘anvesanto’’ti. Sattopi tathāgatoti vuccati ‘‘tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.65) viya. Satto hi yatheko kammakilesehi itthattaṃ āgato, tathā aparopi āgatoti ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Uttamapuggaloti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati. Khīṇāsavopīti yo koci khīṇāsavopi ‘‘tathāgato’’ti adhippeto. Sopi hi yatheko catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu sūpaṭṭhitacitto satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṃ bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ arahattaṃ āgato adhigato, tathā aparopi āgatoti ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Asaṃvijjamānoti paramatthato anupalabbhanīyo. Avindeyyoti na vinditabbo, duviññeyyoti attho.
“我不施设如来为‘有情’、‘补特伽罗’”,其密意是:因为从胜义谛上说,有情根本不存在。那么,我施设什么呢?因为即便是假名施设所依的、看似持续存在者也都不存在。或者,它是指以“不生安稳、不有安稳”等方式,趣入无为界而转起的——也就是最上果等至的涵义,或指观的心。显示巴利原文
Tathāgato satto puggaloti na paññapemi paramatthato sattasseva abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Kiṃ paññapessāmi paññattiupādānassapi dharamānakassa abhāvato. ‘‘Anuppādo khemaṃ, anuppatti khema’’ntiādinā asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā pakkhandhanavasena pavattaṃ aggaphalasamāpattiatthaṃ vipassanācittaṃ vā.
“空”(tucchā) 这个词是具格,所以用“以空”(tucchakena) 来表达。所谓“调伏”(vinayo),就是能调伏;他就是那个能调伏者(venayiko)。“如实之我”(tathā maṃ),是指如实存在的我。如果说在究竟义上真实存在的有情为没有,那或许可以称为‘宣说有情的破坏者’。然而,我是如实地说那在究竟义上并不存在的东西为‘没有’。而且,世间怎么称呼,我也同样那么称呼。那些沙门婆罗门说:‘能调伏的沙门乔达摩是断灭论者。’他们是用不真实的、空洞的、虚假的、不存在的东西来诽谤如实存在的我——应当这样联系起来理解。对于不再结生的诸漏尽者,他最后的心没有执取,就像不再执取燃料的火一样,般涅槃后无法被指认为‘依这个’而辨识;这样说的人,怎么会是断灭论者呢?我从来不说‘有个我’,也从来不说‘有任何人’。既然如此,那些愚人凭什么声称‘他宣说存在的有情的断灭、破坏、消失’,而用不真实的……来诽谤我呢?这就是这里的要义。显示巴利原文
Tucchāti karaṇe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘tucchakenā’’ti. Vinayatīti vinayo, so eva venayiko. Tathā manti tathābhūtaṃ maṃ. Paramatthato vijjamānassa hi sattassa abhāvaṃ vadanto sattavināsapaññāpako ca nāma siyā, ahaṃ pana paramatthato avijjamānaṃ taṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti vadāmi. Yathā ca loko voharati, tatheva taṃ voharāmi, tathābhūtaṃ maṃ ye samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo’’ti vadantā asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhantīti yojanā. Appaṭisandhikassa khīṇāsavassa carimacittaṃ nirupādānato anupādāno viya jātavedo parinibbutaṃ idaṃ nāma nissitanti na paññāyatīti vadanto kimettāvatā ucchedavādī bhaveyya, nāhaṃ kadācipi atthi, nāpi koci atthīti vadāmi. Evaṃ sante kiṃ nissāya te moghapurisā sato sattassa nāma ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapetīti vadantā asatā…pe… abbhācikkhantīti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“在大菩提座”(Mahābodhimaṇḍa),以菩提座的说法,指的是七个七天,以此说明他在转法轮之前所说的教法。“唯施设四圣谛”,这是为了显示:除了圣谛的解脱之外,没有其他师长的教法。在这里,世尊说:‘无论过去还是现在,我都只施设苦以及苦的灭。’这样说时,他从未说过‘自我断灭、毁坏’,也从未说过‘存在某个所谓的我’。既然如此,那些愚人凭什么说‘他施设有情的断灭、破坏、消失’,用空洞不实的话来诽谤呢?这是为了指出这一点。‘其他者们’(pare),指没有我所执的人,是不堪领受我教诫的人,因此说‘不能胜解……圣谛的人们’。‘以意欲’,这是表示那些只是他们的意欲,但忿怒和害心对如来而言,就像在空中刻画一样,是根本不可能的。‘撞击心’的就是嗔(āghāta)。他们以此而不满足,所以称为‘不满’(appaccaya)。‘不令心欢喜’,所以称为‘不喜’(anabhiraddhi)。‘不乐’,是乐的对立面,是那样生起的心,或者就是忿怒本身。显示巴利原文
Mahābodhimaṇḍamhīti bodhimaṇḍaggahaṇena sattasattāhamāha. Tena dhammacakkapavattanato (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) pubbe vuttaṃ tantidesanaṃ vadati . Catusaccameva paññapemīti etena saccavimuttā satthudesanā natthīti dasseti. Ettha ca – ‘‘pubbe ceva etarahi ca dukkhañceva paññapemi dukkhassa ca nirodha’’nti vadanto bhagavā nāhaṃ kadācipi ‘‘attā ucchijjati, vinassatī’’ti vā, ‘‘attā nāma koci atthī’’ti vā vadāmi. Evaṃ sante kiṃ nissāya te moghapurisā ‘‘sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapetī’’ti asatā tucchena abbhācikkhantīti dasseti. Pareti amāmakā, mama ovādassa abhājanabhūtāti atthoti āha ‘‘saccāni…pe… asamatthapuggalā’’ti. Adhippāyenāti iminā tesaṃ adhippāyamattaṃ, rosanavihesanāni pana tathāgatassa ākāsassa vilikhanaṃ viya na sambhavantiyevāti dasseti. Āhanati cittanti āghāto. Appatītā honti etenāti appaccayo. Cittaṃ na abhirādhayatīti anabhiraddhi. Atuṭṭhīti tuṭṭhipaṭipakkho tathāpavatto cittuppādo, kodho eva vā.
另有一部分人:‘喜’:通过它而喜悦、欢欣,故称为‘喜’(ānanda),这实际上是‘喜’(pīti)的同义词。‘喜悦’:指心的美好状态,是‘心所乐’的同义词。‘兴奋’:因先前之事而兴奋、打破平静,进入特殊状态,这就是‘兴奋’;这种状态也叫做‘兴奋状态’,其性质即是‘兴奋性’。当这种状态生起时,身心犹如被风灌满的布袋一样膨胀,这是依着在家的、极为热烈的喜的同义词。再者,那些被称为‘无力证悟诸谛’的人,他们不能如是了知:‘唯有苦生起、苦灭尽,并没有所谓其他有情的存在。’他们怀有‘我存在’之见,是未断除颠倒的人。连最值得净信的如来他们都要辱骂,更何况是比丘们呢——这是其意。显示巴利原文
Pareti aññe ekacce. Ānandanti pamodanti etenāti ānando, pītiyā evetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sobhanamanatā somanassaṃ, cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppilati purimāvatthāya bhijjati visesaṃ āpajjatīti uppilaṃ, tadeva uppilāvitaṃ, tassa bhāvo uppilāvitattaṃ. Yāya uppannāya kāyacittaṃ vātapūritabhattā viya uddhumāyanākārappattaṃ hoti, tassā gehassitāya odaggiyapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthāti dukkhameva uppajjati nirujjhati ca, na añño satto nāma atthīti evaṃ jānituṃ asamatthā ‘‘attā nāma atthī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhino appahīnavipallāsā. Uttamaṃ pasādanīyaṭṭhānaṃ tathāgatampi akkosanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana bhikkhūti adhippāyo.
247 对于并非‘我所有’的五取蕴,因错误执取而转起‘我所有’想,由此生起的欲贪,应当断除。‘不是我们的我’:因为色、受等正是执取‘我’的所依,而离开它们并没有可贪染的对象。那些草、木、枝、叶,不是我们的色,亦非我们的识,因此说‘不是我们的我’——应如此结合理解。由于否定了内所依‘不是我们的我’,外所依也便以‘我所有’的性质而被否定,故说‘我们的衣等资具也不成为我所有’。接着,‘只是五蕴’:以外所依为例,使其断除‘这五蕴本身也不是你们的’这种执着。并非像连根拔起的球茎那样,也并非像被硬生生拔下的头发那样。以此方式,他们想要以名义上的方式断除对色等的执着。他以‘欲贪的调伏’,令所标示的意义得以断除——如此从具体形态上显示出来。显示巴利原文
247. Anattaniyepi khandhapañcake micchāgāhavasena attaniyasaññāya pavattassa chandarāgassa pahānaṃ. Amhākaṃ neva attāti yasmā rūpavedanādiyeva attaggāhavatthu tabbinimuttassa lobhaneyyassa abhāvato. Etaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṃ na amhākaṃ rūpaṃ, na viññāṇaṃ, tasmā amhākaṃ neva attāti yojanā. Ajjhattikassa vatthuno neva attāti paṭikkhittattā bāhiravatthu attaniyabhāvena paṭikkhittaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘amhākaṃ cīvarādiparikkhāropi na hotī’’ti. Khandhapañcakaṃyevāti bāhiravatthuṃ nidassanaṃ katvā khandhapañcakaṃyeva na tumhākanti pajahāpeti. Na uppāṭetvā kandaṃ viya. Na luñcitvā vā kese viyāti. Iminā rūpādīnaṃ nāmamukhena pahānaṃ icchanti. Ulliṅgitamatthaṃ chandarāgavinayena pajahāpetīti sarūpato dasseti.
248 ‘诸比丘,你们如何思惟?色是常还是无常?’等教说,是三转的教导。所谓‘至此文句’,即直至‘是善说的’这一句经文为止。因为是以容易了知的方式宣说,所以是‘善说的’。因此说:‘由于是善说的,所以是明显的、敞开的、被阐明的’。横向撕破、纵向剖开、因而在各处缝补打结的旧衣服,称为‘碎布’。因为此种状态不存在,故是‘无碎布’,意为不带碎布。此处的威仪、安立、(所不存在的)禅那与观,对于被断绝、不存在的行道而言,犹如缝补和打结,但此处并没有这些情况,所以说:‘这里没有……存在’。‘无法安住’:即使是通过与清净者共住的方式,也无法安住;更不用说以证得殊胜来安住,那更是无从谈起了。显示巴利原文
248. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā’’tiādi desanā tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Yāva imaṃ ṭhānanti ‘‘evaṃ svākkhāto’’ti yāvāyaṃ pāḷipadeso. Suviññeyyabhāvena akkhātattāpi svākkhātoti āha ‘‘sukathitattā eva uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito’’ti. Tiriyaṃ vidāraṇena chinnaṃ, dīghaso phālanena bhinnaṃ, tato eva tattha tattha sibbitagaṇṭhikatajiṇṇavatthaṃ pilotikā, tadabhāvato chinnapilotiko, pilotikarahitoti attho. Iriyāpatha-saṇṭhapanaavijjamānajhāna-vipassanāni chinnāya avijjamānāya paṭipattiyā sibbanagaṇṭhikaraṇasadisāni, tādisaṃ idha natthīti āha ‘‘na hettha…pe… atthī’’ti. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhatīti pesalehi saddhiṃ saṃvāsavasenapi patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhati, visesādhigamavasena pana vattabbameva natthi.
「除去莠稗」:把因破戒而如同垃圾般的人,如垃圾一样毫无留恋地除去。「抛弃糠粃」:如同混杂在刹帝利等之中、混乱而流脓的旃陀罗,应将他抛弃、驱逐。是什么缘故呢?因为僧园是为持戒者建造的,不是为破戒者建造的。正因为如此,才要驱逐他。「然后,扬弃空谷,非沙门而假装沙门者」:正如空谷内部没有坚实的米粒,外表却因带有谷壳而看似稻谷;同样地,这些恶比丘内在不具足戒,外表却现出袈裟等资具,看似比丘,因此被称为「空谷」。你们应当扬弃那些空谷,簸扬、散灭他们。于胜义上,对那些非沙门、仅以形相装扮而假冒沙门者,这样驱逐之后……「具念者」。此处「kappayavho」是“你们应做、应行”的意思。「具念者」:即于一切处具念、正知、善于了知的人。或者说,具念者就是有恭敬、互相尊重的人。如此,清净者与清净者共住,以见与戒的共性而和合一致。随着你们的智慧渐次成熟,成为聪慧者,你们将作此一切苦轮之边际,换言之,将证得般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamathāti vipannasīlatāya kacavarabhūtaṃ puggalaṃ kacavaramiva nirapekkhā apanetha. Kasambuñcāpakassathāti kasaṭabhūtañca naṃ khattiyādīnaṃ majjhagataṃ sambhinnaṃ paggharitakuṭṭhaṃ caṇḍālaṃ viya apakassatha nikkaḍḍhatha. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Saṅghārāmo nāma sīlavantānaṃ kato, na dussīlānaṃ, yato etadeva. Tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānineti yathā palāpā antosārarahitā ataṇḍulā bahi thusena vīhi viya dissanti, evaṃ pāpabhikkhū antosīlarahitāpi bahi kāsāvādiparikkhārena bhikkhū viya dissanti, tasmā ‘‘palāpā’’ti vuccanti, te palāpe vāhetha odhunātha vidhamatha. Paramatthato assamaṇe vesamattena samaṇamānine evaṃ niddhamitvāna…pe…patissatāti. Tattha kappayavhoti kappetha, karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Patissatāti pati pati satā sampajānantā suṭṭhu pajānantā. Patissatā vā sappatissā aññamaññaṃ sagāravā. Athevaṃ suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ kappentā diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena samaggā. Anukkamena paripākagatapaññatāya nipakā. Sabbassevimassa dukkhavaṭṭassa antaṃ karissatha, parinibbānaṃ pāpuṇissathāti attho.
于他们,因轮回之根已被彻底断除,故无“轮回”可言。显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññāpanāya sabbaso samucchinnavaṭṭamūlakattā.
「随法行」:是指随念法,或因具有随念法的习性,故称随法行。同样地,也应了知「随信行」。「行道者」:指正在行道的人,也包括处于入流道者。「增上」:即强有力。「慧导」:意为慧引导,或慧引导此人,故称慧导。「以慧为先导」:即以慧为前导。这样的人,便是以名为慧的法来随念、随观,故称随法行。「信导」:意为信引导,或信引导此人,故称信导。「以信为先导」:即以信为前导。这样的人,便是由信而随念、随观,故称随信行。「信唯量」:如“彼世尊乃是……”这样,对佛陀极善觉性仅生起信的份量;以“量”字遮除不坏净信。「爱唯量」:依于前面所说的信,仅生起的喜悦份量;或说是“爱着”。「如此令观住立而安坐者」:指已通过聚思惟等方式开始修观的人。「一信」:依观的力量,善说法性得以成就,由此而生起一种殊胜广大的信。「一爱」:此处同理。他们说「犹如置于天界」:意思是他们的信与爱因能引生天界而不虚妄。他们被称为「小须陀洹」。显示巴利原文
Dhammaṃ anussaranti, dhammassa vā anussaraṇasīlāti dhammānusārino. Evaṃ saddhānusārinopi veditabbā. Paṭipannassāti paṭipajjamānassa, sotāpattimaggaṭṭhopi adhippeto. Adhimattanti balavaṃ. Paññāvāhīti paññaṃ vāheti, paññā vā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti paññāvāhītipi vadanti. Paññāpubbaṅgamanti paññaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo paññāsaṅkhātena dhammena sarati anussaratīti dhammānusārī. Saddhāvāhīti saddhaṃ vāheti, saddhā vā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti saddhāvāhītipi vadanti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamanti saddhaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhāya sarati anussaratīti saddhānusārī. Saddhāmattanti ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā buddhasubuddhatāya saddahanamattaṃ. Matta-saddena aveccappasādaṃ nivatteti. Pemamattanti yathāvuttasaddhānusārena uppannaṃ tuṭṭhimattaṃ. Sinehoti keci. Evaṃ vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnānanti kalāpasammasanādivasena āraddhavipassanānaṃ. Ekā saddhāti vipassanānusārena svākkhātadhammatā siddhā, tato eva ekā seṭṭhā uḷārā saddhā uppajjati. Ekaṃ pemanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sagge ṭhapitā viya hontīti tesaṃ saddhāpemānaṃ saggasaṃvattaniyatāya abyabhicārībhāvamāha. Cūḷasotāpannoti vadanti ekadesena saccānubodhe ṭhitattā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
3. 《蚁垤经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Vammikasuttavaṇṇanā
249 “爱语”即令人喜爱的说话方式。有智慧的人以爱语对待他人时,往往会称对方为“尊者”、“天亲”或“具寿”。因此,当面称呼时用呼格“贤友”,背后称述时则用“具寿”,这也是一种说话的方式。由于有其他名叫迦叶的人,如大迦叶、优楼频螺迦叶等,所以才问:“对哪位迦叶?”。“国王”指的是憍萨罗王。“他们认出了”:为了展开略说的意义,而开始说明“而此……”等。“他的”:指童子迦叶的,或属于所说之“认出”的。“做福德”:即在百千劫间,投生于天界和人间,修习布施等福德。“减退时”指衰退之时。“最初”指尚是童女之时。世尊将此事交给优波离尊者,通过律仪羯磨,使那位比丘尼的出家得以无碍。显示巴利原文
249.Piyavacananti piyasamudācāro. Viññujātikā hi paraṃ piyena samudācarantā ‘‘bhava’’nti vā, ‘‘devānaṃ piyo’’ti vā, ‘‘āyasmā’’ti vā samudācaranti, tasmā sammukhā sambodhanavasena ‘‘āvuso’’ti, tirokkhaṃ ‘‘āyasmā’’ti ayampi samudācāro. Mahākassapauruvelakassapādayo aññepi kassapanāmakā atthīti ‘‘katarassa kassapassā’’ti pucchanti. Raññāti kosalaraññā. ‘‘Sañjāniṃsū’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Assāti kumārakassapassa, ‘‘sañjāniṃsū’’ti vuttasañjānanassa vā. Puññāni karontoti kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ca manussesu ca nibbattitvā dānādīni puññāni bhāvento. Osakkanteti parihāyamāne. Paṭhamanti kumārikākāle. Satthā upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinayakammenevassā bhikkhuniyā pabbajjāya arogabhāvaṃ.
“施设之别显”,即对被称为“盲林”者所作的阐明。“沉滞”指萎缩、运行缓慢。“唱诵者”即音声诵者。“取其所有而住”:意为如今已无可寻求之处,但依其原有的方式,取其所有而安住。“强力德”指增上的功德。在迦叶世尊的时代,由于惯用的名称和言说相续不断,因此即使到了现今佛陀出世时,尽管大地上的树木丛林等已日渐繁茂,此处仍被称为“盲林”。“有学行道”即能导致有学位的清净行道。显示巴利原文
Paññattivibhāvanāti ‘‘andhavana’’ntveva paññāyamānassa vibhāvanā. Olīyatīti saṅkucati saṇikaṃ vattati. Bhāṇakoti sarabhāṇako. Yaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvāti idāni pariyesitabbaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, yathāgataṃ pana yaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvā. Balavaguṇeti adhimattaguṇe. Kassapabhagavato kāle niruḷhasamaññāvasena vacanasantatiyā avicchedena ca imasmimpi buddhuppāde taṃ ‘‘andhavana’’ntveva paññāyittha, uparūparivaḍḍhamānāya pathaviyā upari rukkhagacchādīsu sañjāyantesupīti. Sekkhapaṭipadanti sekkhabhāvāvahaṃ visuddhipaṭipattiṃ.
为了显示“aññatara”(某个)一词,正如可用在不明显的事物上一样,也可用在明显的事物上,因为它与“eka”(一个)意义相同,所以才说了“他自证……”等。此处展示“殊胜”一词的义理时,也同时含摄了“怖畏恐惧”的内容,由此作出如下引导:下文各处已作的意义解释,在随后的相应经句中,当随宜而说。皮肤具有如金的状态,这已由“金色”一词的取用而涵盖,正是基于此义而说“以皮肤”。然而,另有一些注释师认为,此处“金色”中的“颜色”,所指的仅是皮肤所摄的色界。被称赞、被宣唱、被宣告的,即是“颜色”,此为赞美。被区分为不相混杂、被确定的,即是“颜色”,此为种姓。依此而令果报被知晓、被如实阐明,即是“颜色”。显示巴利原文
Aññatara-saddo apākaṭe viya pākaṭepi vattati eka-saddena samānatthattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘abhijānātī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhayabheravadassitampi abhikkanta-saddassa atthuddhāraṃ idha dassento evaṃ heṭṭhā tattha tattha katā atthasaṃvaṇṇanā parato tasmiṃ tasmiṃ suttapadese yathārahaṃ vattabbāti nayadassanaṃ karoti. Kañcanasannibhattacatā suvaṇṇavaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘chaviya’’nti. Chavigatā pana vaṇṇadhātu eva ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇo’’ti ettha vaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti apare. Vaṇṇīyati kittīyati ugghosananti vaṇṇo, thuti. Vaṇṇīyati asaṅkarato vavatthapīyatīti vaṇṇo, kulavaggo. Vaṇṇīyati phalaṃ etena yathāsabhāvato vibhāvīyatīti vaṇṇo, kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇanaṃ dīgharassādivasena saṇṭhahananti vaṇṇo, saṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati aṇumahantādivasena pamīyatīti vaṇṇo, pamāṇaṃ. Vaṇṇeti vikāramāpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, rūpāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ tena tena pavattinimittena vaṇṇa-saddassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe pavatti veditabbā.
“无余性”即完全性、唯然性。关于“kevalakappā”,有些人说它是略有不圆满的唯然,是唯然近似。若是如此,“kevala”一词应当唯有无余义。然而,借着并非无意义的“kappa”一词而构成词的扩展,则“kevalā”本身即是“kevalakappā”。或者,因为可被制定、可被施设,所以称为“kevalakappā”。“多数性”即众多的状态。“不杂性”即因有别种而不混同的无错乱、纯净性。“无超余性”即仅限于此、无差别的状态。“kevalakappaṃ”意为“作为坚固的唯然”。涅槃被称为“kevala”,因为它远离一切有为。因此说“远离”等义与“系缚”等义。已得此“kevala”者,为“kevalī”,即证得灭的漏尽者。显示巴利原文
Anavasesattaṃ sakalatā kevalatā. Kevalakappāti ettha keci īsaṃ asamattā kevalā kevalakappāti vadanti, evaṃ sati anavasesattho eva kevala-saddo siyā. Anatthantarena pana kappa-saddena padavaḍḍhanaṃ katvā kevalā eva kevalakappā. Tathā vā kappanīyattā paññapetabbattā kevalakappā. Yebhuyyatā bahulabhāvo. Abyāmissatā vijātiyena asaṅkaro suddhatā. Anatirekatā taṃmattatā visesābhāvo. Kevalakappanti kevalaṃ daḷhaṃ katvāti attho. Kevalaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatavivittattā. Tenāha ‘‘visaṃyogādianekattho’’ti. Kevalaṃ etassa adhigataṃ atthīti kevalī, sacchikatanirodho khīṇāsavo.
但这里的“kappa”一词,既可能带前缀,也可能不带前缀;基于这一意图,才举出在“okappanīya”(可确知)一词中能见到的“okappa”作为例证。要不然,在解释“kappa”的词义时,“okappanīya”这个词就根本不能当作例子。“samaṇakappehi”指依律成就的沙门称谓方式。“niccakappaṃ”指常时、恒常。“paññatti”(施设)就是名称,实际上那位尊者被称呼的名字正是“kappa”,也就是所说的“yadidaṃ kappo”(所谓kappa)。“kappitakesamassu”指用剪刀修剪过的须发。“dvaṅgulakappo”指过了正午之后,允许有二指宽的余量。“leso”是借口、托词。即使光明有能力无余地遍照,也可能因某种缘由而只照一部份;为了显示这光明确实遍照一切处,所以采用了具有“一切处”意义的“kappa”一词,从而说“anavasesaṃ samantato”(无余地、周遍地)照到。显示巴利原文
Kappa-saddo panāyaṃ saupasaggo anupasaggo cāti adhippāyena okappanīyapade labbhamānaṃ okappasaddamattaṃ nidasseti, aññathā kappa-saddassa atthuddhāre okappanīyapadaṃ anidassanameva siyā. Samaṇakappehīti vinayasiddhehi samaṇavohārehi. Niccakappanti niccakālaṃ. Paññattīti nāmaṃ. Nāmañhetaṃ tassa āyasmato, yadidaṃ kappoti. Kappitakesamassūti kattarikāya cheditakesamassu. Dvaṅgulakappoti majjhanhikavelāya vītikkantāya dvaṅgulatāvikappo. Lesoti apadeso. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi obhāsassa kenaci kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbasova pharīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahitoti āha ‘‘anavasesaṃ samantato’’ti.
“samaṇasaññāsamudācārena”指依“我是沙门”这样的想(saññā)而生起的言谈举止,或是以此想为因缘、以此想为名义的言行。“pubbayoge”指在前面的修行因缘讲述当中。“papañco esā”的意思是:在你们到来时,像这样进行的款待和交谈,对我们说来就是障碍。我们连这些都不做,只行沙门之法(samaṇadhamma),这才是用意所在。显示巴利原文
Samaṇasaññāsamudācārenāti ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇo’’ti evaṃ uppannasaññāsamuṭṭhitena samudācārena, tannimittena vā tabbohārena. Pubbayogeti pubbayogakathāyaṃ. Papañco esāti eso tumhesu āgatesu yathāpavatto paṭisanthāro kathāsamudācāro ca amhākaṃ papañco. Ettakampi akatvā samaṇadhammameva karomāti adhippāyo.
“Ariyabhūmiṃ patto”意为证得了不来果(anāgāmiphala),这是就善男子薄拘娑(Pakkusāti kulaputta)而说的。“Vibhajitvā”是指作了分别与辨析。“Turitālapanavasenā”指出于急促呼唤的方式,以此表明:这位沙门实属难得,因此应当赶快为他解答问题,他也应赶快前去向世尊请问。而依照“yathā vā”等经文,这是修辞上的双呼方式,故“evamāhā”指他这样说了两次:“比丘,比丘(bhikkhu bhikkhu)”。显示巴利原文
Ariyabhūmiṃ pattoti anāgāmiphalaṃ adhigato. Pakkusātikulaputtaṃ sandhāya vadati. Vibhajitvāti vibhāgaṃ katvā. Turitālapanavasenāti turitaṃ ālapanavasena. Tena dullabho ayaṃ samaṇo, tasmā sīghamassa pañho kathetabbo, iminā ca sīghaṃ gantvā satthā pucchitabboti turitaṃ ālapīti dasseti. ‘‘Yathā vā’’tiādinā pana vacanālaṅkāravasena dvikkhattuṃ ālapati. Evamāhāti ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ dvikkhattuṃ avoca.
那位天人以蚁冢的譬喻(vammikapariyāyena),将业生身(karajakāya)直接显现在前,然后说:“这是蚁冢(ayaṃ vammiko)”。然而,由于她并未说明真实义(bhāvattha),只显示了字面含义(saddattha),因此注释才解释说:“在前方站着……说这是……”等等。其余诸句也依此理趣来理解。“maṇḍūkaṃ”指陆蛙(thalamaṇḍūkaṃ),它被称为“膨胀者”(uddhumāyikā),而非水蛙。为避免陆蛙遭其住处之风所恼,故说“从上方风际离去”(uparivātato apagammā)。那么,这位天人是如何以此方式向长老告知这些问题的呢?有些注释师认为:她依据所听闻到的义理,先以喻体(upamā)把捉,再凭自己的智慧在心中构思出所喻之义(upameyyattha),而且她知道世尊将会为他开演,那场说法必定带来利益、幸福与安乐,因此才以“这是蚁冢”等纯譬喻的方式,向长老提出了十五个问题。显示巴利原文
Vammikapariyāyena karajakāyaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā dassentī devatā ‘‘ayaṃ vammiko’’ti āha. Tāya pana bhāvatthassa abhāsitattā saddatthameva dassento ‘‘purato ṭhitaṃ…pe… ayanti āhā’’ti avoca. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Maṇḍūkanti thalamaṇḍūkaṃ. So hi uddhumāyikāti vuccati, na udakamaṇḍūko. Tassa nivāsato vāto mā kho bādhayitthāti ‘‘uparivātato apagammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ devatā iminā nīhārena ime pañhe therassa ācikkhīti? Keci tāva āhu – yathāsutamatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā attano paṭibhānena upameyyatthaṃ manasā cintetvā taṃ bhagavāva imassa ācikkhissati. Sā ca desanā atthāya hitāya sukhāya hotīti ‘‘ayaṃ vammiko’’tiādinā upamāvaseneva pannarasa pañhe therassa ācikkhi. Kassapasammāsambuddhakāle kira bārāṇasiyaṃ eko seṭṭhi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahantaṃ nidhānaṃ nidahitvā palighādiākārāni kānicipi laṅgāni tattha ṭhapesi. So maraṇakāle attano sahāyassa brāhmaṇassa ārocesi – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne mayā nidhānaṃ nidahitaṃ, taṃ mama puttassa viññutaṃ pattassa dassetī’’ti vatvā kālamakāsi. Brāhmaṇo sahāyakaputtassa viññutaṃ pattakāle taṃ ṭhānaṃ dassesi. So nikhanitvā sabbapacchā nāgaṃ passi, nāgo attano puttaṃ disvā ‘‘sukheneva dhanaṃ gaṇhatū’’ti apagacchi. Svāyamattho tadā loke pākaṭo jāto. Ayaṃ pana devatā tadā bārāṇasiyaṃ gahapatikule nibbattitvā viññutaṃ patto satthari parinibbute uraṃ datvā sāsane pabbajito pañcahi sahāyakabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samaṇadhammamakāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pañca bhikkhū nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā’’tiādi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāsutamatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā’’tiādi. Apare pana ‘‘devatā attano paṭibhānena ime pañhe evaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā therassa ācikkhī’’ti vadanti. Devaputte nissakkaṃ devaputtapañhattā tassa atthassa.
251 “Catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbatto”意为由四大种(mahābhūtehi)所生,也就是“cātumahābhūtiko”(四大所造身),故说“catumahābhūtamayassa”(四大所成者的)。“Vamati”的意思是犹如呕吐一般。“Vantako”指呕吐物。“Vantussayo”指由白蚁吐出的土团堆成的高耸物。“Vantasinehasambaddho”指由所吐唾液凝聚成团者。“Asucikalimalaṃ vamatī”一句,因昆虫会从口等处爬出,所以也有“吐出昆虫”的意思。“Ariyehi vantako”是就身体状态的共通性而言。又或者,由于对苦谛(dukkhasacca)的遍知,一切三有法皆已彻了,因此整个身体都已被圣者们以断除欲贪(chandarāgappahānena)的方式所吐弃。所谓“那一切”(taṃ sabbanti):是由三百块骨所支撑,由筋腱所连结,以肉涂抹,为生皮所包覆,以外皮所染的。显示巴利原文
251. Catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbattoti cātumahābhūtiko. Tenāha ‘‘catumahābhūtamayassā’’ti. Vamati uggiranto viya hotīti attho. Vantakoti ucchaḍḍako. Vantussayoti upacikāhi vantassa mattikāpiṇḍassa ussayabhūto. Vantasinehasambaddhoti vantena kheḷasinehena sampiṇḍito. Asucikalimalaṃ vamatīti ettha mukhādīhi pāṇakānaṃ niggamanato pāṇake vamatīti ayampi attho labbhateva. Ariyehi vantakoti kāyabhāvasāmaññena vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccapariññāya vā sabbassapi tebhūmakadhammajātassa pariññātattā sabbopi kāyo ariyehi chandarāgappahānena vanto eva. Taṃ sabbanti yehi tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussito, yehi nhārūhi sambaddho, yehi maṃsehi avalitto, yena allacammena pariyonaddho, yāya chaviyā rañjito, taṃ aṭṭhiādisabbaṃ accantameva jigucchitvā virattatāyavantameva. ‘‘Yathā cā’’tiādinā vattabbopamatopi vammiko viya vammikoti imamatthaṃ dasseti.
“sambhavati etasmā”即“从此而生起”,故称“sambhava”(生起);此身由父母所生,故称“mātāpettikasambhava”(父母所生之身)。“upaciyati etenā”即“依此而增长”,故称“upacaya”(增长);此身依饭粥为增长之缘,故称“odanakummāsūpacaya”(依饭粥增长之身)。以其自性不坚固,故是“aniccadhamma”(无常法);为去除汗、粪、胆汁、痰等诸界的扰动、沉重与恶臭,故是“ucchādetabbadhamma”(应涂身之法);因需从四周揉按,故是“parimadditabbadhamma”(应按摩之法);以其刹那坏灭为自性,故是“bhedanadhamma”(应破坏之法);正因此而有散灭之自性,故是“viddhaṃsanadhamma”(应离散之法)。此处的“dhamma”一词,当依各句分别领解。“tanuvilepane……”显示巴利原文
Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavo, mātāpettiko sambhavo etassāti mātāpettikasambhavo. Tassa. Upaciyati etenāti upacayo’ odanakummāsaṃ upacayo etassāti odanakummāsūpacayo. Tassa. Adhuvasabhāvatāya aniccadhammassa, sedagūtha-pitta-semhādi-dhātukkhobha-garubhāvaduggandhānaṃ vinodanāya ucchādetabbadhammassa, parito sambāhanena parimadditabbadhammassa, khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvatāya bhedanadhammassa, tato eva vikiraṇasabhāvatāya viddhaṃsanadhammassāti dhamma-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tanuvilepanenāti kāyāvalepanena ucchādanavilepanena. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāyāti tādisasamuṭṭhāna-sarīravikāravigamāya. Yasmā sukkasoṇitaṃ āhāro, ucchādanaṃ parimaddanañca yathārahaṃ uppādassa, vuḍḍhiyā ca paccayo, tasmā āha ‘‘mātāpettika…pe… kathito’’ti. Uccāvacabhāvoti yathārahaṃ yojetabbo – odanakummāsūpacaya-ucchādanaparimaddanaggahaṇehi uccabhāvo, vaḍḍhī. Mātāpettikasambhavaggahaṇena samudayo. Itarehi avacabhāvo, parihāni, atthaṅgamo pakāsito. Aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ saṇṭhapanampi hi vaṭṭapaccayattā vaṭṭanti.
“kodho dhūmo”(忿怒是烟)这一句中,因为是以烟的比喻来说明忿怒,所以“dhūma”一词在这里指忿怒,故说“dhūmo viya dhūmo”(如烟的烟)。“bhasmanī”是灰。“mosavajjaṃ”是妄语。烟本身就是“dhūmāyitaṃ”(烟熏)。贪欲是它的烟熏,因此众生被称为“icchādhūmāyitā”(被贪欲烟熏者)。而“icchādhūmāyita”一词用于渴爱的情况,其说明方式也与前述相同。“dhūmāyanto”是指因寻思的热恼而烧灼,即正在寻思。“palipo”指难行的泥沼。“timūlaṃ”指依三种根而安住,好似不动摇地持续转起,故如此说。“rajo ca dhūmo ca mayā pakāsitā”的意思是:因具有尘的自性,我说明为“尘”;因具有烟的自性,我说明为“烟”。如同自然界的烟相对于火,是烦恼火焰的显现;而说法之烟,则是点燃智慧之火的先导。“ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanā”……显示巴利原文
Kodho dhūmoti ettha dhūmapariyāyena kodhassa vuttattā dhūma-saddo kodhe vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dhūmo viya dhūmo’’ti. Bhasmanīti bhasmaṃ. Mosavajjanti musāvādo. Dhūmo eva dhūmāyitaṃ. Icchā dhūmāyitaṃ etissāti icchādhūmāyitā, pajā. Icchādhūmāyitasaddassa taṇhāya vutti vuttanayo eva. Dhūmāyantoti vitakkasantāpena saṃtappento, vitakkentoti attho. Palipoti dukkaramahākaddamaṃ. Timūlanti tīhi mūlehi patiṭṭhitaṃ viya acalaṃ pavattanti vuttaṃ. Rajo ca dhūmo ca mayā pakāsitāti rajasabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rajo’’ti ca dhūmasabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘dhūmo’’ti ca mayā pakāsitā. Pakatidhūmo viya aggissa kilesaggijālassa paññāṇabhāvato. Dhammadesanādhūmo ñāṇaggisandhīpanassa pubbaṅgamabhāvato. Ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanāti yā divā kattabbakammante uddissa rattiyaṃ anuvitakkanā, ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanā.
“sattannaṃ dhammānanti”——这是依经中(《小部·慈行童女问义释》第28)所示的方法而说。而且,经文是随顺应受教化者的意乐而作此说。或者,是因为那些烦恼与另一些烦恼处于同一处所的缘故。“sundarapañño”:以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三遍知的智慧而成为善妙慧者。显示巴利原文
Sattannaṃ dhammānanti idaṃ sutte (cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 28) āgatanayena vuttaṃ. Suttañca tathā ārādhanaveneyyajjhāsayavasena. Tadekaṭṭhatāya vā tadaññakilesānaṃ. Sundarapaññoti ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāya paññāya sundarapañño.
‘etaṃ’指‘sattha’(导师)这一称号,意为教导并断除染污法。‘nti’指精进。因为只以智慧为归宿、只以成就智慧的利益为目的。当世间智慧生起时,应取用世间精进;当出世间智慧现起的刹那,应取用出世间精进——如此结合。‘Atthadīpanā’是阐明所喻之义的比喻。显示巴利原文
Etanti ‘‘sattha’’nti etaṃ adhivacanaṃ saṃkilesadhammānaṃ sasanato samucchindanato. Nti vīriyaṃ. Paññāgatikameva paññāya hitasseva adhippetattā. Lokiyāya paññāya ārambhakāle lokiyavīriyaṃ gahetabbaṃ, lokuttarāya paññāya pavattikkhaṇe lokuttaravīriyaṃ gahetabbanti yojanā. Atthadīpanāti upameyyatthadīpanī upamā.
‘gāmato’指从自己居住的村庄。‘mante’指阿闼婆咒。那些婆罗门在林中念诵,心想:‘别让他人听到。’‘tathā akāsi’指分成了四份。如此,此处唯以蚁垤之问为譬喻,其余内容应依前文所述之理来理解。显示巴利原文
Gāmatoti attano vasanagāmato. Manteti āthabbanamante. Te hi brāhmaṇā araññe eva vācenti ‘‘mā aññe assosu’’nti. Tathā akāsīti cattāro koṭṭhāse akāsi. Evamettha vammikapañhasseva vasena upamā āgatā, sesānaṃ vasena heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbā.
‘laṅgī’以超越和遮止为义,即是门闩。‘ñāṇamukhe’指在观智的路径中。‘patati’指转起。‘kammaṭṭhānauggahaparipucchāvasenā’指通过受持四圣谛业处,并请问其义理,以及以观智抉择义理的请问。因为想要遍知即是请问,而观智也欲从无常等角度遍知一切三地诸法。如此,这是从观智的角度说破除无明;由于后面还有应作之事,故未从圣道的角度来说。显示巴利原文
Laṅganaṭṭhena nivāraṇaṭṭhena laṅgī, paligho. Ñāṇamukheti vipassanāñāṇavīthiyaṃ. Patatīti pavattati. Kammaṭṭhānauggahaparipucchāvasenāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanena tassa atthaparipucchāvasena ceva vipassanāsaṅkhāta-atthavinicchaya-paripucchāvasena ca. Sabbaso ñātuṃ icchā hi paripucchā. Vipassanā ca aniccādito sabbatebhūmakadhammānaṃ ñātuṃ icchati. Evaṃ vipassanāvasena avijjāpahānamāha, uparikattabbasabbhāvato na tāva maggavasena.
「或在蔓草间」:「或」字表示未说出的其他可能,即「或在尘土间、或在泥土间」。「仅是心浊」:仅是心的扰动。「未制御」:未以思择力加以制止。「面容扭曲」:面部皱缩。「牙齿颤磕」:导致内心自言自语的状态。「四处张望」:为了看见那个应被防范者站在何处,并为防护与守护。「杖与刀的攻击」:指将杖与刀击打于他人身上时的状况。由于那未得制御的瞋,杀害了母亲等不可杀害的对象后,心想‘我的所作实不正当’,从而也杀害自己——正是就此而说‘也导致杀他与自杀’。或者,因为他人被杀害,凶手也会遭到杀戮,应依此义来理解。就瞋的一般状态而说‘杀他后自杀’。「达至极盛」:达到顶点。瞋本身就是瞋恼,因为它带来坚固的灾患,所以说‘成为强盛’等。显示巴利原文
Valliantare vāti vā-saddo paṃsuantare vā mattikantare vāti avuttavikappattho. Cittāvilamattakovāti cittakkhobhamattakova. Aniggahitoti paṭisaṅkhānabalena anivārito. Mukhavikulanaṃ mukhasaṅkoco. Hanusañcopanaṃ pāpeti antojappanāvatthāyaṃ. Disā vilokanaṃ pāpeti yattha bādhetabbo ṭhito, taṃdassanatthaṃ nivārakaparivāraṇatthaṃ. Daṇḍasatthābhinipātanti daṇḍasatthānaṃ parassa upari nipātanāvatthaṃ. Yena kodhena aniggahitena mātādikaṃ aghātetabbaṃ ugghātetvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ vata mayā kata’’nti attānampi hanati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paraghātanampi attaghātanampi pāpetī’’ti. Yena vā parassa haññamānassa vasena ghātakopi ghātanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tādisassa vasenāyamattho veditabbo. Kodhasāmaññena hetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ ghātetvā attānaṃ ghātetī’’ti. Paramussadagatoti paramukkaṃsagato. Daḷhaṃ parissayamāvahatāya kodhova kodhūpāyāso. Tenāha ‘‘balavappatto’’tiādi.
「二分路」:意为缺乏修行的原因。显示巴利原文
Dvedhāpathasamāhoti appaṭipattihetubhāvato.
善法不能存续,因为被诸盖所遮障。修习以止为先导的观者,先以止镇伏诸盖,而观则仅以彼分断的方式断除它们,所以说‘以镇伏与彼分断’。显示巴利原文
Kusaladhammo na tiṭṭhati nīvaraṇehi nivāritaparamattā. Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayato paṭhamaṃ samathena nīvaraṇavikkhambhanaṃ hoti, vipassanā pana tadaṅgavaseneva tāni nīharatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanatadaṅgavasenā’’ti.
在《相应部》“如龟将肢收入己壳”等经文中,龟的肢体特指其足和头,因此说“有五肢”。由于这是针对修观行者所说,故此处特意选取应当普遍观察的法,并以“一切有为法”加以简别。所以世尊说:“这是对五取蕴的称谓。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kummova aṅgāni sake kapāle’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.17) kummassa aṅgabhāvena visesato pādasīsāni eva vuccantīti āha ‘‘pañceva aṅgāni hontī’’ti. Vipassanācārassa vuccamānattā adhikārato sammasanīyānameva dhammānaṃ idha gahaṇanti ‘‘sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammā’’ti visesaṃ katvāva vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
“屠场”:因为在该处屠杀、砍斫,故称为屠场(sūnā),也就是在上方进行砍斫,因此说“在屠场之上”。“以剑”:指用切肉的刀。“正被杀”:指正在被杀害、遭逼恼。“凌驾于所依之欲上”:意思是放在所依之欲的上面,极度超越它们。“割截”:即切断。“切碎”:指分割成片片。“欲贪的舍断”:此处指以镇伏的方式达到对欲贪的舍断。显示巴利原文
Sunanti koṭṭanti etthāti sūnā, adhikuṭṭananti āha ‘‘sūnāya uparī’’ti. Asināti maṃsakantanena. Ghātiyamānāti haññamānā vibādhiyamānā. Vatthukāmānaṃ upari katvāti vatthukāmesu ṭhapetvā te accādhānaṃ katvā. Kantitāti chinditā. Koṭṭitāti bilaso vibhajitā. Chandarāgappahānanti chandarāgassa vikkhambhanappahānaṃ.
“沉醉”:就是迷恋、迷惑。“耽著于喜贪而增长轮回”:因迷惑而不见其过患,便投入喜贪的所缘,从而不断滋长喜贪。因此称为“被喜贪所缚”:由于执着于喜贪,便被它绑住。这就叫“系著于轮回”:指在三界轮回中牢牢执着。正因为这种执着,即使遭受痛苦,他们也不会感到厌离,不会生起厌逆之心。此处是指无余的舍断,故说“以第四道宣说喜贪的舍断”。显示巴利原文
Sammattāti mucchitā sammūḷhā. Nandīrāgaṃ upagamma vaṭṭaṃ vaḍḍhentīti sammūḷhattā evaādīnavaṃ apassantā nandīrāgassa ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā taṃ paribrūhenti. Nandīrāgabaddhāti nandīrāge laggattā tena baddhā. Vaṭṭe laggantīti tebhūmake vaṭṭe sajjanti. Tattha sajjattā eva dukkhaṃ patvāpi na ukkaṇṭhanti na nibbindanti. Idha anavasesappahānaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘catutthamaggena nandīrāgappahānaṃ kathita’’nti.
《无秽经》(《中部》义释1.63)中已经阐明:『不以欲等而行……』这些内容。『彼世尊是佛陀』等文句,显示了《作礼敬》偈(《中部》1.249, 251)中所说的那种礼敬之相。「为菩提」:即是为了证悟四圣谛的正觉。同样地,调御、寂静、度脱、般涅槃,这些都应理解为依圣道而说。不过,寂静和般涅槃也可以结合无余涅槃的层面来理解。「成为业处」:意思是它成为观的业处。「此问」:指这第十五个问题的义理。同样地,对于其余的问题也应如此理解:这是以诸漏尽者的功德将观业处推向顶峰,顺着经文原本的法义次第来完成教导,而不是顺着所提问事项的次第——这是要旨。有人问:难道这个教导不是以提问开始的吗?没错,确实是这样开始的。但这只能说『依提问而建立论题』,不能说是『依照提问的次第来完成教导』。因为整个教导并不因中间的提问而转向,所以它是用一种与开头一致的方式来成就宣说的。显示巴利原文
Anaṅgaṇasutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.63) pakāsito eva ‘‘chandādīhi na gacchantī’’tiādinā. ‘‘Buddho so bhagavā’’tiādi ‘‘namo karohī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.249, 251) vuttanamakkārassa karaṇākāradassanaṃ. Bodhāyāti catusaccasambodhāya. Tathā damathasamathataraṇaparinibbānāni ariyamaggavasena veditabbāni. Samathaparinibbānāni pana anupādisesavasenapi yojetabbāni. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ ahosīti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ ahosi. Etassa pañhassāti etassa pannarasamassa pañhassa attho. Evaṃ itaresupi vattabbaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ khīṇāsavaguṇehi matthakaṃ pāpento yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi, na pucchitānusandhināti adhippāyo. Nanu ca pucchāvasenāyaṃ desanā āraddhāti? Saccaṃ āraddhā, evaṃ pana ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti vattabbaṃ, na ‘‘pucchānusandhivasena niṭṭhapitā’’ti. Antarapucchāvasena desanāya aparivattitattā ārambhānurūpameva pana desanā niṭṭhapitā.
第四 乘马车经注释显示巴利原文
4. Rathavinītasuttavaṇṇanā
252 252. 所谓「被大典尊所统摄」,这是指当时被摩揭陀王所统摄的标记,因为他正是那位国王的国师。有些人说:『大典尊』是古代的一位摩揭陀王。「被执取」(gayhati)即是执取,诸王的执取之处就是「王舍城」。这是依『城市』一词的词性而作的中性指示。这里还有其他解释:由于被诸王看见并妥善建立,作为他们执取之处,王舍城也就成了『家』;由于守护成就等而成为灾祸产生之因,对于入城的敌对诸王而言,王舍城作为执取之处也是『家』;由于园林等可爱之物而光彩夺目,由于居住舒适等而被众生以我执执取,或说『被统摄』所以是『王舍城』——在这些解释之中。所谓『在佛陀时代与转轮王时代』,这是就多数情况而言。它曾为竹林所围绕,但并不仅仅是竹木之林;国王游园时,依所建立的楼阁而说『具备楼阁』。显示巴利原文
252. Mahāgovindena pariggahitatākittanaṃ tadā magadharājena pariggahitūpalakkhaṇaṃ. Tassa hi so purohito. Mahāgovindoti purātano eko magadharājāti keci. Gayhatīti gaho, rājūnaṃ gaho rājagahaṃ. Nagara-saddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Aññepettha pakāreti rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ. Ārakkhasampattiādinā anatthuppattihetutāya upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gahabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, ārāmarāmaṇīyakādīhi rājate, nivāsasukhatādinā sattehi mamattavasena gayhati, pariggayhatīti vā rājagahanti evamādike pakāre. Buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle cāti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi, na pana kevalaṃ kaṭṭhakapavanameva. Rañño uyyānakāle patiṭṭhāpitaaṭṭālakavasena aṭṭālakayuttaṃ.
出生即是「生」(jāti),生的处所是「生地」(jātibhūma);或者说,大菩萨在此出生,这本身即是地,故为「生地」。这是他们的住处,因此称他们为「生地者」(jātibhūmakā),意为生地的居民。那么这是谁的生地呢?以『那么,那个……』等语句说明。由此显示,因为这里所指的『生』是不共的,在包含天神的世间中极其显著,所以即使没有修饰语,此处的『生』一词也被理解为殊胜的对象。因此说道:『一切知菩萨的出生地——释迦地方』(sabbaññubodhisattassa jātaṭṭhānasākiyajanapado)。在那里,又指以迦毗罗卫为依止的区域,所以说『以迦毗罗卫为食处』(kapilavatthāhāro)。显示巴利原文
Jananaṃ jāti, jātiyā bhūmi jātibhūmaṃ, jāyi vā mahābodhisatto etthābhi jāti, sā eva bhūmīti jātibhūmaṃ, sā imesaṃ nivāsoti jātibhūmakāti āha ‘‘jātibhūmakāti jātibhūmivāsino’’ti. Kassa panāyaṃ jātibhūmīti āha ‘‘taṃ kho panā’’tiādi. Tena anaññasādhāraṇāya jātiyā adhippetattā sadevake loke supākaṭabhāvato visesanena vināpi visiṭṭhavisayova idha jāti-saddo viññāyatīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattassa jātaṭṭhānasākiyajanapado’’ti. Tatthapi kapilavatthusannissayo padesoti āha ‘‘kapilavatthāhāro’’ti.
重法性之解说显示巴利原文
Garudhammabhāvavaṇṇanā
「释迦族众」(Sākiyamaṇḍalassa)指释迦王族群体。十种少欲等论说的所依,名为「十论事」(dasakathāvatthu),即少欲等。因于其中善巧安住,他成为十论事的成就者。「于其中」(tattha),即于十论事中。显示巴利原文
Sākiyamaṇḍalassāti sākiyarājasamūhassa. Dasannaṃ appicchakathādīnaṃ vatthu dasakathāvatthu, appicchatādi. Tattha suppatiṭṭhitatāya tassa lābhī dasakathāvatthulābhī. Tatthāti dasakathāvatthusmiṃ.
法因应受尊重而为尊,故以此为尊者名「法尊」(dhammagaru),此状态即是「法尊性」(dhammagarutā),以此(法尊性而说)。在说了「应以意乐而了知」之后,为显示并非仅凭内心倾向,也须透过身语的行为来了解,因而说「正是法尊性……」等。此处的「整夜说法之后」(tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathaṃ katvā),应依据余留的文句来理解其义,即「住在陶匠的住处,整夜安住之后说法」。否则,若仅依字面所得来理解,便会成为「整夜都在说法」,但这并非事实。因为下文将说:「许多夜晚」,其实大约只是半夜。正如十力等功德殊胜一般,以敬法为因的利他行道,在一切佛陀之中,也如同劈开的黄金那样彼此相似。因此,在称扬这位世尊敬重法时,便通过「迦叶世尊也……」等来显示迦叶世尊的敬重法。显示巴利原文
Garukaraṇīyatāya dhammo garu etassāti dhammagaru, tassa bhāvo dhammagarutā, tāya. ‘‘Ajjhāsayena veditabbo’’ti vatvā na kevalaṃ ajjhāsayeneva, atha kho kāyavacīpayogehipi veditabboti dassento ‘‘dhammagarutāyeva hī’’tiādimāha. Tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathaṃ katvāti ettha ‘‘kumbhakārassa nivesane tiyāmarattiṃ vasanto dhammakathaṃ katvā’’ti evaṃ vacanasesavasena attho veditabbo. Aññathā yathālābhavasena atthe gayhamāne tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathā katāti āpajjati, na ca taṃ atthi. Vakkhati hi ‘‘bahudeva rattinti diyaḍḍhayāmamatta’’nti. Dasabalādiguṇavisesā viya dhammagāravahetukā parahitapaṭipattipi sabbabuddhānaṃ majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya sadisā evāti imassa bhagavato dhammagāravakittane ‘‘kassapopi bhagavā’’tiādinā kassapabhagavato dhammagāravaṃ dasseti.
「出发游化」(Cārikaṃ nikkhamī),指为了巡游地方而出行。因在不应游化的时节出发前往地方游化,憍萨罗王等人便开始劝阻。因为诸佛的惯例,是在受到邀请之后才出行。世尊期望满(Puṇṇā)能正确行道,便说道:「你能为我做什么呢?」显示巴利原文
Cārikaṃ nikkhamīti janapadacārikaṃ carituṃ nikkhami. Janapadacārikāya akāle nikkhantattā kosalarājādayo vāretuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Pavāretvā hi caraṇaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ. Puṇṇāya sammāpaṭipattiṃ paccāsīsanto bhagavā ‘‘kiṃ me karissasī’’ti āha.
“尚未沐浴”(Anahātovā),指因急切闻法,于傍晚未依诸佛的常法沐浴。在自利行道与利他行道中,或具其中一项,或具两项,由此成立四种行道类别,故说“名为行道者……有四种”。因为即使是以遮止为前提的行道者,就实质而言,也仍是行道者。虽为自利而行道,以此正行道能令教法光耀,却并不能令教法增长,因为他处于少事务的状态;亦不能完全满足具足悲悯的世尊之心愿。正如世尊初成道时,以及有六十一位比丘证得阿拉汉时,所说:“诸比丘,为了多人的利益……游行吧”等(长部 2.86-88;律藏大品 32),劝导比丘们致力于利他行道。因此说:“世尊不询问这样的比丘。何以故?因为他非立于我教法增长的一边。”显示巴利原文
Anahātovāti dhammasavanussukkena sāyanhe buddhāciṇṇaṃ nhānaṃ akatvāva. Attahitaparahitapaṭipattīsu ekissā dvinnañca atthitāsiddhā catubbidhatā paṭipattikatā eva nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭipannako ca nāma…pe… catubbidho hotī’’ti. Paṭikkhepapubbakopi hi paṭipanno atthato paṭipannattho evāti. Kāmaṃ attahitāya paṭipanno tāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sāsanaṃ sobhati, na pana sāsanaṃ vaḍḍheti appossukkabhāvato, na ca kāruṇikassa bhagavato sabbathā manorathaṃ pūreti. Tathā hi bhagavā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasaṭṭhiyā ca arahantesu jātesu – ‘‘caratha, bhikkhave, bahujanahitāyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.86-88; mahāva. 32) bhikkhū parahitapaṭipattiyaṃ niyojesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evarūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ bhagavā na pucchati, kasmā? Na mayhaṃ sāsanassa vuḍḍhipakkhe ṭhito’’ti.
整体虽因缺少个别而显得不足,却宛如无缺,因此,虽将拔古喇长老排除在第四群之外,仍说“如同八十位大长老”。或者,“八十位大长老”这一共称,也可视为即便在部分上,亦如同“八解脱等至”的通称一般。在这样的场合,众多比丘一起说法,且大声说法,纯粹是为了令导师内心欢喜。为了显示那些比丘正是如此行道,而说“那些比丘听到云声……”等。“功德推重”(Guṇasambhāvanāyā),指的是基于后文将要称述的功德而产生的推重,并非出于任何处理事务的能力等。显示巴利原文
Samudāyo appakena ūnopi anūno viya hotīti bākulattheraṃ catuttharāsito bahi katvāpi ‘‘asītimahātherā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asītimahātherasamaññā vā avayavepi aṭṭhasamāpattisāmaññā viya daṭṭhabbā. Īdise ṭhāne bahūnaṃ ekato kathanaṃ mahatā kaṇṭhena ca kathanaṃ satthu cittārādhanamevāti tehi bhikkhūhi tathā paṭipannanti dassento ‘‘te bhikkhū meghasaddaṃ sutvā’’tiādimāha. Guṇasambhāvanāyāti vakkhamānaguṇahetukāya sambhāvanāya sambhāvito, na yena kenaci kiccasamatthatādinā.
少欲等之解说显示巴利原文
Appicchatādivaṇṇanā
将“少”(appa)字理解为“小”的同义词后,便指出“文句好像还有余留”。因此又说“非彼”等。然而,此处的“少”字实为“无有”之义,正如在“我知无病”等(中部 1.225; 2.134)文句中可以被理解的那样。显示巴利原文
Appa-saddassa parittapariyāyataṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘na hi tassā’’tiādi. Appa-saddo panettha abhāvatthoti sakkā viññātuṃ ‘‘appābādhatañca sañjānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225; 2.134) viya.
「过欲」(Atricchatā)之名(《增支部注释》1.1.63),意为“处处皆有欲求”。所谓“对不实功德的称扬”,是将自己本不具备的功德,当作实有一般向他人展示。“有信者”:意欲令人知晓“我是履行仪轨的得益者、诵经者”等,这是由于仪轨行持而获得殊胜利益,因而希望为人所知。“对实有功德的称扬”,是指安住于欲求行为,展示自身所真实具备的戒、头陀支等功德。因为这类人,在接受供养时亦不知节量。显示巴利原文
Atricchatā nāma (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.63) atra atra icchāti katvā. Asantaguṇasambhāvanatāti attani avijjamānaṃ guṇānaṃ vijjamānānaṃ viya paresaṃ pakāsanā. Saddhoti maṃ jano jānātūti vattapaṭipattikārakavisesalābhīti jānātu ‘‘vattapaṭipattiāpāthakajjhāyitā’’ti evamādinā. Santaguṇasambhāvanāti icchācāre ṭhatvā attani vijjamānasīladhutadhammādiguṇavibhāvanā. Tādisassa hi paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutāpi hoti.
即在执取的刹那,它便向不知情的他人显现出来——此为要旨。显示巴利原文
Gaṇhantoyeva ummujji aññesaṃ ajānantānaṃyevāti adhippāyo.
先以人为基础,显示了以少欲为首的四种欲之分类;此后,为再依人显示四种欲的分类,又开示“复有四种少欲者”等。“依施主”,即随顺施主之心意。“依应施物”,即随顺应施物之多寡。“依自力”,即随顺自身仅能维持之力。显示巴利原文
Appicchatāpadhānaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena catubbidhaṃ icchāpabhedaṃ dassetvā punapi puggalādhiṭṭhānena catubbidhaṃ icchāpabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘aparopi catubbidhoappiccho’’tiādimāha. Dāyakassa vasanti dāyakassa cittavasaṃ. Deyyadhammassa vasanti deyyadhammassa appabahubhāvaṃ. Attano thāmanti attano yāpanamattakathāmaṃ.
因为冢间住的仪轨已被完整教导,所以没有一位比丘不知道。‘不间断’即没有间断。‘第二者莫知我’是说:即便是共住的同伴,也无法知道我就是这样连续六十年无间断地住在冢间;因此,我啊,确实是冢间住者中最上者!显示巴利原文
Ekabhikkhupi na aññāsi sosānikavatte sammadeva vuttittā. Abbokiṇṇanti avicchedaṃ. Dutiyo maṃ na jāneyyāti dutiyo sahāyabhūtopi yathā maṃ jānituṃ na sakkuṇeyya, tathā saṭṭhi vassāni nirantaraṃ susāne vasāmi, tasmā ahaṃ aho sosānikuttamo.
“以说法令大众激动后”:通过让大众身毛竖立、称善、供养、抛掷衣物等,以及其他聚集而来的人喧哗着询问“我们怎样才能在尊者身边听法?”这样的骚动,使大众激动之后。“去了”:因为害怕被人知道“那晚说法的人就是他”,且出于对所学的少欲,他便回到了自己的住处。显示巴利原文
Dhammakathāya janataṃ khobhetvāti lomahaṃsanasādhukāradānacelukkhepādivasena sannipatitaṃ itarañca ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho ayyassa santikeva dhammaṃ sossāmā’’ti kolāhalavasena mahājanaṃ khobhetvā. Gatoti ‘‘ayaṃ so, tena rattiyaṃ dhammakathā katā’’ti jānanabhayena pariyattiappicchatāya pariveṇaṃ gato.
“如三位善男子”:就像在东竹林园中和合共住的三位善男子一样。“舍断后”:先以彼分断等作前方便,而后以最上道彻底断除。显示巴利原文
Tayokulaputtā viyāti pācīnavaṃsadāye samaggavāsaṃ vutthā tayo kulaputtā viya. Pahāyāti pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena pacchā aggamaggeneva pajahitvā.
十二种知足的解释。显示巴利原文
Dvādasavidhasantosavaṇṇanā
对于天生体质虚弱等的比丘,沉重的袈裟等既不带来安乐,也令身体疲劳。因此,若出于实际需要而非额外贪求,将那些沉重袈裟换成轻便者受用,并不违背知足,所以说“即使只用轻便的袈裟过活,也还是知足的人”。即使得到贵重的袈裟,或得到很多袈裟,将它们舍弃而另取别的,由于这是安立在随宜而行的规范中,所以也不违背知足,所以说“即使受用那些……也还是知足的人”。同样,在其余资具的“随力知足”与“随宜知足”解说中,也应领会其中加入了一个“也”字的用意。随宜知足才是最上等的,因为它将无贪的意乐推到了极致。显示巴利原文
Pakatidubbalādīnaṃ garucīvarādīni naphāsubhāvāvahāni sarīrakhedāvahāni ca hontīti payojanavasena naatricchatādivasena tāni parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Mahagghacīvaraṃ, bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sesapaccayesupi yathābalayathāsāruppasantosaniddesesu apisaddaggahaṇe adhippāyo veditabbo. Yathāsāruppasantosoyeva aggo alobhajjhāsayassa ukkaṃsanato.
三种远离的解释。显示巴利原文
Tividhapavivekavaṇṇanā
“一”指独处。“行”是根据分段式的威仪而说。“游”是根据在精舍外经行散步而说,“住”是根据白天的住处等而说。所谓“身远离”,是指那些乐于出离的人,由修习而安住于远离之处,并非仅指禅那的远离,因此才说“乐求出离者”。“清净心”是指从五盖等染污中远离而清净的心。“达至极净”是指消除了寻等每一禅那的对立障碍,从而获得最上、最极致的清净。“无依著”是指断除了烦恼等一切依著,成为无依著的人。显示巴利原文
Ekoti ekākī. Gacchatīti cuṇṇikairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ. Caratīti vihārato bahi sañcāravasena, viharatīti divāvihārādivasena. Kāyavivekoti ca nekkhammādhimuttassa bhāvanānuyogavasena vivekaṭṭhakāyatā, na jhānavivekamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nekkhammābhiratāna’’nti. Parisuddhacittānanti nīvaraṇādisaṃkilesato visuddhacittānaṃ. Paramavodānappattānanti vitakkāditaṃtaṃjhānapaṭipakkhavigamena paramaṃ uttamaṃ vodānaṃ pattānaṃ. Nirupadhīnanti kilesupadhiādīnaṃ vigamena nirupadhīnaṃ.
五种杂染的解释。显示巴利原文
Pañcavidhasaṃsaggavaṇṇanā
由此而沉溺,所以称为“杂染”,也就是贪染。以听闻为原因,或依于听闻而生起的杂染,叫做“闻杂染”。其余可以类推。而“身杂染”是指身体的接触,如妇女、新妇或少女等。“相续连结”指把前前后后连接起来。所谓“以耳识路为基”,这是从作为根本的听闻来说的;即使在它之后,于意门速行心路中生起的贪染,也仍然属于闻杂染。在见杂染中,道理也是一样。“无女性香气菩萨”是以他人叙说而生起的闻杂染所举的例子,低沙年青比丘则是以自己所听闻为例。其中,为说明第一个例子,应当从《本生》中了知,故说“据说有一位年青比丘……”等。被欲贪所射中,意思是被贪欲之箭刺入心中,从内部穿透。显示巴利原文
Saṃsīdati etenāti saṃsaggo, rāgo. Savanahetuko, savanavasena vā pavatto saṃsaggo savanasaṃsaggo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kāyasaṃsaggo pana kāyaparāmāso. Itthī vāti vadhū, yuvatī vā. Sandhānetunti pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭetuṃ. Sotaviññāṇavīthivasenāti idaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ savanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tassa piṭṭhivattakamanodvārikajavanavīthīsu uppannopi rāgo savanasaṃsaggoyeva. Dassanasaṃsaggepi eseva nayo. Anitthigandhabodhisatto parehi kathiyamānavasena pavattasavanasaṃsaggassa nidassanaṃ. Tissadaharo attanā suyyamānavasena. Tattha paṭhamaṃ jātake veditabbanti itaraṃ dassento ‘‘daharo kirā’’tiādimāha. Kāmarāgena viddhoti rāgasallena hadaye appito anto anuviddho.
「听」(sota)意指见杂染。「应如此了知」是根据具体的事例来加以阐明。据说在那个村子,多数妇女都相貌端丽、仪态优雅,因此长老说:“你若在村中走动……”因为正好在适当的时分进入村中,他才获得了粥;所以当他只取了粥就要离去时,众人说:“尊者,请您留步!请接纳食物。”随即又请求道:“尊者,我们并非只为供养食物才请您回来,而是另有因缘,尊者。”显示巴利原文
Soti dassanasaṃsaggo. Evaṃ veditabboti vatthuvasena pākaṭaṃ karoti. Tasmiṃ kira gāme yebhuyyena itthiyo abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā, tasmā thero ‘‘sace antogāme na carissasī’’ti āha. Kālasseva paviṭṭhattā yāguṃ adāsi, tasmā yāgumeva gahetvā gacchantaṃ ‘‘nivattatha, bhante, bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti āhaṃsu. Yācitvāti ‘‘na mayaṃ, bhante, bhikkhaṃ dātukāmā nivattema, apica idaṃ bhante kāraṇa’’nti yācitvā.
最初的攀谈称为「语」(ālāpa);依于对话和应答而展开的交谈称为「共语」(sallāpa)。此处举出“比丘尼”仅是例示。对于任何一位女性,缘于她的所有物、受用而生起的贪染,同样属于「受用杂染」。显示巴利原文
Ādito lapanaṃ ālāpo, vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavatto lāpo sallāpo. Bhikkhuniyāti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ. Yāya kāyacipi itthiyā santakaparibhogavasena uppannarāgopi sambhogasaṃsaggova.
执取者等注释显示巴利原文
Gāhagāhakādivaṇṇanā
比丘被其他比丘以按摩身体等方式而有身体上的触摸。这里的「身体接触」即指身体抚摸的杂染。所谓「执取者」(gāhagāhako),是指抓取那些抓取者的人。「执脱者」(gāhamuttako),是指自己能从那些不如理地以物质利益摄受人的人当中解脱出来的人。「脱执者」(muttagāhako),是指摄受那些已从上述摄受中解脱者的人。「脱脱者」(muttamuttako),是指自己也从解脱者中解脱的人。这是就执取一面、以摄受的方式而言。他们亲近比丘,是期望从中获取一些世俗的利益,并非以应供者的态度。而就比丘这一方来说,「执取」应当理解为是为了获得资具而摄受的方式。以上所说,即是依据“以物质利益”等所表述的情形。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhuno bhikkhūhi kāyaparāmāso kāyasambāhanādivasena. Kāyasaṃsagganti kāyaparāmāsasaṃsaggaṃ. Gāhagāhakoti gaṇhanakānaṃ gaṇhanakoti attho. Gāhamuttakoti ayoniso āmisehi saṅgaṇhanakehi sayaṃ muccanako. Muttagāhakoti yathāvuttasaṅgahato muttānaṃ saṅgaṇhanako. Muttamuttakoti muccanakehi sayampi muccanako. Gahaṇavasena saṅgaṇhanavasena. Upasaṅkamanti tato kiñci lokāmisaṃ paccāsīsantā, na dakkhiṇeyyavasena. Bhikkhupakkhe gahaṇavasenāti paccayalābhāya saṅgaṇhanavasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘āmisenā’’tiādinā vuttanayena.
“处”是指自己的立足处。“不让他们到达”的意思是:当这些烦恼生起时,便以如理作意的力量将其驱除、镇伏,使之无法得逞。因此,经中说“以咒语”等。正如渴望活命的人不会与黑蛇或敌人共住,同样,他连一刹那也不与烦恼共住——这就是此句的含义。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānanti attano ṭhānāvatthaṃ. Pāpuṇituṃ na deti uppannameva taṃ paṭisaṅkhānabalena nīharanto vikkhambheti. Tenāha ‘‘mantenā’’tiādi. Yathā jīvitukāmo puriso kaṇhasappena, amittena vā saha na saṃvasati, evaṃ khaṇamattampi kilesehi saha na saṃvasatīti attho.
四遍清净戒包含世间与出世间的。定也是如此。由于“八等至”的统摄,世间定被称作“观的足处”;由此,出世间定也可称为“观的足处”。正如以四种色界禅那为立足处而生起的道定是观的足处,以四种无色界禅那为立足处而生起的道定同样是观的足处。然而,等至的次第应按先前的说法来理解。或者,由于断除对立而正入,如同“入流道”的称名一样。因此,应知在此并非唯有慧才兼具二重性质,戒与定同样如此。“解脱”在此是指圣果,因为经中说“解脱具足者”。那是从“完成”的意义而应当成就的,并非指涅槃。显示巴利原文
Catupārisuddhisīlaṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca. Tathā samādhipi. Vipassanāya pādakā vipassanāpādakāti aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇena yathā lokiyasamādhi gahito, evaṃ vipassanāpādakā etesanti vipassanāpādakāti aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇeneva lokuttaro samādhi gahito. Yathā hi cattāri rūpajjhānāni adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā pavatto maggasamādhi vipassanāpādako, evaṃ cattāri arūpajjhānāni adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā pavattopi. Samāpattipariyāyo pana pubbavohārena veditabbo. Paṭipakkhasamucchedanena sammā āpajjanato vā yathā ‘‘sotāpattimaggo’’ti. Evamettha sīlasamādhīnampi missakabhāvo veditabbo, na paññāya eva. Vimuttīti ariyaphalanti vuttaṃ ‘‘vimuttisampanno’’ti vuttattā. Tañhi nipphādanaṭṭhena sampādetabbaṃ, na nibbānanti.
在此,由于少欲,他对所得的资具感到满足;由于知足,他受用所得时不贪著、不迷恋,见到过患,以出离的智慧而受用。处于这种状态,他因对一切无所耽著,便增长远离,不与任何在家人或出家人混杂。他具足这样的意乐后,便发起精进,为获得所未获得的、证得所未证得的而努力。当他精进时,如实地省察自己所持的戒,以这圆满清净的戒行而生起无悔——这就是他的戒成就。以无悔为根基,引生欢悦、喜、轻安与乐,心得以善修,因而正入于定——这就是他的定成就。由此如实知见而起厌离,由厌离而离欲,由离欲而解脱——这就是他的慧成就。而他心解脱的状态,即是他的解脱成就;依于解脱,复有如实知见。应当这样了知这十种论事的次第。他具足这十种论事,便是自利的行道;将这十种论事向他人宣说,便是利他的行道。在这两者中,自利行以智为先导,与智相应;利他行以悲为先导,与悲相应。这一切应当称为智悲篇。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca appicchatāya laddhapaccayena paritussati, santuṭṭhatāya laddhā te agadhito amucchitoādīnavadassī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati, evaṃbhūto ca katthaci alaggamānasatāya pavivekaṃ paribrūhento kenaci asaṃsaṭṭho viharati gahaṭṭhena vā pabbajitena vā. So evaṃ ajjhāsayasampanno vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā, anadhigamassa adhigamāya. Ārabhanto ca yathāsamādinnaṃ attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhati, tassa sīlassa suparisuddhataṃ nissāya uppajjati avippaṭisāro, ayamassa sīlasampadā. Tassa avippaṭisāramūlakehi pāmojjapītipassaddhisukhehi sammā brūhitaṃ cittaṃ sammadeva samādhiyati, ayamassa samādhisampadā. Tato yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, ayamassa paññāsampadā. Vimuttacittatā panassa vimuttisampadā, tato vimuttito ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ anupubbī veditabbā. Tassa yo dasahi kathāvatthūhi samannāgamo, ayaṃ attahitāya paṭipatti. Yā nesaṃ paresaṃ saṃkittanaṃ, ayaṃ parahitāya paṭipatti. Tāsu purimā ñāṇapubbaṅgamā ñāṇasampayuttā ca, itarā karuṇāpubbaṅgamā karuṇāsampayuttā cāti sabbaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākaṇḍaṃ vattabbaṃ.
他以这十种论事作为方便,给予比丘教导。意思是:“名为比丘者,应当远远避开多欲等过失,如法安住于少欲”,如此一一为比丘们开示这些论事。当这样开示时,便说“他以这些论事教导比丘”。他确实是在教导,只是依其行相作展示。若要说明其中的微细含义,例如“这样是少欲,这样也是……”等少欲的行相,虽然展示了少欲的种种表现,却仍不能使人了知那微细深妙的所谓“少欲”之真实义理。要使人了知,就必须依上述种种差别来作说明。所谓“因”,即少欲所以能成就的缘由——也就是指出“在多欲等事中有这些过患,在少欲中有这利益”,这样展示过患与利益。能正确以因而显示少欲的,称为“指示者”。“执取者”,是指让他如同所执取的道理那样去实行,令其安立其中。能激发精进力,使他如所受持的那样坚固不动,正确地给予策励的,称为“激发者”。对于已生起精进的人,称赞其功德,赞叹今生及未来所能获得的成就与殊胜,令其欢喜,正确地以种种方式令其满意,即称为“令欢喜者”。显示巴利原文
Dasahikathāvatthūhi karaṇabhūtehi bhikkhūnaṃ ovādaṃ deti, ‘‘bhikkhunā nāma atricchatādike dūrato vajjetvā sammadeva appicchena bhavitabba’’ntiādinā taṃ taṃ kathāvatthuṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upadisatīti attho. Upadisanto hi tāni ‘‘tehi bhikkhū ovadatī’’ti vutto. Ovadatiyeva sarūpadassanamattena. Sukhumaṃ atthaṃ parivattetvāti evampi appicchatā hoti evampīti appicchatādivasena aparāparaṃ appicchatāvuttiṃ dassetvā tattha sukhumanipuṇaṃ appicchatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ jānāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Viññāpetīti yathāvuttehi visesehi viññāpeti. Kāraṇanti yena kāraṇena appicchatā ijjhati, taṃ pana ‘‘mahicchatādīsu ete dosā, appicchatāya ayamānisaṃso’’tiādīnavānisaṃsadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammā hetunā appicchataṃ dassetīti sandassako. Gāhetunti yathā gaṇhati, tathā kātuṃ, tattha paṭṭhapetunti attho. Ussāhajananavasenāti yathā taṃ samādānaṃ niccalaṃ hoti, evaṃ ussoḷhiyā uppādanavasena sammadeva uttejetīti samuttejako. Ussāhajāteti appicchatāya jātussāhe. Vaṇṇaṃ vatvā tattha sampattiṃ āyatiñca labbhamānaguṇaṃ kittetvā sampahaṃseti sammadeva pakārehi tosetīti sampahaṃsako. Evaṃ santuṭṭhiādīsu yathārahaṃ yojanā kātabbā.
五利得注释显示巴利原文
Pañcalābhavaṇṇanā
253 “在导师面前,这样的名声流传开来……”这句话表明,他的名声是从真实功德中产生的。“mandamando”,就像极其愚钝的人一样。“abalabalo”,就像极其羸弱的人一样。“bhākuṭikabhākuṭiko”,就像极其愁眉不展、面目可憎的人一样。“anumassā”是“随触后”的意思,即从自相与差别方面一一掌握了十种论事。而掌握之后,便如同进入其中,所以说“anupavisitvā(进入后)”。与同梵行者谈论功德,这是一种利养,应如此理解。对其余的利养也应如此类推。他出于对法的尊重,怀着这样的期望而宣说,这便是他的用意。显示巴利原文
253.Satthu sammukhā evaṃ vaṇṇo abbhuggatoti. Iminā tassa vaṇṇassa yathābhūtaguṇasamuṭṭhitataṃ dasseti. Mandamando viyāti ati viya acheko viya. Abalabalo viyāti ati viya abalo viya. Bhākuṭikabhākuṭiko viyāti ati viya dummukho viya. Anumassāti anumasitvā, dasa kathāvatthūni sarūpato visesato ca anupariggahetvāti attho. Pariggaṇhanaṃ pana nesaṃ anupavisanaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘anupavisitvā’’ti. Sabrahmacārīhi vaṇṇabhāsanaṃ eko lābhoti yojanā. Evaṃ sesesupi. Patthayamāno evamāha dhammagarutāyāti adhippāyo.
游行等注疏显示巴利原文
Cārikādivaṇṇanā
254 254. “abhirataṃ”(所乐)是“abhiramana”(喜悦)的意思,此处保留了鼻音而未作省略,故说为“abhirantaṃ”(乐住)。这也是一个表示修习的中性名词。所谓“不乐住”并不存在,而乐住之后也没有所谓长久停留的可能,这正是因为如实遍知一切诸行体性的缘故。因为一切诸佛世尊都已证得无可比拟的功德。显示巴利原文
254. Abhiramanaṃ abhirataṃ, tadeva anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘abhiranta’’nti. Bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Anabhirati nāma natthi, abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi sammadeva pariññātavatthukattā. Sabbasahā hi buddhā bhagavanto asayhalābhino.
前面在赞叹尊重法的语境中,已以部分方式显示了已述及和未述及的大迦叶前去迎接等事,随后详细讲述了林居帝沙沙弥的故事。现在为了说明各地游行,便以“Bhagavā hi(世尊确实……)”等开示。他希望能与那些能行于空中的比丘同行,便说:“去告知那些获得六神通者。”有人说,具足戒虽然可以通过僧团羯磨成就,但在此处是依世尊的命令才得以成就的,因此说:“我们将把佛的遗产给你。”另一些人说:“世尊在准许这位未满二十岁者受具足戒时,说道:‘我将把佛的遗产给你。’”受具足戒:由法将(舍利弗)担任他的亲教师,为他授予具足戒。显示巴利原文
Pubbe dhammagarutākittanapasaṅgena gahitaṃ aggahitañca mahākassapapaccuggamanādiṃ ekadesena dassetvā vanavāsitissasāmaṇerassa vatthuṃ vitthāretvā janapadacārikaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ākāsagāmīhi saddhiṃ gantukāmo ‘‘chaḷabhiññānaṃ ārocehī’’ti āha. Saṅghakammena sijjhamānāpi upasampadā satthu āṇāvaseneva sijjhanato ‘‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Apare ‘‘aparipuṇṇavīsativassasseva tassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto satthā ‘buddhadāyajjaṃ tedassāmī’ti avocā’’ti vadanti. Upasampādetvāti dhammasenāpatinā upajjhāyena upasampādetvā.
“百由旬之内”指包含在中部地区的范围,更远之处因行走迟缓便不予前往。“四周”指所到之处的四个方位。还有其他原因:由于比丘们的止与观尚稚嫩,以及中部地区的有缘众生智慧成熟等其他原因,世尊才外出游化,又进入界内区域。“以七日……”等,应结合后面所说的“为一月……”等次第来理解。显示巴利原文
Navayojanasatikaṃ majjhimadesapariyāpannameva, tato paraṃ nādhippetaṃ dandhatāvasena gamanato. Samantāti gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu. Aññenapi kāraṇenāti bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanātaruṇabhāvato aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena nikkhamati, antomaṇḍalaṃ otarati. Sattahi vātiādi ‘‘ekaṃ māsaṃ vā’’tiādinā vuttānukkamena yojetabbaṃ.
“为了身体舒适”:为了避免长期固定住在一地而导致体内四大增盛,通过游行使身体疏散得安。“为了期待说法时机成熟”:如同《火聚喻经》(A.7.72)、《摩伽天本生经》(Jā.1.1.9)等,是为了等待说法因缘时节的到来。“为了制定学处”:如同制定饮酒学处(Pāc.326)等那样。“为了度化众生”:是为了度化像央掘摩罗那样的应度众生。而特别针对某人、于固定住处停留的游行,便称为固定游行。显示巴利原文
Sarīraphāsukatthāyāti ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne nibaddhavāsena ussannadhātukassa sarīrassa virecanena phāsubhāvatthāya. Aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāyāti aggikkhandhūpamasutta (a. ni. 7.72) maghadevajātakādidesanānaṃ (jā. 1.1.9) viya dhammadesanāya aṭṭhuppattikālassa ākaṅkhanena. Surāpānasikkhāpadapaññāpane (pāci. 326) viya sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya. Bodhaneyyasatte aṅgulimālādike bodhanatthāya. Nibaddhavāsañca puggalaṃ uddissa cārikā nibaddhacārikā.
255 为了显示他在任何地方都不执取、无所系着的状态,所以说:“犹如象王离群……如同独行的壮象”。‘无须同伴而行’:指如同狮子,无需同伴相助而独自行动。以此显示他的独居状态与威仪。然而,那时他还未能获得身远离,这正是此处所要说明的原因。至于‘被许多(比丘围绕)’等说法,则是依据实际情形而言。长老的随从弟子们极为善巧调伏,习惯于恭敬师长,因此他们的所作所为恰好都符合尊者的心意。显示巴利原文
255. Apariggahabhāvaṃ katthaci alaggabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yūthaṃ pahāya…pe… mattahatthī viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asahāyakiccoti sahāyakiccarahito sīho viya. Tenassa ekavihāritaṃ tejavantatañca dasseti. Tadā pana kāyaviveko na sakkā laddhunti idamettha kāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bahūhītiādi pana sabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Therassa parisā suvinītā ciṇṇagaruvāsā garuno icchānurūpameva vattati.
为了说明在具备所述理由的长途跋涉中,‘游行’一词在教法中已成为约定俗成的用法,所以说“虽然……”等。所谓‘惯用’,是指由于某种相状而对某事形成概念,即使在没有那种相状的其他情形下也照样沿用此概念。譬如一个人仅仅因为征服了疆土,就被称为决胜大会战的大勇士。至于‘拜访他人’:意指为了请人通报“我来了,请告知导师”,而去找了另一位比丘。显示巴利原文
Vuttakāraṇayutte addhānagamane cārikānaṃ vohāro sāsane niruḷhoti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Kenacideva nimittena kismiñci atthe pavattāya saññāya tannimittarahitepi aññasmiṃ pavatti ruḷhī nāma. Vijitamārattā saṅgāmavijayamahāyodho viya. Aññaṃ sevitvāti ‘‘mama āgatabhāvaṃ satthu ārocehī’’ti ārocanatthaṃ aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ sevitvā.
为了显示世尊说法时,总是契合各个众生的意乐,恰如其分地开示相应的法语,所以说“在《小牛角经》中”等。其中,‘和合之利’:即依据“阿那律们,你们是否和合、欢喜……”等,宣说了和合的利益。‘住所之利’:即依据“抵御寒暑……”等,宣说了与住所相关的利益。‘获得正念’:当乔帝巴喇长老刚刚陷入低劣境地时,然而他已在大菩提座上发愿证得一切知智,圆满波罗蜜而来。对于这样一个人,放逸而住是不合适的。如同迦叶世尊为使菩萨获得正念而宣说法语那样,这位世尊也为比丘们宣说了与宿住相关的《嘎帝咖拉经》。他宣说了‘四法要’——“世间被衰老迁转,是无常的;世间无所救护,无所归属;世间空无所有,一切皆须舍离而去;世间有缺、不知满足,是爱的奴仆”——他宣说了这四个法要。虽然这些法要是具寿赖吒和罗尊者在《赖吒和罗经》中对俱卢王所说,但那是从佛陀那里拿来、再由尊者在彼处复述的,所以经中说“《赖吒和罗经》”等。的确,经中是这样说的:“大王,那些法要是由彼世尊、知者、见者、阿拉显示巴利原文
Bhagavā dhammaṃ desento taṃtaṃpuggalajjhāsayānurūpaṃ tadanucchavikameva dhammiṃ kathaṃ karotīti dassento ‘‘cūḷagosiṅgasutte’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāmaggirasānisaṃsanti ‘‘kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.326) sāmaggirasānisaṃsaṃ kathesi. Āvasathānisaṃsanti ‘‘sītaṃ uṇhaṃ paṭihanatī’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 295, 315) āvasathapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ. Satipaṭilābhikanti jotipālatthere lāmakaṃ ṭhānaṃ otiṇṇamatte mahābodhipallaṅke pana sabbaññutaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūrento āgato. Tādisassa nāma pamādavihāro na yuttoti yathā kassapo bhagavā bodhisattassa satiṃ paṭilabhituṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathesi, tathā ayaṃ bhagavā tameva pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttakathaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ghaṭikārasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 2.282) kathesi. Cattāro dhammuddeseti – ‘‘upanīyati loko addhuvo, atāṇo loko anabhissaro, assako loko sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.305) ime cattāro dhammuddese kathesi. Kāmañcete dhammuddesā raṭṭhapālasutte (ma. ni. 2.304) āyasmatā raṭṭhapālattherena rañño korabyassa kathitā, te pana bhagavato eva āharitvā therena tattha kathitāti vuttaṃ ‘‘raṭṭhapālasutte’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sutte – ‘‘atthi kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammuddesā uddiṭṭhā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.305) pānakānisaṃsakathanti ‘‘aggihuttaṃ mukhaṃ yaññā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 573) anumodanaṃ vatvā puna pakiṇṇakakathāvasena pānakapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ānisaṃsakathaṃ kathesi. Ekībhāve ānisaṃsaṃ kathesi, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ bhaguṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.238). Anantanayanti aparimāṇadesanānayaṃ appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puṇṇa, ayampi appicchakathāyevā’’tiādi bahūhi pariyāyehi nānānayaṃ deseti. Kathaṃ tathā desitaṃ thero aññāsīti āha ‘‘paṭisambhidāpattassa…pe… ahosī’’ti.
七清净问论释显示巴利原文
Sattavisuddhipañhavaṇṇanā
256 「从那以后」:当出生地的比丘们在导师面前称扬长老的功德时,从那时起。「成为随顺上首,从后方跟随」:应理解为,这是出于对长老的恭敬,于相见时便如此随行。正如经文也说“哪怕只是少许……”及“急匆匆的样子”。然而,注释书中所说“隐在一处等待”等,并不成立。法将岂会不知那位长老所坐之处,还须以神通去知晓呢?至于“他会不会没看到我就走了”这样的念头,同样也只是出于恭敬。因为专程前来拜见导师的弟子——即便是阿若憍陈如尊者,也绝不可能没有见到住在那里、与导师同在的法将便自行离去。关于「为了昼住」:此处是目的的业格,故意为“为了昼住”。显示巴利原文
256.Tatopaṭṭhāyāti. Yadā jātibhūmakā bhikkhū satthu sammukhā therassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsiṃsu, tato paṭṭhāya. Sīsānulokī hutvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhanaṃ therena samāgame ādaravasena katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ pāṭhe ‘‘appeva nāmā’’tiādi, ‘‘taramānarūpo’’ti ca. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nilīna’’ntiādi, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi dhammasenāpati tassa therassa nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇena jānituṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Kacci nu kho maṃ adisvāva gamissatī’’ti ayampi cintā ādaravasenevāti yuttaṃ. Na hi satthāraṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgato sāvako api āyasmā aññātakoṇḍañño satthukappaṃ dhammasenāpatiṃ tattha vasantaṃ adisvāva gacchanako nāma atthi. Divāvihāranti sampadāne upayogavacananti āha ‘‘divāvihāratthāyā’’ti.
257 「前话」:指最初的交谈。「未令住立」:指尚未被发起。「后话不生」:后面应说的话语便无从生起。他以所见相印证的方式,询问了七清净。所谓「如实知见清净」,即是圣道。由于此后仍有应当证得者,因此说“即使安住于四遍净戒等,梵行也还未达到顶点”。正因为梵行未达顶点,所以他拒绝了一切:连第七个问题也回绝了,更不必说其余的问题。显示巴利原文
257.Purimakathāyāti paṭhamālāpe. Appatiṭṭhitāyāti nappavattitāya. Pacchimakathā na jāyatīti pacchā vattabbakathāya avasaro na hoti. Satta visuddhiyo pucchi diṭṭhasaṃsandanavasena. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhi nāma ariyamaggo. Yasmā tato uttarimpi pattabbaṃ attheva, tasmā ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlādīsu ṭhitassapi brahmacariyavāso matthakaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāti brahmacariyavāsassa matthakaṃ appattattā. Sabbaṃ paṭikkhipīti sattamampi pañhaṃ paṭikkhipi, itaresu vattabbameva natthi.
“无因般涅槃”(Appaccayaparinibbāna):这是指无余涅槃(anupādisesanibbāna)。现在为了以另一种方式显示无取般涅槃(anupādāparinibbāna),说“二分(dvedhā)”等。其中,「执取之取」(gahaṇūpādāna):指的是作为坚固执持的那个取。因此说“诸如欲取(kāmupādāna)等”。「缘取」(paccayūpādāna):是指任何一种缘。因为缘会执取其自身的果,以执取的方式来抓取,所以称为“取”。因此说“所谓缘取……就是诸缘”。依“无取而心从诸漏解脱”(anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatī)的说法,阿拉汉果被称作无取般涅槃。而且它「不与取相应」(na ca upādānasampayuttaṃ):既不是与取结合,也不是与取俱行。「也不取任何法」(na ca kañci dhammaṃ upādiyati):不以任何法为所缘而执取。「已般涅槃」(parinibbutaṃ):因为它发生于以最上道断除烦恼的般涅槃究竟终点。他们将无取般涅槃就指为不死界(amatadhātu)本身;而且,如同不死界没有任何缘一样,如此证得者也没有任何缘。为了显示这种意义上的“无因般涅槃”,所以说“此是内(ayaṃ anto)”等。为使无取般涅槃从自性上得到确立,他又开始提问。显示巴利原文
Appaccayaparinibbānanti anupādisesanibbānamāha. Idāni pakārantarenapi anupādāparinibbānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvedhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha gahaṇūpādānanti daḷhaggahaṇabhūtaṃ upādānaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘kāmupādānādika’’nti. Paccayūpādānanti yaṃ kiñci paccayamāha. So hi attano phalaṃ upādiyati upādānavasena gaṇhatīti upādānanti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘paccayūpādānaṃ nāma…pe… paccayā’’ti. ‘‘Anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti vacanato (mahāva. 28, 30) arahattaphalaṃ anupādāparinibbānanti kathenti. Na ca upādānasampayuttanti upādānehi etaṃ na sahitaṃ nāpi upādānehi saha pavatti hutvā. Na ca kañci dhammaṃ upādiyatīti kassaci dhammassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena na upādiyati . Parinibbutanteti aggamaggena kātabbakilesaparinibbānapariyosānante jātattā. Amatadhātumeva anupādāparinibbānaṃ kathenti, kathentānañca yathā tassa koci paccayo nāma natthi, evaṃ adhigatopi yathā koci paccayo nāma na hoti, tathā parinibbānaṃ apaccayaparinibbānanti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ anto’’tiādimāha. Puna pucchaṃ ārabhi anupādāparinibbānaṃ sarūpato patiṭṭhāpetukāmo.
258 258.「一切回转中」:指在一切问答的流转变化中,即「一切问句段落」的意思。「唯具有执取的法」:「执取」是说“这是我的”等而执取,与执取俱行,故说「具有执取」,意思是「可被执取的法」。由于没有完全依止于出离的人存在,他只会顺着轮回流转而行,因此称为「随转行」。所以才说「连四遍净戒的程度都没有」。然而,若有人安住于以出离为依止的四种戒中,那么他也有资格被称为「在这些法之外」的人。显示巴利原文
258.Sabbaparivattesūti sabbesu pañhaparivattanesu, pañhavāresūti attho. Sagahaṇadhammamevāti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā gaṇhatīti gahaṇaṃ, saha gahaṇenāti sagahaṇaṃ, upādāniyanti attho. Vivaṭṭasannissitassa abhāvato vaṭṭameva anugatoti vaṭṭānugato. Tenāha ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlamattassapi abhāvato’’ti. Yo pana catubbidhe vivaṭṭūpanissaye sīle ṭhito, sopi ‘‘aññatra imehi dhammehī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati.
《七车经》注释显示巴利原文
Sattarathavinītavaṇṇanā
259 259.这是一个从格词,如同在「乃至下阶之身」等句中的用法。「目的」即其用途。在此,心清净以戒清净为目的,因为戒清净正是心清净的旨归。戒清净的作用被称为「已完成」,正是因为能导向定;能导向定的戒清净,才名为「戒清净」。「于一切句中」:即在「心清净只是为了见清净」等一切句中,应如此理解:「安住于见清净者,心清净的作用即已完成」等。显示巴利原文
259.Nissakkavacanametaṃ ‘‘yāva heṭṭhimasopānakaḷevarā’’tiādīsu viya. Atthoti payojanaṃ. Cittavisuddhi hettha sīlavisuddhiṃ payojeti tassa tadatthattā. Sīlavisuddhikiccaṃ kataṃ nāma hoti samādhisaṃvattanato. Samādhisaṃvattanikā hi sīlavisuddhi nāma. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘cittavisuddhi yāvadeva diṭṭhivisuddhatthā’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu, diṭṭhivisuddhiyaṃ ṭhitassa cittavisuddhakiccaṃ kataṃ nāma hotītiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
如同舍卫城是有身城而必须超越,萨祇城是涅槃城而必须证达。犹如紧急事务生起的时刻,正是须在第九刹那证得的现观之事生起的时刻。正如国王乘第七辆车抵达萨祇城的内宫门下而下车时,他的事务尚未完成;待他被亲友眷属围绕,享用美味饮食之后,事务才算完成。同样,当瑜伽行者以知见清净断除烦恼,而在成就他们烦恼的止息与断除的圣果圆满时,现观之事才算完成。因此才说:「瑜伽行者的……时刻,应视为……」。这里,「五十种以上善法」指在一次心识生起中包含的触等五十余种无过法。「于灭之卧处」即是「于涅槃的安息处」。显示巴利原文
Sāvatthinagaraṃ viya sakkāyanagaraṃ atikkamitabbattā. Sāketanagaraṃ viya nibbānanagaraṃ pāpuṇitabbattā . Accāyikassa kiccassa uppādakālo viya navameneva khaṇena pattabbassa abhisamayakiccassa upādakālo. Yathā rañño sattamena rathavinītena sākete antepuradvāre oruḷhassa na tāva kiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti, saṃvidhātabbasaṃvidhānaṃ ñātimittagaṇaparivutassa surasabhojanaparibhoge niṭṭhitaṃ nāma siyā, evametaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhiyā kilese khepetvā tesaṃyeva paṭippassaddhipahānasādhakaariyaphalasamaṅgikāle abhisamayakiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yogino…pe… kālo daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Tattha paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā nāma cittuppādapariyāpannā phassādayo paropaṇṇāsa anavajjadhammā. Nirodhasayaneti nibbānasayane.
无论是“诸清净”还是“诸论事”,在意义上实为同一回事,差别只在于用词和音节。为了显示二者意义无别,才以“如此”一词开篇。说“尊者富楼那解答了十个论事”,是指他在解答七清净的同时,也就解答了十个论事,因为两者在意义上并无不同。由此应当了知,“法将舍利弗长老询问七清净,即是在询问十个论事”这一道理,其实本已蕴含其中。结尾的“问题”即指问句。所谓“知道什么而问”,是说“我以清净为切入点来问论事”,那么他是知道了什么才这样发问的呢?向这位通达十种论事的长老问清净时,他是在应问之处发问,如同善于选择渡口的人,在恰当的领域发问;还是如同想喝水却被断崖绝壁阻挡、不善择渡口的人,在不应问之处、不恰当的领域发问呢?——这是将前后文连接起来的解释。依此道理,在回答的层面也应当这样理解其含义。为了说明展开这番探究的用意,所以先说“成为善于选择渡口的人”等语。接着,为了显示即使在清净与论事意义相同的情况下,仍有这样一个差别应被了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Visuddhiyo’’ti vā ‘‘kathāvatthūnī’’ti vā atthato ekaṃ, byañjanameva nānanti tesaṃ atthato anaññabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itī’’ti āraddhaṃ. Āyasmā puṇṇo dasa kathāvatthūni vissajjesīti satta visuddhiyo nāma vissajjantopi dasa kathāvatthūni vissajjesi tesaṃ atthato anaññattā. Eteneva dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero satta visuddhiyo pucchanto dasa kathāvatthūni pucchīti ayampi attho vuttovāti veditabbo. Nti pañhaṃ. Kiṃ jānitvā pucchīti visuddhipariyāyena kathāvatthūni pucchāmīti kiṃ jānitvā pucchi. Dasakathāvatthulābhinaṃ theraṃ visuddhiyo pucchanto pucchitaṭṭhāneyeva pucchanena kiṃ titthakusalo vā pana hutvā visayasmiṃ pucchi, udāhu pānīyatthikamatitthehi chinnataṭehi pātento viya atitthakusalo hutvā apucchitabbaṭṭhāne avisayasmiṃ pucchīti yojanā. Iminā nayena vissajjanapakkhepi atthayojanā veditabbā. Yadatthamassa vicāraṇā āraddhā, taṃ dassentena ‘‘titthakusalo hutvā’’tiādiṃ vatvā visuddhikathāvatthūnaṃ atthato anaññattepi ayaṃ viseso veditabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tadamināti yaṃ ‘‘saṃkhittaṃ, vitthiṇṇa’’nti ca vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā idāni vuccamānena nayena vidhinā veditabbaṃ.
“一种戒清净”:在诸清净中,戒清净是单独的一项。在十种论事中,有四种论事归属于戒清净,因为若不具备少欲等品德,戒清净便不可能成立。在“少欲论”等中,是以论题为纲目统摄十种论事。又或者,由于应当被讲说,“事”故称为“论事”。而且,从助益的角度,或从本质的角度,应当了知这四种论事归属于戒清净。三种论事归属于心清净,道理也是如此。“五种清净”:名色分别智是见清净,见到有因缘的名色是度疑清净,舍弃观的随烦恼后所生起的观智是道非道如实知见清净,从生灭智等九种智是行道如实知见清净,圣道智是如实知见清净——这就是五种清净。显示巴利原文
Ekā sīlavisuddhīti visuddhīsu visuṃ ekā sīlavisuddhi. Dasasu kathāvatthūsu cattāri kathāvatthūni hutvā āgatā appicchatādīhi vinā sīlavisuddhiyā asambhavato. Appicchakathātiādīsu kathāsīsena dasakathāvatthu gahitaṃ. Kathetabbattā vā vatthu kathāvatthūti vuttaṃ. Evañca upakārato, sabhāvato vā catunnaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ sīlavisuddhisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tiṇṇaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ cittavisuddhisaṅgahepi eseva nayo. Pañca visuddhiyoti nāmarūpaparicchedo diṭṭhivisuddhi, sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi, vipassanupakkilese pahāya uppannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, udayabbayañāṇādi navavidhañāṇaṃ paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi, ariyamaggañāṇaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti imā pañca visuddhiyo.
260 “已欢喜”:是为紧接着将被宣说的内容而欢喜。“以非处的计度”:是用不成立的根据事由去推想,即把当时不可能存在的义理构想出来后,再用言语道出。“属常相见者”:是指恒常得见的人,意思即是决定见者。显示巴利原文
260.Sammoditunti anantaraṃ vuccamānena sammodituṃ. Aṭṭhānaparikappenāti akāraṇassa vatthuno parikappanena tadā asambhavantaṃ atthaṃ parikappetvā vacanena. Abhiṇhadassanassāti niccadassanassa, niyatadassanassāti attho.
“他抬高”:是指因其功德被如此宣说,故而称扬。“长老的”:指具寿富楼那长老。在此处、此因缘下,仅此一词,便成为在声闻境界中彰显其不与他人共的功德之相。接下来,为了进一步阐明此义,才说出“因为大臣们……”等语。“示恭敬”:即表达尊重与礼敬。显示巴利原文
Ukkhipīti guṇato kathitabhāvena ukkaṃseti. Therassāti āyasmato puṇṇattherassa. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne imasmiṃ kāraṇe ekapadeneva sāvakavisaye anaññasādhāraṇaguṇāvikaraṇanimittaṃ. Idāni tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘amaccañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apacāyamānoti pūjayanto.
因为经中说“随逐一探询、探询而问”,所以以审察的方式问道:“是提出问题难,还是回答问题难呢?” “使其成为有因”:即辨明合理与不合理之处。“有缘由”:是它的同义词。“提问也是”:像这样,依据正法,自己去领会应当问的意义之后,即便是提问,也是沉重而难以做到的。“回答也是”:依照正法来回答,也是难以做到的。因为如此回答,才能令智者的心感到满意。开示就这样随顺着相应的逻辑理路而圆满结束:因为开示之初,先显示了具备资具的戒;中间显示了定;最后则显示了达到自在境界的慧,因此开示得以圆满完成。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anumassa anumassa pucchitā’’ti vuttattā vicāraṇavasenāha ‘‘kiṃ pana pañhassa pucchanaṃ bhāriyaṃ udāhu vissajjana’’nti. Sahetukaṃ katvāti yuttāyuttaṃ katvā. Sakāraṇanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pucchanampīti evaṃ sahadhammena pucchitabbamatthaṃ sayaṃ sampādetvā pucchanampi bhāriyaṃ dukkaraṃ. Vissajjanampīti sahadhammena vissajjanampi dukkaraṃ. Evañhi vissajjento viññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādhetīti. Yathānusandhināva desanā niṭṭhitāādito saparikkhāraṃ sīlaṃ, majjhe samādhiṃ, ante vasībhāvappattaṃ paññaṃ dassetvā desanāya niṭṭhāpitattāti.
五、《诱饵经》的注疏显示巴利原文
5. Nivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
261 “被撒下”:就是诱饵;以诱饵为生计,或以诱饵为食物的,就是设饵者,即用诱饵引诱鹿群然后将其捕获的捕鹿人。“草籽等”:指用作诱饵的草籽。“播种处”:如同谷物,因应当被播种的意义,故称播种处。他们心想:“像我们这样,其他还有谁能得到这样的(好东西)呢?” ——由此便生起了骄慢。“放逸失念的状态”:是指那种没有猜疑、没有忧惧的状态。因为畜生们在同类的强壮者所居之处,往往是有所警惕、心怀恐惧而不放逸的,尤其是在有捕鹿人等人类活动的地方。然而,一旦被味爱所系缚,它们就会陷入放逸。“此处被撒下”:指诱饵,放置诱饵的地方就是诱饵场。因此,经文才说“在诱饵场”。为了进一步阐明“可以为所欲为”这句话的含义,才讲述了“传说有某一处”等故事。其中,“犹如野粳米林”……显示巴利原文
261. Nivappatīti nivāpo, nivāpaṃ vatteti, nivāpabhojanaṃ vā etassāti nevāpiko, nivāpena mige palobhetvā gaṇhanakamāgaviko. Tiṇabījānīti nivāpatiṇabījāni. Vappanti sassaṃ viya vapitabbaṭṭhena vappaṃ. ‘‘Mayaṃ viya aññe ke īdisaṃ labhissantī’’ti mānamadaṃ āpajjissanti. Vissaṭṭhasatibhāvanti anussaṅkitaparisaṅkitabhāvaṃ. Tiracchānā hi vijātiyabalavatiracchānavasanaṭṭhānesu sāsaṅkā ubbiggahadayā appamattā honti visesato māgavikādimanussūpacāre, rasataṇhāya pana baddhā pamādaṃ āpajjassanti. Nivapati etthāti nivāpo, nivāpabhūmi nivāpaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivāpaṭṭhāne’’ti. ‘‘Yathākāmakaraṇīyā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ekaṃ kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nīvāravanaṃ viyāti nīvārassa samūho viya. Nīvāro nāma araññe sayaṃjātavīhijāti. Meghamālā viyāti meghaghaṭā viya. Ekagghananti ekajjhaṃ viya aviraṭṭhaṃ. Pakkamantīti āsaṅkaparisaṅkā hutvā pakkamanti. Kaṇṇe cālayamānāti anāsaṅkantānaṃ pahaṭṭhākāradassanaṃ. Maṇḍalagumbanti maṇḍalakākārena ṭhitaṃ gumbaṃ.
262 「计度之后」(kappetvā):指以譬喻来构想之后。让鹿能随自己的意愿活动,这就是自在。由于这自在有成就的含义,故称为神变;由于有光耀的含义,故称为威力。显示巴利原文
262.Kappetvāti upamābhāvena parikappetvā. Mige attano vase vattāpanaṃ vasībhāvo. So eva ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, pabhāvanaṭṭhena ānubhāvo.
263 「因恐惧而受用」:指出于恐惧,也就是带着恐惧而受用诱饵。「强力精进」:指身体的力量以及策励的精进力。不过在注疏中,力即是精进。而“力”是指身体的力量,从本质上说,它是由作意与心路推动、令气息前后往来的风,故称为“前后往来移动的风界”。显示巴利原文
263.Bhayena bhogatoti bhayena saha sabhayaṃ nivāpaparibhogato. Balavīriyanti kāyabalañca uṭṭhānavīriyañca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana balameva vīriyaṃ. Balanti ca sarīrabalaṃ, tañca atthato manasikāramaggehi aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakavātoti vuttaṃ ‘‘aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇavāyodhātū’’ti.
264 「有学诡诈者」:指惯于诳惑者,即骗子。「如同具神通者」:指如同有威神力之人。「他众人」:指被众人所超越者,即大人物。故称为「诸夜叉」。「四周有地方」:指四周皆有区域,是拥有广大空间的居所。因其有区域,空间广大,故说为「广大空间」。显示巴利原文
264.Sikkhitakerāṭikāti paricitasāṭheyyā, vañcakāti attho. Iddhimanto viya ānubhāvavanto viya. Pacurajanehi parabhūtā jātāti parajanā, mahābhūtā. Tenāha ‘‘yakkhā’’ti. Samantā sappadesanti samantato padesavantaṃ vipulokāsasannivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassa pana sappadesatā mahāokāsatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahantaṃ okāsa’’nti.
265 “他们将撞击”:(ghaṭṭessanti) 意指“由怖畏等起”,通过施予想的方式,令心思考、令其恐惧。“他们将遍舍”:意指他们将出离、舍弃。“老年”:指生来已老,即衰老。“衰弱”:指因病或因先天而缺乏力量。显示巴利原文
265.Ghaṭṭessantīti ‘‘sabhayasamuṭṭhāna’’nti saññādānavasena cittaṃ cetessanti, tāsessantīti attho. Pariccajissantīti nibbisissanti. Mahallakoti jātiyā mahallako jiṇṇo. Dubbaloti byādhivasena, pakatiyā vā balavirahito.
267 “诱饵”:因其与诱饵相似,故称为诱饵;又或因它属于世间,且会被烦恼所触及,故称为“世间诱饵”;又或因它在轮回中本身即是诱饵,故称为“轮回诱饵”。“令其随己意转”:他凭借五欲功德,对那些贪著五欲功德的众生,依其贪著本身,使众生受自己掌控。因此说:显示巴利原文
267. Nivāpasadisatāya nivāpoti vā. Lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbatāya lokāmisānīti vā. Vaṭṭe āmisabhūtattā vaṭṭāmisabhūtānaṃ. Vasaṃ vattetīti kāmaguṇehi kāmaguṇe giddhe satte tasseva gedhassa vasena attano vase vattetīti. Tenāha –
“行于虚空的索套,此套以意而行,”
“我将以此系缚你,沙门,你休想脱身。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso; Tena taṃ bādhayissāmi, na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33);
“此”指第一群鹿的譬喻。这是针对那些林居者虽然出家,心中仍忆念着他人供养等事,从而离开妻儿的情形,而说“携妻带子的出家”。显示巴利原文
Ayanti paṭhamamigajātūpamā. Vānapatthassa satova papañcaparadattikādisaputtadāranikkhamanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saputtabhariyapabbajjāyā’’ti.
268 此处所说的“心解脱”,特指从欲贪中解脱的心解脱,因此说“所谓心解脱……乃至……生起的意乐”。那些舍弃了欲乐之后,又重陷其中的第二类沙门、婆罗门,被喻为第二群鹿。显示巴利原文
268. Kāmato cittassa vimutti idha cetovimuttīti adhippetāti āha ‘‘cetovimutti nāma…pe… uppannaajjhāsayo’’ti. Kāme vissajjetvā puna tattha nimuggatāya dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇā dutiyamigajātūpamā vuttā.
269 针对第三类沙门婆罗门,他以这样的意趣问道:“他们又做了什么?”——意思是,他们如同已舍诸欲一般,在舍离诸欲之后便安住于那种状态,不像第二类那样再度沉溺其中。为了指出另一类虽未直接沉溺于五欲,却以迂回的方式沉溺,且被见网所笼罩,故说“村庄、市镇、地方、王都”等。又为了说明见的罗网是随着渴爱的罗网而来的,所以说“被魔波旬的见网包围后”。显示巴利原文
269. Tatiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇā yathāpariccatte kāme pariccajitvā evaṃ ṭhitā, na dutiyā viya tattha nimuggāti adhippāyena ‘‘kiṃ pana te akaṃsū’’ti pucchati. Itare kāmaṃ ujukaṃ kāmaguṇesu na nimuggā, pariyāyena pana nimuggā diṭṭhijālena ca ajjhotthaṭāti dassento ‘‘gāmanigamajanapadarājadhāniyo’’tiādimāha. Diṭṭhijālampi taṇhājālānugatamevāti āha ‘‘mārassa pāpimato diṭṭhijālena parikkhipitvā’’ti.
271 「蕴、烦恼、行作之魔」:此处应理解为,“魔”这个词含摄了这些魔。「盲其眼目」:即令魔无法看见。因此他才会说「以观为近因的禅那」等。虽然魔并不知晓任何比丘的心——即使是已入禅那的比丘——是依于何种所缘而转的,但在此处,是针对所要说的这位比丘而说「以观为近因的禅那」。正是基于这个道理,才说「未盲魔罗之眼」等,也就是如前所述的方式。「归于不见」:此处同样随顺这一理趣。而这里所说的「眼所立之处」,是指所缘,因为心执取彼所缘才流转,所以他说「无所立、无所缘」。「彼」即指魔罗。「见已」:因为见到了。由于透过圣道而现观四圣谛,所以说诸漏尚未穷尽。实际上,诸漏是在证果的那个刹那才称为尽的。显示巴利原文
271. Khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāramārā vā idha māraggahaṇena gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akkhīni bhindi daṭṭhuṃ asamatthabhāvāpādanena. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpādakajjhāna’’ntiādi. Kiñcāpi māro yaṃ kiñci jhānaṃ samāpannassapi bhikkhuno cittaṃ imaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya vattatīti na jānāti, idhādhippetassa pana bhikkhuno vasena ‘‘vipassanāpādakajjhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Teneva pariyāyenāti ‘‘na mārassa akkhīni bhindī’’ti evamādinā yathāvuttapariyāyena. Adassanaṃ gatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Cakkhussa padaṃ patiṭṭhāti ca idha ārammaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ taṃ pariggayha pavattanatoti āha ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ nirārammaṇa’’nti. Soti māro. Disvāti dassanahetu. Yasmā maggena catusaccadassanahetu āsavā na parikkhīṇā. Phalakkhaṇe hi te khīṇāti vuccantīti.
这里的「世间」,指的是有情世间和行世间。「以执著、系著的状态」:就是以黏着的状态,以及用特别的方式紧紧执取的状态。「或者」等等:这是以解说的方式来解释「爱」这个词的。「遍布」:就是广泛地散布,即在色等三界诸法中以遍满的方式散布。这只是将前面那个词里的字母“t”改成“ṭ”而说出的。「广大」:就是宽广。「能忍」:就是指能到处周旋、能够忍受。因为一个生起贪染的人,即使被贪爱的对象用脚踢,他也能忍受。也有一些人,说它表示“退缩”或“悸动”。「散乱其心」:就是借着显示种种欲乐中的这样那样的功德,以各种方式把心从趋向出离的运转中拉散、收束起来;或者也可以这样解释:「毒」是指苦,它把苦带来、引导给它,所以称为散乱其心者。「欺诳」:因为它让人把无常等执取为常等,所以它是欺诳者。「毒根」:因为它能成为那产生苦的业的因,所以称为毒根;或者,毒(也就是苦)就是苦苦等感受,这些受是它的根本,因此称为毒根。「毒果」:因为它是苦的集起,所以苦就是它的果,因此称为毒果。「毒受用」:对渴爱来说,它所执取的色等对象,纯粹是对于苦的受用,而不是对于不死的受用,所以说它是「毒受用」。在所有这些解释中,我们应当知道,都是依靠词源学来成就这些词的含义的。不过,在这里为了显示其中最主要的含义,他又说了「或者,广大的」等等。「已度、超出」:这是通过加上前缀来扩充单词的含义。或者说,毫无剩余地全部度过了,就是「已度」;通过一道道圣道向上完全超脱了,就是「超出」。至于这里在义理上没有加以分析的部分,就很容易理解了。显示巴利原文
Loketi sattaloke saṅkhāraloke ca. Sattavisattabhāvenāti laggabhāvena ceva savisesaṃ āsattabhāvena ca. Atha vātiādinā niddesanayavasena (mahāni. 3, cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22, 23; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 124) visattikāpadaṃ niddisati. Visatāti vitthaṭā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu byāpanavasena visaṭāti purimavacanameva takārassa ṭakāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati sahati. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāliyamānopi sahati. Osakkanaṃ, vipphandanaṃ vā visakkanantipi vadanti. Visaṃharatīti yathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ dassentī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṅkhipati, visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati upanetīti attho. Visaṃvādikāti aniccādiṃ niccādito gaṇhāpentī visaṃvādikā hoti. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhadukkhādibhūtā vedanā mūlaṃ etissāti visamūlā. Dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Taṇhāya rūpādikassa dukkhasseva paribhogo hoti, na amatassāti sā ‘‘visaparibhogā’’ti vuttā. Sabbattha niruttivasena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘visālā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nittiṇṇo uttiṇṇoti upasaggavasena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Niravasesato vā tiṇṇo nittiṇṇo. Tena tena maggena uddhamuddhaṃ tiṇṇo uttiṇṇo. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
第六、《火聚经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Pāsarāsisuttavaṇṇanā
272 “Sādhumayan”一语:此处“善哉”一词表请求,并非如“Sādhāvuso”等(《相应部》1.246;《经集》182)那样表示随喜赞叹等义,因此注释者说这是“请求”之义。正因如此,经典中才会有“愿我们得到”等语。为何他们不能直接前往?因为诸佛极为尊贵,是至极尊贵、最胜恭敬之处,不能随意亲近。所以注释者才说“独行的狮子”等。显示巴利原文
272.Sādhumayanti ettha sādhu-saddo āyācanattho, na ‘‘sādhāvuso’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 182) viya abhinandanādiatthoti āha ‘‘āyācantā’’ti. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘labheyyāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na sakkonti, kasmā? Buddhā hi garū honti, paramagarū uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānaṃ, na yathā tathā upasaṅkamanīyā. Tenāha ‘‘ekacāriko sīho’’tiādi.
为了详细说明那句简略提到的“明显的行为”,注释者才说了“凡是……”等语。世尊是否一切时都是这样做的?并非一切时都如此。为了指出他何时这样做,才说“世尊在初成正觉时”等。“人身”一词,此处特指其男性生命形态。意思是,世尊住世期间,并不存在所谓舍弃财富这回事。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pākaṭakiriyāyā’’ti saṅkhepena vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhagavā sabbakālaṃ kimevamakāsīti? Na sabbakālamevamakāsi. Yadā pana akāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā paṭhamabodhiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Manussattabhāveti iminā purisattabhāvaṃ ulliṅgeti. Dhanapariccāgo kato nāma natthi bhagavato dharamānakāleti adhippāyo.
“枯萎的花环与垃圾”:指枯萎的花环和尘垢。由于世尊皮肤极为清净光洁,尘垢不会沾染到他身上。正如所说:“因皮肤极为微细,故尘垢不附着于身。”既然如此,世尊为何还要沐浴?注释者回答:“为了摄取热量。”显示巴利原文
Mālākacavaranti milātamālākacavaraṃ. Rajojallaṃ na upalimpati acchatarachavibhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘sukhumattā chaviyā kāye rajojallaṃ na limpatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā bhagavā nahāyatīti āha ‘‘utuggahaṇattha’’nti.
此处「寺院」指祇园精舍。据称,二十肘为牛呼距离的四分之一。经中的「有时」,是指在某一位佛陀出现世间之时。所谓「不摇动」,即是不转变、不变成别的状态;而床座的大小与床脚安立之处,则确有增减。显示巴利原文
Vihāroti jetavanavihāro. Vīsatiusabhaṃ gāvutassa catuttho bhāgoti vadanti. Kadācīti kasmiñci buddhuppāde. Acalamevāti aparivattameva anaññabhāvato, mañcānaṃ pana appamahantatāhi pādānaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānassa hānivaḍḍhiyo hontiyeva.
“Yantanāḷikāhi paripuṇṇasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi”:指从那些管道流出的、充满金色液体的水流。“Nhānavattanti”:意为沐浴的行仪,说明“出家者应这样沐浴”,以此显示沐浴的规范。由于世尊的身体色泽犹如锤炼过的黄金,手足和指甲如极清净的珊瑚般美丽润泽,头发与体毛如同极纯净的蓝宝石珠串,因此世尊的身体各处闪耀着宛如天然朱砂的光彩,上方又覆盖着珍贵的宝石珠串,犹如一座移动的金山山顶般璀璨夺目。那时,十力世尊的身体放出六色光芒,向四面八方流布放射,遍满周围八十肘的范围。这景象犹如散布的金刚宝串、宝石花环与宝石粉末,又如铺开的黄金宝石画幅,如倾泻而下的熔融紫胶流,如上百火炬同时坠落、光焰交相辉映,又如不断撒落的翅子树花与金色花花朵,如被风扬起的朱砂粉末所染,如彩虹与闪电之网所覆盖,遍满了整个虚空、那场所和那片树林。因此,经文称此为‘颜色的地’(vaṇṇabhūmi nāmesā)等。「义」:指所譬喻的对象。「譬喻」:即‘并且是这样的’等与之相应的比喻。「原」显示巴利原文
Yantanāḷikāhi paripuṇṇasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi. Nhānavattanti ‘‘pabbajitena nāma evaṃ nhāyitabba’’nti nahānacārittaṃ dassetvā. Yasmā bhagavato sarīraṃ sudhantacāmīkarasamānavaṇṇaṃ suparisodhitapavāḷarucirakaracaraṇāvaraṃ suvisuddhanīlaratanāvaḷisadisakesatanuruhaṃ, tasmā tahaṃ tahaṃ vinissatajātihiṅgulakarasūpasobhitaṃ upari mahaggharatanāvaḷisañchāditaṃ jaṅgamamiva kanakagirisikharaṃ virocittha. Tasmiñca samaye dasabalassa sarīrato nikkhamitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo samantato asītihatthappamāṇe padese ādhāvantī vidhāvantī ratanāvaḷiratanadāma-ratanacuṇṇa-vippakiṇṇaṃ viya, pasāritaratanacittakañcanapaṭṭamiva, āsiñcamānalākhārasadhārā-citamiva , ukkāsatanipātasamākulamiva, nirantaraṃ vippakiṇṇa-kaṇikāra-kiṅkiṇika-pupphamiva, vāyuvegasamuddhata-cinapiṭṭhacuṇṇa-rañjitamiva, indadhanu-vijjulatā-vitānasanthatamiva, gaganatalaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ pavanañca sammā pharanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇabhūmi nāmesā’’tiādi. Atthanti upameyyatthaṃ. Upamāyoti ‘‘īdiso ca hotī’’ti yathārahaṃ tadanucchavikā upamā. Kāraṇānīti upamupameyyasambandhavibhāvanāni kāraṇāni. Pūretvāti vaṇṇanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā. Thāmo veditabbo ‘‘atitthe pakkhando’’ti avattabbattā.
273 「Kaṇṇikā」:指身体上形成的细小圆状斑点。「资具」:指郁多罗僧与僧伽梨。那么,这种方式是否也适用于诸佛的身体呢?并非如此。为了表明这只是为了显示威仪而作,所以说‘然而诸佛’等。「行进引导」(gamanābhihāro):指以行进的方式引导身体。「意图发动」(adhippāyakopanaṃ):指随顺内心意愿而转动。显示巴利原文
273.Kaṇṇikāti sarīragatabindukatāni maṇḍalāni. Parikkhārabhaṇḍanti uttarāsaṅgaṃ saṅghāṭiñca sandhāya vadati. Kiṃ panāyaṃ nayo buddhānampi sarīre hotīti? Na hoti, vattadassanatthaṃ panetaṃ katanti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhānaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gamanavasena kāyassābhinīharaṇaṃ gamanābhihāro. Yathādhippāyāvattanaṃ adhippāyakopanaṃ.
「以某一种波罗蜜」:即出离巴拉密;另一些则说是精进巴拉密。「大出离」:指在最后一生中的伟大出离。因为舍弃了庞大的财富聚集、广大的亲族圈以及转轮王的辉煌荣华,为了含摄天与魔的世间,为了不可计量、无与伦比的广大利益、福祉与安乐,且因其庄严,故称为伟大的出离。显示巴利原文
Aññatarāya pāramiyāti nekkhammapāramiyā. Vīriyapāramiyāti apare. Mahābhinikkhamanassāti mahantassa carimabhave abhinikkhamanassa. Tañhi mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ mahantañca ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca cakkavattisiriṃ pajahitvā sadevakassa lokassa samārakassa ca acinteyyāparimeyyabhedassa mahato atthāya hitāya sukhāya pavattattā mahanīyatāya ca mahantaṃ abhinikkhamananti vuccati.
「前文」(purimoti):指「你们正专注于什么话题呢?」这句话所说的意思。「Kā ca pana vo」中的「ca」字表示差异,由此显示所问的话题将被搁置、中断。「pana」字只是语词上的庄严。比丘们原本所专注的那个话题,也就是「间中话题」(antarākathā),被搁置一旁,而后又特别提出来重新询问。「Aññā」:这是解释「antarā」一词有「其他」的意思。因为「antarā」一词在其他地方,如「地间」「时间之间」等句中,就有「其他」的意思;或者「antarā」是「在中间」的意思。基于十种论事的谈话:指「什么是戒?应如何圆满?戒的染污和清净是什么?」等,基于少欲等、基于戒等的谈话。「圣」(ariya):无过失;或因被希求义利之人所应行,故称为「圣」;或因属于圣者所有,故称为「圣」。他们通过修习与作意的力量而默然,并非像某些外道出家人那样受持禁语戒。第二禅那亦是「圣默然」,因为舍离了语行。「根本业处」:即护持的业处。「禅那」:这里指第显示巴利原文
Purimoti ‘‘katamāya nu kathāya sannisinnā bhavathā’’ti evaṃ vuttaattho. Kā ca pana voti ettha ca-saddo byatireke. Tena yathāpucchitāya kathāya vakkhamānaṃ vippakatabhāvaṃ joteti. Pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāre. Yāya hi kathāya te bhikkhū sannisinnā, sā eva antarākathābhūtā vippakatā visesena puna pucchīyati. Aññāti antarā-saddassa atthamāha. Aññattho hi ayaṃ antarā-saddo ‘‘bhūmantaraṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) samayantara’’ntiādīsu viya, antarāti vā vemajjheti attho. Dasakathāvatthunissitāti ‘‘kiṃ sīlaṃ nāma, kathañca pūretabbaṃ, kāni cassa saṃkilesavodānānī’’tiādinā appicchādinissitā sīlādinissitā ca kathā. Ariyoti niddoso. Atha vā atthakāmehi araṇīyoti ariyo, ariyānaṃ ayanti vā ariyoti. Bhāvanāmanasikāravasena tuṇhī bhavanti, na ekaccabāhirakapabbajitā viya mūgabbatasamādānena. Dutiyajjhānampi ariyo tuṇhībhāvo vacīsaṅkhārapahānato. Mūlakammaṭṭhānanti pārihāriya kammaṭṭhānampi. Jhānanti dutiyajjhānaṃ.
274 经文「比丘们,你们聚集在一起的两者」是依事件因缘而展开的说法。为了显示它与后面教法的关联,而问:「比丘们,有两种遍求──这有什么关联?」「你们的遍求」:指与大出离相关联的法谈,那是你们的法遍求、法审察,称为圣求。「邪道」:指导致不利的道路。「打破开示的顺序」:指跳过了说法的次第。「法」这个词:如在「不虚妄法、涅槃」等句中,是本性、同义语。「生起的自性」:即生起的本性;于其余诸词,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
274. ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvaya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.273; udā. 12, 28, 29) aṭṭhuppattivasena desanā pavattāti tassā uparidesanāya sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanāti ko anusandhī’’ti anusandhiṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ tumhākaṃ pariyesanāti yā mahābhinikkhamanapaṭibaddhā dhammī kathā, sā tumhākaṃ dhammapariyesanā dhammavicāraṇā ariyapariyesanā nāma. Apāyamagganti anatthāvahaṃ maggaṃ. Uddesānukkamaṃ bhinditvāti uddesānupubbiṃ laṅghitvā. Dhamma-saddo ‘‘amosadhammaṃ nibbāna’’ntiādīsu viya pakatipariyāyo. Jāyanasabhāvoti jāyanapakatikoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
「在一切处」:如同‘子、妻’等并列复合词,皆视为一体;此理亦适用于一切处,如‘奴、婢’等所有词语。‘黄金’:指不生任何异变、恒常保持纯一形态之物,即金子。‘银’:因具白色之本性而令人喜爱,故称为银。此处,除黄金之外,所有可供受用、享用的银等物品,皆归入银这一类。‘依处’:苦依止于此,故称依处。‘死殁’指在一个生命期间里,五蕴灭尽的那种死亡;而刹那灭,则是刹那刹那地灭去。所以说‘就像众生一样’。‘会染污’:如同毒汁会染污自身。因此世尊说:‘比丘们,这五种是黄金的染污,如铁等。’(《增支部》5.23)‘取垢’:由于与那些东西结合而变得污秽,以那些促成污秽的事物为缘,而执取垢秽。应这样结合理解:‘由衰变的缘故,在衰变法一节中执取了黄金。’那些在生法一节中不把黄金当作执取的人,就如同在其余(衰变法一节)中,透过执取依处,同样地连尚未显现的(依处)也一并执取了,应如此看待。再者,若从被执持的事物而言,虽然不明显,亦可依于生、老、死来结合。此处以黄金为首。显示巴利原文
Sabbatthāti yathā ‘‘puttabhariya’’nti dvandasamāsavasena ekattaṃ, esa nayo sabbattha ‘‘dāsidāsa’’ntiādīsu sabbapadesu. Parato vikāraṃ anāpajjitvā sabbadā jātarūpameva hotīti jātarūpaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ. Dhavalasabhāvatāya rañjīyatīti rajataṃ, rūpiyaṃ. Idha pana suvaṇṇaṃ ṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñci upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ rajataṃteva gahitaṃ. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhayo. Cutīsaṅkhātaṃ maraṇanti ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ maraṇamāha. Khaṇikanirodho pana khaṇe khaṇe. Tenāha ‘‘sattānaṃ viyā’’ti. Saṃkilissatīti dūsavisena viya attānaṃ dūsissati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, jātarūpassa upakkilesā ayo loha’’ntiādi (a. ni. 5.23). Malaṃ gahetvāti yehi sahayogato malinaṃ hoti, tesaṃ malinabhāvapaccayānaṃ vasena malaṃ gahetvā. Jīraṇato jarādhammavāre jātarūpaṃ gahitanti yojanā. Ye pana jātidhammavārepi jātarūpaṃ na paṭhanti, tesaṃ itaresaṃ viya jīraṇadhammavāre sarūpato anāgatampi upadhiggahaṇena gahitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariggahe ṭhitānaṃ pana vasena vuccamāne apākaṭānampi jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ vasena yojanā labbhateva. Jātarūpasīsena cettha sabbassapi anindriyabaddhassa gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, puttabhariyādiggahaṇena viya mittāmaccādiggahaṇaṃ.
275 ‘圣遍求’(ariyapariyesanā)有两种复合词解释:由圣者所行的遍求,或是圣者们的遍求。正如‘比丘们,此是……’等所示。显示巴利原文
275. Ariyehi pariyesanā, ariyānaṃ pariyesanāti vā ariyapariyesanāti samāsadvayaṃ dasseti ‘‘ayaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādinā.
276 「从根本开始」:即从看清大出离的根本——也就是它的过患——开始。因为那些比丘当时正聚集在一起讨论大出离的话题,而此话题又是他们中断未竟的,所以世尊便从根本开始,为他们开演大出离的故事。「我也曾经」这句特别的话:是指世尊在最后一生中,由于智慧尚未成熟,曾在三座宫殿里享受三种伎乐眷属,那成就如同天界的成就;出家之后,又通过精进苦行而使身体疲累。在「追求非圣求」一句中,也是同样的道理。「五群比丘也」:他们各自原本沉迷于在家的快乐,舍弃一切而出家后,又执着于苦行。当老师开演《转法轮经》的教导时,他们也舍弃了那种苦行,转而追求圣求。显示巴利原文
276.Mūlato paṭṭhāyāti yaṃ mahābhinikkhamanassa mūlabhāvesuādīnavadassanaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya. Yasmā te bhikkhū tattha mahābhinikkhamanakathāya sannisinnā, sā ca nesaṃ antarākathā vippakatā, tasmā bhagavā tesaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya mahābhinikkhamanakathaṃ kathetuṃ ārabhi. Ahampi pubbeti visesavacanaṃ aparipakkañāṇena sayaṃ carimabhave tīsu pāsādesu tividhanāṭakaparivārassa dibbasampattisadisāya mahāsampattiyā anubhavanaṃ, abhinikkhamitvā padhānapadahanavasena attakilamathānuyogañca sandhāyāha. Anariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesinti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañcavaggiyāpīti yathāsakaṃ gihibhogaṃ anuyuttā taṃ pahāya pabbajitvā attakilamathānuyoge ṭhitā satthu dhammacakkapavattanadesanāya (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) tampi pahāya ariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesiṃsūti.
277 “年轻”一词,在“年幼、幼稚、仰卧的童子”这段文句中是指愚童;但后文将说“具足妙青年期”,所以此处的“年轻”指的是青年位,因此称“仅为青年”。因为当时是初龄,即二十九岁。从出生直到三十三岁都属于初龄。表达轻蔑的意义时用属格,例如“提婆达多哭着出家”。虽然泣就是哭,说“泣面者”已经表明了,但说了那个之后,“哭着”这个词更凸显出因强烈悲痛而号泣的情形,所以称为“哀泣而哭者”。“何为善”:是探寻,即如何完全无过失、唯一导向出离地去寻求。“最胜句”:因为希求解脱轮回苦的人绝对应当选取,所以称为“最胜”;因为应当证得,所以称为“句”。由于身材高长而称为“长”,由于黄褐色眼睛而称为“黄褐”,因而合称“长黄褐”。“法”指律,“随宜”指义。“听已即执取”:即仅仅听闻他所说,便执取,使我完全通晓其言语。显示巴利原文
277. Kāmaṃ dahara-saddo ‘‘daharaṃ kumāraṃ mandaṃ uttānaseyyaka’’nti (ma. ni. 1.496) ettha bāladārake āgato, ‘‘bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato’’ti pana vakkhamānattā yuvāvatthā idha dahara-saddena vuttāti āha ‘‘taruṇova samāno’’ti. Paṭhamavayena ekūnatiṃsavayattā. Jātiyā hi yāva tettiṃsavayā paṭhamavayo. Anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa rudantassa pabbajī’’ti. Kāmaṃ assumuccanaṃ rodanaṃ, taṃ assumukhānanti iminā pakāsitaṃ, taṃ pana vatvā ‘‘rudantāna’’nti vacanaṃ balavasokasamuṭṭhānaṃ ārodanavatthuṃ pakāsetīti āha ‘‘kanditvā rodamānāna’’nti. Kiṃ kusalanti gavesamānoti kinti sabbaso avajjarahitaṃ ekanta niyyānikaṃ pariyesamāno. Varapadanti vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi ekantena varaṇīyaṭṭhena varaṃ, pajjitabbaṭṭhena padaṃ. Tuṅgasarīratāya dīgho, piṅgalacakkhutāya piṅgaloti dīghapiṅgalo. Dhammoti vinayo, samayoti attho. Sutvāva uggaṇhinti tena vuccamānassa savanamatteneva uggaṇhiṃ vācuggataṃ akāsiṃ.
“只凭复述”是指仅仅依靠反复言语。“他知”故称为智,说智即是“智说”,此处即指那智说。由于经中用了“我说”,注释中便以第一人称解释为“我知”。“还有许多他人”:即还有许多其他人知晓我的这种状况,而说“此人知此法”,或者说“因为不动摇,所以是坚固的”。“得者”:指出他如此认识——“此人通过说法和大智慧,是在宣示自己走过的路,并非道听途说而来。”这里的“他”指菩萨。他这样想:心中生起“不,阿拉罗·迦蓝……”等念头,正在思惟着。显示巴利原文
Paṭilapanamattakenāti puna lapanamattakena. Jānātīti ñāṇo, ñāṇoti vādo ñāṇavādo, taṃ ñāṇavādaṃ. ‘‘Vadāmī’’ti āgatattā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘jānāmī’’ti uttamapurisavasena attho vutto. Aññepi bahūti aññepi bahū mama tathābhāvaṃ jānantā ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ jānātī’’ti, ‘‘akampanīyatāya thiro’’ti vā evaṃ vadanti. Lābhīti aññāsīti dhammassa uddisanena mahāpaññatāya ‘‘ayaṃ attanā gatamaggaṃ pavedeti, na anussutiko’’ti aññāsi. Assāti bodhisattassa. Etadahosīti etaṃ ‘‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo’’tiādi manasi ahosi, cintesīti attho.
由于不成就下等至就不可能成就上等至,所以他陈述“他使我通晓了七种等至”。“应努力”意思是应专精修习。“如是说”:即这样说道“朋友啊,我……”等,意指他亲自证知了七种等至。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhimasamāpattīhi vinā uparimasamāpattīnaṃ sampādanassa asambhavato ‘‘satta samāpattiyo maṃ jānāpesī’’ti āha. Payogaṃ kareyyanti bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjeyyanti attho. Evamāhāti evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso’’tiādimāha, sattannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ adhigamaṃ paccaññāsīti attho.
「无嫉妒者」即不嫉妒。由此,他对大人表达了净信。当菩萨证得那些等至而安住时,由于过去生的熟悉与智慧之广大,那些等至的趣向与归趣便显现在他心中。因此他断定:「这些还属于轮回。」于是他说:「此法不导向厌离……」等。联系上下文来解释:某些人修习离欲等至,虽能超越,却非究竟超越,且本身仍属于轮回,故于轮回不生厌离;既不导向厌离,也就不导向离欲;不导向灭除贪等恶法;不导向止息;因此,它不导向证知应证知之法……乃至……不导向涅槃。显示巴利原文
Anusūyakoti anissukī. Tena mahāpurise pasādaṃ pavedesi. Bodhisattassa tā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ṭhitassa purimajātiparicayena ñāṇassa ca mahantatāya tāsaṃ gati ca abhisamparāyo ca upaṭṭhāsi . Tena ‘‘vaṭṭapariyāpannā evetā’’ti nicchayo udapādi. Tenāha ‘‘nāyaṃ dhammo nibbidāyā’’tiādi. Ekaccānaṃ virāgabhāvanāsamatikkamāvahopi neva tesampi accantāya samatikkamāvaho, sayañca vaṭṭapariyāpannoyeva, tasmā neva vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya, yadaggena na nibbidāya, tadaggena na virajjanatthāya, rāgādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ na nirujjhanatthāya, na upasamatthāya, tasmā taṃ abhiññeyyadhammaṃ na abhijānanatthāya…pe… saṃvattatīti yojanā.
「仅至无所有处再生」:这是就拿七种等至中的最高者来说。由于他努力寻求不死之法,而此法并未超越生法,因此大士舍弃了它,并说:「而它导向的那个境界……」等等。「从此以后」:当他知见了等至法的趣向与归趣时,从此以后。「如蝇」:因为食物中混有苍蝇,所以没有想要食用的意图。「以极大的精进」:这是指他数日间在那里专心修习,并不像其他人那样做遍作准备等。因为最后有菩萨要证得等至,并不是费力的事。「不认为庄严」:就是反复思量,一次次地认为「这毫无用处」。显示巴利原文
Yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanupapattiyāti sattasu samāpattīsu ukkaṭṭhaṃ gahetvā vadati. Uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya acutidhammaṃ pariyesituṃ yuttattā tañca anatikkantajātidhammamevāti mahāsatto pajahatīti āha ‘‘yañca ṭhānaṃ pāpetī’’tiādi. Tato paṭṭhāyāti yadā samāpattidhammassa gatiñca abhisamparāyañca abbhaññāsi, tato paṭṭhāya. Makkhikāvasenāti bhojanassa makkhikāmissatāvasena. Manaṃ na uppādeti bhuñjitunti adhippāyo. Mahantena ussāhenāti idaṃ katipāhaṃ tattha bhāvanānuyogamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na aññesaṃ viya kasiṇaparikammādikaraṇaṃ. Na hi antimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ samāpattinibbattane bhāriyaṃ nāma. Analaṅkaritvāti anu anu alaṃkatvā punappunaṃ ‘‘iminā na kiñci payojana’’nti katvā.
278 「仅以言辞掌握」:此处应依前文所述之理来理解其义。显示巴利原文
278.Vācāya uggahitamattovāti ettha pubbe vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo.
279 如同大沙滩(mahāvelā),因沙堆广大而成大沙滩岸(mahāvelātaṭa),就是这个意思。因此说“大沙堆”的意思。uru、maru、sikatā、vālukā、vaṇṇu、vālikā这些词意义相同,只是文辞有别。显示巴利原文
279. Mahāvelā viya mahāvelā, vipulavālikapuñjatāya mahanto velātaṭo viyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘mahāvālikarāsīti attho’’ti. Uru maru sikatā vālukā vaṇṇu vālikāti ime saddā samānatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ.
“军镇”:军队前来并驻扎于此,故称“军镇”,即军队驻扎之处。不过,“军镇”这一名称是后来才出现的。这是为了指示行乞的村落。《大萨遮迦经》中,它出现在上面的经文里。但在此处,由于在讲说圣求,所以是指菩提座。显示巴利原文
Senā nigacchi nivisi etthāti senānigamo, senāya niviṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Senānigāmoti pana ayaṃ samaññā aparakālikā. Gocaragāmanidassanañcetaṃ. Uparisuttasminti mahāsaccakasutte. Idha pana bodhipallaṅko adhippeto ariyapariyesanāya vuccamānattā.
280 “智与见”(ñāṇadassana)一词,因为是将两个词合为一个整体来把握,并且用了“我”(me),所以它指的是能无余照了所知的一切、具足如此能力的殊胜智慧,并非单指智,也非单指见。因此,世尊说:“我的遍知智生起,它具足照见一切法而不动摇的能力。”所谓“无扰动”(akuppatāya),是因为解脱已达到圆满,完全不被相反的烦恼法所动摇,所以经文说“不被贪等所扰动”。又因为所缘的寂静也有差别,正如说“不动住”,所以也说“亦由所缘无扰动故”。不仅遍知智如此,而且依据如实证得的圣谛法,还有十九种观察智。显示巴利原文
280. ‘‘Ñāṇadassana’’nti ca ekajjhaṃ gahitapadadvayavisayavisesassa anāmaṭṭhattā ‘‘me’’ti ca gahitattā anavasesañeyyāvabodhanasamatthameva ñāṇavisesaṃ bodheti, na ñāṇamattaṃ, na dassanamattanti āha ‘‘sabbadhammadassanasamatthañca me sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti. Akuppatāyāti vimokkhantatāya sabbaso paṭipakkhadhammehi asaṅkhobhanīyatāya. Tenāha ‘‘rāgādīhina kuppatī’’ti. Ārammaṇasantatāyapi tadārammaṇānaṃ atthi viseso yathā taṃ ‘‘āneñjavihāre’’ti āha ‘‘akuppārammaṇatāya cā’’ti. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇampīti na kevalaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇameva, atha kho yathādhigate paṭivedhasaddhamme ekūnavīsatividhapaccavekkhaṇañāṇampi.
281 「已通达」(paṭividdhoti)的意思是以自生的智慧,通过“这是苦”等方式,以面对而洞穿的方式证得,也就是如实觉悟了。「甚深」(gambhīro)的意思是,像大海洋一样,除了那些已在其他地方累积并成熟了智慧资粮的人,其他人的智慧无法在其中找到立足点。因此说“这是表示并非浅显的话”。那无法找到立足点的,因为无法潜入,也就无法从本质上看到,所以说“由甚深故难见”。「应以苦见」(dukkhena daṭṭhabbo)意思是只能由某些人艰难地见到。如果根本无法见到,那么逐步地觉悟就根本无从谈起,所以说“由难见故更难觉悟”。由于觉悟是极难做到的,所以要以艰难的方式去觉悟。在这里应该引用这段经文:“诸比丘,你们认为如何,哪一样是更难做或更难达到的呢?”(相应部5.1115)。或者,因为以寂静为所缘,所以称为「寂静」(santo)。因为熄灭了一切热恼,所以称为「寂灭」(nibbuto)。或者因为达到了殊胜的状态,称为「微妙」(paṇīto)。以不令人满足之义,就像美味的食物一样,称为「不满足」(atapako)。在这里,灭谛是以寂静为所缘的,所以是寂静所缘;道谛本身是寂静的,而且以寂静为所缘,所以也是寂静所缘。由于自性不寂静的烦恼和诸行已经不存在,并且因为熄灭了一切热恼,以寂静微妙的状态以及无混杂的纯粹状态,应当了知为「不满足」。因此说“这两者都是指称出世间而说的”。因为这是最高智慧的对象,不能通过推理而悟入,同时它也是极精微智慧的行境,所以称为「微细」(saṇho)。又因为自性极其微细,所以称为「细妙」(nipuṇo);由于不是愚者的境界,唯有智者才能了知,因此称为「智者所证知」(paṇḍitavedanīyo)。「所依」(ālayā)的意思是,以令人欢喜之义而被受用,也就是五种欲功德。「执著」(ālayanti)意思是,他们以乐著的方式执取、受用这些对象,这就是爱行的境界。他们「欢乐」,即享受乐趣、嬉戏、游玩。「乐于所依」(ālayaratā)就是热衷于所依。显示巴利原文
281.Paṭividdhoti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.64; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.172; sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.7) sayambhuñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭimukhaṃ nibbijjhanavasena patto, yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanameta’’nti. Yo alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho, so ogāhitumasakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato ca passituṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘gambhīrattāva duddaso’’ti. Dukkhena daṭṭhabboti kicchena kenacideva daṭṭhabbo. Yaṃ pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anu anu bujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattāva duranubodho’’ti. Dukkhena avabujjhitabbo avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) vattabbaṃ. Santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya nibbuto. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto. Atittikaraṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ. Anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya santapaṇītabhāveneva ca asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Uttamañāṇavisayattā na takkena avacaritabbo, tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya ca saṇho. Sukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo, bālānaṃ avisayattā paṇḍitehi eva veditabboti paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇā. Ālayanti allīyantī abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, taṇhāvicaritāni. Ramantīti ratiṃ vindanti kīḷanti laḷanti. Ālayaratāti ālayaniratā.
这是就「处」(ṭhāna)一词而言。然依义理,所说之「处」即是缘起。果依彼而生起,故名为「处」,亦即作为行等诸法之缘的无明等。「此缘」(idappaccayā)即指他们行之缘,即无明等。正如“天即是天性”之喻,「此缘性」(idappaccayatā)即无明等对其自果的缘性,即能生起果的能力。由此显示了具有能作缘相的缘起。「缘起」(paṭiccasamuppādo)即是依彼而生起果。此二词皆阐明诸法之缘义。故说“此为行等缘之名称”。此是略说,详解应依《清净道论注释》(清净道论大复注2.572-573)所述之理而了知。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhāna-saddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ṭhānanti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto. Tiṭṭhati phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā ‘‘devo eva devatā’’ti, idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ pati paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā. Tena samatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenapi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārādipaccayānaṃ etaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.572-573) vuttanayena veditabbo.
「一切行寂止」等:此中「一切」即“一切行寂止”等词所诠表之一切,于义即是涅槃。为显示其涅槃性,故经云“因为……”等。涅槃(nti nibbānaṃ)。「依止」(āgamma)是指以涅槃为所缘缘,为圣道之因。「寂止」(sammanti)即是以不再结生的方式寂灭。如是寂止已,他们特为安止,故说「安静下来」(vūpasammanti)。这表明:一切行于此中寂止,故称“一切行寂止”,此即涅槃。在离一切行之涅槃中,“一切行寂灭”这一同义语,应依前说之理而解。余语亦同。「已吐弃」(paṭinissaṭṭhā)即是以断除而彻底弃舍。「一切爱」(sabbā taṇhā)即是全部分为一百零八类的爱。「一切烦恼贪」(sabbe kilesarāgā)即一切属于烦恼的贪,如欲贪、色贪等;或此处“烦恼贪”应解为一切烦恼,非仅贪之一种,以他们能令心变异故。正如经云:“染心变异,嗔心变异,痴心变异”(波罗显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbanti sabbasaṅkhārasamathādisaddābhidheyyaṃ sabbaṃ atthato nibbānameva. Idāni tassa nibbānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nti nibbānaṃ. Āgammāti paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu. Sammantīti appaṭisandhikūpasamavasena sammanti. Tathā santā savisesaṃ upasantā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vūpasammantī’’ti. Etena ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbāna’’nti dasseti. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyutte ca nibbāne sabbasaṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Paṭinissaṭṭhāti samucchedavasena pariccattā honti. Sabbā taṇhāti aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā. Sabbe kilesarāgāti kāmarāgarūparāgādibhedā sabbepi kilesabhūtā rāgā, sabbepi vā kilesā idha ‘‘kilesarāgā’’ti veditabbā, na lobhavisesā eva cittassa vipariṇatabhāvāpādanato . Yathāha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’nti (pārā. 271). Virajjantīti palujjanti.
由于久坐与长时说法,可了知会出现背部酸痛、身体疲倦、口干舌燥等情况,这便是身体的劳累与不适。而且,这是针对那些不能了达说法义理者而说的;对于能了达者而言,纵然说法会带来身体上的疲倦,对世尊来说也根本不成其为疲倦。因此世尊说:“法的事务并不会令我感到疲惫。”(《自说经》10)正是由于这个原因,他才说:“为那些不能了达者说法,那才是我的疲劳。”此处的“两者”,是指心的疲劳与心的逼迫,这两种情况在诸佛世尊那里是全然不存在的,因为在菩提树下即已将其彻底断除。显示巴利原文
Ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca veditabbā. Sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānaṃ vasena vuttā, jānantānaṃ pana desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesī’’ti (udā. 10). Tenevāha ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti. Ubhayanti cittakilamatho ceva cittavihesā cāti ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā.
“随增”(anubrūhanaṃ),即汇集。“su”是不变词“apissu”的一部分。“me”在与“paṭi-”词结合时,依据属格的用法而以受格的形式出现,故译为“我的”。或者,“非寻常”(anacchariyā),是指已经达到增长的事物。因为前缀“a-”亦有增长之义,比如“无学之法(asekkhā dhammā)”(《法集论·三法解说》)。应当如此理解:为了对包含天人的世间开示正法,在圆满波罗蜜达十万大劫又四阿僧祇劫之后,如今显现出对已证法王之位者而言的“不活跃”(appossukkatā)的证得,这便是偈颂意义的非寻常性与它的增胜之处。因为正是透过义的门径,偈颂才显示出其非寻常性。“成为行境”(gocarā ahesuṃ),意即现前。而现前即意味着应当被遍寻,故说“成为遍寻的状态”。显示巴利原文
Anubrūhanaṃ sampiṇḍanaṃ. Soti ‘‘apissū’’ti nipāto. Manti paṭi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘mamā’’ti. Vuddhippattā vā acchariyā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi a-kāro hoti yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā). Kappānaṃ satasahassaṃ cattāri ca asaṅkhyeyyāni sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni adhigatadhammarajjassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanatā, gāthātthassa acchariyatā, tassa vuddhippatti cāti veditabbaṃ. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahesuṃ. Upaṭṭhānañca vitakketabbatāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
如果圣道本身就是乐行道,为何还说它是艰难的呢?因此解释说:“然而在圆满波罗蜜的时期”等等。这是针对布施那些极难舍离之物等而言的。“ha”是不变词,意思是“明显”,也有人说它表示“确定”。所谓明显、确定,或者“足够”(alaṃ)——其意为,以如此艰辛的方式去宣说如此难证之法,是毫无用处的(这是句子的连接)。或者,“hala”与“alaṃ”同义,正如“我说‘hala’”等处(《长部复注》2.65;《相应部复注》1.1.172)所说。“被贪瞋所染污者”意思是,如同被散布毒液的毒蛇所沾染一般,被贪与瞋所感染、所征服。“随贪瞋而行者”意思是,被贪与瞋紧密跟随的人。显示巴利原文
Yadi sukhāpaṭipadāva, kathaṃ kicchatāti āha ‘‘pāramīpūraṇakāle panā’’tiādi. Evamādīni duppariccajāni dentassa. Ha-iti vā ‘‘byatta’’nti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Ekaṃsattheti keci. Ha byattaṃ, ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa desitanti yojanā. Halanti vā ‘‘ala’’nti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.65; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.172) viya. Rāgadosapariphuṭṭhehīti phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehi. Rāgadosānugatehīti rāgena ca dosena ca anubandhehi.
乐著欲贪和乐著有贪的人,被诸盖所遮蔽;乐著见贪的人,则颠倒执着。‘他们将不能见’,意思是不能如实通达法。‘这样使令执取’,是想让他们以‘无常’等自性如实了知法。他们被贪瞋所败,也正因为完全被愚痴的黑暗积聚所覆,所以说‘被暗蕴所覆’。显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgarattā bhavarāgarattā ca nīvaraṇehi nivutatāya, diṭṭhirāgarattā viparītābhinivesena. Na dakkhantīti yāthāvato dhammaṃ na paṭivijjhissanti. Evaṃ gāhāpetunti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhammaṃ jānāpetuṃ. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammūḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti.
282 为了说明说法时生起‘不活跃’的原因,经文以‘那么为什么……’等句子,由世尊自己提出这个问题。其中,‘以未知的形相’是指通过成为世尊弟子的方式,现起不同于如来本来面目的样子。有注疏者说这是指‘以苦行者的形相’。不过,那种形相在证得阿拉汉果时便会彻底消失。生起‘不活跃’的原因有三种:对立面的力量极强;法本身极为甚深;以及对此法怀有极深的尊重。为了显示这三点,才开展了‘对他而言……’等内容的论述。其中,所谓‘对立面’,就是指贪欲等烦恼,因为它们会对正确的修道实践构成障碍。这些烦恼力量强大,又经过长久反复熏习,深深植根于众生的相续中,所以极难拔除。它们征服、压倒众生,并给众生带来不幸与毁灭,就如同一头醉象对待虚弱的人;它们盘踞在纵深数百由旬、结构紧密坚实、布满荆棘的险恶之地。为了显示因为烦恼难以破除和断除,所以众生极难被净化,注疏说了‘而对他……’等话。在这里,譬如内部不洁、盛满酸粥的葫芦,长久放置而装满酪浆的缸,以及被油浸……显示巴利原文
282. Dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpattiyā kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā sayameva codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha aññātavesenāti imassa bhagavato sāvakabhāvūpagamanena aññātarūpena. Tāpasavesenāti keci. So pana arahattādhigameneva vigaccheyya. Tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ appossukkatāpattiyā paṭipakkhassa balavabhāvo, dhammassa gambhīratā, tattha ca sātisayaṃ gāravanti, ta dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. (Tattha paṭipakkhā nāma rāgādayo kilesā sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarattā. Tesaṃ balavabhāvato ciraparibhāvanāya sattasantānato dubbisodhiyatāya te satte mattahatthino viya dubbalapurisaṃ adhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādentā anekasatayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ sunicitaṃ ghanasannivesaṃ kaṇṭakaduggampi adhisenti. Dūrappabhedaducchejjatāhi dubbisodhiyataṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘athassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca anto amaṭṭhatāya kañjiyapuṇṇā lābu. Cirapārivāsikatāya takkabharitā cāṭi. Snehatintadubbalabhāvena vasāpītapilotikā. Telamissitatāya añjanamakkhitahattho dubbisodhanīyā vuttā, hīnūpamā cetā rūpapabandhabhāvato acirakālikattā ca malīnatāya, kilesasaṃkileso eva pana dubbisodhanīyataro anādikālikattā anusayitattā ca. Tenāha ‘‘atisaṃkiliṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā ca dubbisodhanīyataratāya, evaṃ gambhīraduddasaduranubodhānampi vuttaupamā hīnūpamāva).
若能消除对立面,那么即便是甚深的法,也能变得显而易见。然而,消除对立面依赖于正确的修道实践,而正确的修道实践则仰赖于听闻正法。听闻正法又取决于对导师和法的清净信心,而这种清净信心,则以值得尊敬者的祈请为起因。依照这一逻辑理路,为了显示众生的法随法行是以梵天的祈请为缘,世尊才进一步开示了‘而且……’等内容。显示巴利原文
Paṭipakkhavigamanena gambhīropi dhammo supākaṭo bhaveyya. Paṭipakkhavigamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammassavanādhīnā. Taṃ satthari dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ, so garuṭṭhāniyānaṃ ajjhesanahetukoti panāḷikāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmayācanānimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
“少尘者”的含义,通过“具有慧……”等文句被阐明为:作为随烦恼的少许贪等尘垢,对他们而言是微少的;他们因此拥有少尘,所以说他们具备了少尘之眼——这里的“眼”即指慧眼。也可以从词义上作另一种解释:对他们来说,贪等尘垢是微少的,以此为本质而称为“少尘种类者”。再将皈依与回向利他计入,布施等十种福业事的基础便成为十二种,因此说“以十二种福业行”。显示巴利原文
Upakkilesabhūtaṃ appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etassāti apparajaṃ, apparajaṃ akkhi paññācakkhu yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvāti katvā apparajakkhajātikāti ayamattho vibhāvito ‘‘paññāmaye’’tiādinā. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ taṃsabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evampi saddattho sambhavati. Dānādidasapuññakiriyavatthūni saraṇagamanaparahitapariṇāmanehi saddhiṃ (dvādasa hontīti) ‘‘dvādasapuññakiriyavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
他们所宣说的,是以推论所得、以审察思维为途径、凭一己之智构想出来的法。那些内心被贪等垢染所污的人,依凭诸如世间技艺等六种师位,以自称导师的身份,通过编撰诗歌、以思辨诗人等姿态创作出来。据说,他们因听闻佛陀即将出世的议论而生起好奇,为欺骗世人,便以欺诈的方式自称了知一切,将任何非正法都鼓吹为法。因此经中说:“他们确实在更早的时候就已经出现……”。“打开吧!”这一句,是指世尊以宣说正法之手,推开并敞开那道自迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来一直紧闭着的、通往涅槃大城的巨大城门——也就是圣道。显示巴利原文
Rāgādimalena samalehi pūraṇādīhi chahi satthārehi satthupaṭiññehi kabbaracanāvasena cintākaviādibhāve ṭhatvā takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ cintito. Te kira buddhakolāhalānussavena sañjātakutūhalaṃ lokaṃ vañcetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānantā yaṃ kiñci adhammaṃyeva dhammoti dīpesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā’’tiādi. Apāpuretanti etaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānanagarassa mahādvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ saddhammadesanāhatthena apāpura vivara.
岩石山高耸而稳固,不像土山或杂石山那样,所以说“如同在岩石的山顶上”。所谓“法所成的宫殿”,是指出世间法。因为它能于一切方面生起清净信,并且以超越一切法的意义高高矗立,所以与宫殿相似。或者,此处的“法”一词是“慧”的同义词。因为慧也以高高矗立之义,在《阿毗达摩》的《法集论》注中被定义为“宫殿”。同样地,经文中也这样说:显示巴利原文
Selapabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato missakapabbato cāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhanī’’ti. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi sabbaso pasādāvaho, sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca. Paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo. Sā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena ‘‘pāsādo’’ti abhidhamme (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
他登上慧的殿堂,无忧无虑,俯视着充满忧愁的众生;
如同立于山顶者俯视地面之人,智者如是看待愚者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
或者,“起来吧!”意为:从那种被称为“于说法懈怠”、本质上是疲倦懈怠的退缩状态中,奋起。显示巴利原文
Uṭṭhehīti vā dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha.
283 恭敬亲近应受敬重者后,为了更崇高的利益而发起希求,这便是“祈请”,其本质即是恳求。因此说“祈请即恳求”。由于这两种智唯诸佛独具,非局限某一领域的知见,故称此双重的智为“佛眼”。因此说“事实上,这两种智名为佛眼”。“三种道智”指较低的三层道智,因它们仅是照见四圣谛法的知见,故得“法眼”之名。由于较低的三智被形容为如闪电,而最上层的道智,智的功用已达究竟,非仅照见,故不称为“法眼”,因此被形容为犹如金刚杵。所谓“依前述之理”,即依照“少尘者”那段文中所阐述的道理。因烦恼微薄者被称为“少尘者”,故应知烦恼深重者即为“多尘者”。五根之中,有能力摧破对立面的,即是“敏锐的、英勇的、清澄的”;与此相违的,则是“柔软的”。所谓“信等的行相”,指信等的作用方式。“善妙的”即良善。而《分别论注》中说:“那些心性倾向等部分善妙者,是‘具妙行者’;相反的情况,是‘具劣行者’。”应知此与本注释的意义是相符一致的。所谓“因”显示巴利原文
283. Garuṭṭhāniyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato yācanāva hotīti āha ‘‘ajjhesananti yācana’’nti. Padesavisayaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ ahutvā buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikabhāvato idaṃ ñāṇadvayaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāma’’nti. Tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānanti heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ catusaccadhammadassanamattabhāvato. Yato tāni ñāṇāni vijjūpamabhāvena vuttāni, aggamaggañāṇaṃ pana ñāṇakiccassa sikhāppattiyā na dassanamattaṃ hotīti ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti na vuccati, tato taṃ vajirūpamabhāvena vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti ettha vuttanayena. Yasmā mandakilesā ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti vuttā, tasmā bahalakilesā ‘‘mahārajakkhā’’ti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhavidhamanasamatthatāya tikkhāni sūrāni visadāni, vuttavipariyāyena mudūni. Saddhādayo ākārāti saddahanādippakāre vadati. Sundarāti kalyāṇā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 814) pana ‘‘yesaṃ āsayādayo koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā, viparītā dvākārā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ imāya atthavaṇṇanāya aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ nāma paccayākāro, saccāni vā.
“而在此,有这段经文”的意思是:在阐明“少尘者”等词语的意义时,这段经文是能阐明其义的。信等诸法,作为导向解脱的成熟助缘,它们之所以力量强大,正是由于它们的对立面——那些恶法——力量薄弱;反之,恶法的强大,也是因为信等诸法的薄弱。因此,依据解脱的成熟助缘存在与否,在经文中便分别显示了少尘、多尘等状态。“世界”,仅就坏灭、离散的意义来说,是指五蕴等。作为成就之有的世间是“成就之有世间”,也就是名为善趣的再生有。“成就由此而生起”,因此是“成就所起之世间”,即能导致投生善趣的业有。名为恶趣的再生有,以及能导致投生恶趣的业有,就是“损失之有世间”与“损失所起之世间”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha pāḷīti ettha apparajakkhādipadānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ tassatthassa vibhāvanī pāḷi. Saddhādīnaṃ vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ balavabhāvo tappaṭipakkhānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ dubbalabhāveneva hoti, tesañca balavabhāvo saddhādīnaṃ dubbalabhāvenāti vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ atthitānatthitāvasena apparajakkhamahārajakkhatādayo pāḷiyaṃ vibhajitvā dassitā. Khandhādayo eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Sampattibhavabhūto loko sampattibhavaloko, sugatisaṅkhāto upapattibhavo. Sampatti sambhavati etenāti sampattisambhavaloko. Sugatisaṃvattaniyo kammabhavo. Duggati saṅkhātaupapattibhavaduggati saṃvattaniyakammabhavā vipattibhavalokavipattisambhavalokā.
为了进一步用“一个世界”等方式作分类,来分别显示世间,所以说了“一个世界”等。就像依靠食物而住者一样,那些以食为住处的诸行,因为具有坏灭的意义,所以被称为“世界”。在这里,说“一个世界:一切众生以食为住处”,这是一种基于个人的说法,它显示了一切诸行都是依赖于条件而存在的。从这个角度看,一切诸行就只是一个世界,只有一种类型,因为没有其他的类别。“二个世界”等的含义,也应当按照这个方法来理解。这里在列举“名”的时候,并没有把涅槃包括在内,因为涅槃不具备世间的本质。或许有人会问:“既然‘以食为住处’说明了依赖于条件而存在,那道果不也应该属于世间了吗?”回答是:不,因为这里所说的“世界”,特指那些应当被彻底了知的苦谛法。或者还可以理解为:凡是不会变坏、不会消亡,不被执取者,就不叫世间;那些出世间法,由于远离了执取,所以没有世间性。取蕴就是作为执取所缘的蕴。“十处”:指十种色处。这里其他的部分就很容易理解了。显示巴利原文
Puna ekakadukādivasena lokaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘eko loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhārādayo viya hi āhāraṭṭhitikā saṅkhārā lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti. Ettha eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti yāyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavutti, tāya sabbe saṅkhārā ekova loko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca āhāraṭṭhitikāti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphalānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha ‘‘loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃ-gahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.
这是针对心向出离者的意乐而说。对于他们,一切三界之业皆应呵责、应当舍离,故说「一切行是过失,一切趣向有之业是过失」。在少尘、多尘等五对之中,每一对各有十种行相,因此说「以五十种行相了知此五根」。或者说,这是通过顺次、逆次观察信等诸根的上中下、胜劣差别而了知,故如此说。在此,当世尊以少尘、多尘以及应引导者等行相作意时,那些众生是成批、成堆地现于其前,并非一一现起。显示巴利原文
Vivaṭṭajjhāsayassa adhippetattā tassa ca sabbaṃ tebhūmakakammaṃ garahitabbaṃ vajjitabbañca hutvā upaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjaṃ, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajja’’nti. Apparajakkhamahārajakkhādīsu pañcasu dukesu ekekasmiṃ dasa dasa katvā ‘‘paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā anvayato byatirekato ca saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ jānātīti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca apparajakkhādibhabbādivasena āvajjentassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekā.
「有优钵罗花处」:彼处有优钵罗花,故称uppalinī(优钵罗池)。此词可指灌木丛或池塘,但此处意指池塘,故言「在优钵罗林中」。那些完全沉浸于水中,于水下生长、盛开的莲花,称为「内沉浸生长者」。「所开示的」:指注释书中已阐明者,或即于此处以「其他」等语而说者。显示巴利原文
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippetoti āha ‘‘uppalavane’’ti. Yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pusanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīni. Dīpitānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni, idheva vā ‘‘aññānipī’’tiādinā bhāsitāni.
「略开知者」:所谓「略开」,是指智慧的触发,意即智慧仅被略为触发便能了知。「广开知者」:了知已详细展开、充分解释之义者。「应被引导者」:须由总说等而受引导之人。「就在举例之时」:即举例说明的当下。「法现观」:以智慧现观四圣谛法。「此所谓」:以简略的方式安立论母,如以「四念处」等教示时,此人能随彼教而运用智慧证得阿罗汉果,这种人即称「略开知者」。「此所谓」:简略安立论母后,再详细分析义理时能证阿罗汉果,此人即称「广开知者」。「由于总说」:以总说为因缘,即正在开示或请人开示之意。「由于遍问」:为了知义理而处处询问。「次第法现观」:按次第逐步证得阿罗汉果。「于彼生中无法现观」:在他那一有身之中,连禅那或观都无法生起,更遑论道果。这些人称为「句最胜者」:因音节文字本身即为其最高极限,故称「句最胜者」。显示巴利原文
Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭitaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatte eva jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre udāhaṭamatteyeva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṃkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa, uddisāpentassa vāti attho. Paripucchatoti atthaṃ paripucchantassa. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamoti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti padaparamoti vuccati.
「业障」:指五种无间业。「异熟障」:指无因的结生。然而,二因者亦无法证悟圣道,因此二因的结生亦应视作「异熟障」。「烦恼障」:指决定性邪见。「不信」:于佛陀等无有信心。「无欲」:缺乏行善的意欲。郁单越洲的众生属于无欲之处。「劣慧」:指有分智慧不足。然而,即使有分慧圆满,若彼有分不能成为出世间的缘,也名为「劣慧」。「不能入决定」:不能进入、无法证得于善法中称为「正性决定」之道。而「非业障」等,则应从相反的角度来理解。显示巴利原文
Kammāvaraṇenāti (vibha. aṭṭha. 826) pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā pana duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukā paṭisandhipi ‘‘vipākāvaraṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā. Bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa paccayo na hoti, sopi duppañño eva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ okkamituṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā. Na kammāvaraṇenātiādīni vuttavipariyāyena veditabbāni.
「涅槃之门」:指通往涅槃的道路。此门因世尊以大悲为依止、以自然智证悟,故已开启安立。「释放信心」:意为令他们将信心投入,即呈现信解之相。「善转」:指容易运作、无难而转起。「我未曾说、我将不说」:他曾经这样思惟。显示巴利原文
Nibbānassa dvāraṃ pavisanamaggo. Vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhuñāṇena adhigatattā. Saddhaṃ pamuñcantūti attano saddhaṃ pavesentu, saddahanākāraṃ upaṭṭhapentūti attho. Sukhena akicchena pavattanīyatāya suppavattitaṃ. Na bhāsiṃ na bhāsissāmīti cintesiṃ.
284 284. 当「我将说法」这一与说法相应的寻生起时,它是在第七个七日之后、第八个七日中生起的,因此说「在第八七日」。因为与其他七日不同,确实存在着一个被标示出固定作用、名为「第八七日」的实际阶段在运转。显示巴利原文
284. Dhammaṃ desessāmīti evaṃ pavattitadhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyuttassa vitakkassa sattamasattāhato paraṃ aṭṭhamasattāheyeva uppannattā vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti. Na itarasattāhāni viya paṭiniyatakiccalakkhitassa aṭṭhamasattāhassa nāma pavattitassa sabbhāvā.
“打开”:即以天众之形展现,犹如人在舒展肢体的睡眠中那般明显,意谓广大地显现。由于菩萨生起了“若未证得佛果,我决不再返回”的强烈思惟,因此示现了名为“转地塔”的塔庙。在释迦、拘利、马喇三个王族的国土中。在树下:即在榕树下。她说完后便离去;当她离去时,菩萨为接受金钵而显现姿态,她说:“那已是施予您之物。”便离去了。显示巴利原文
Vivaṭanti devatāviggahena vivaṭaaṅgapaccaṅganiddāya janānaṃ pākaṭaṃ vippakāranti attho. ‘‘Buddhattaṃ anadhigantvā na paccāgamissāmī’’ti uppannavitakkātisayahetukena pathavīparivattanacetiyaṃ nāma dassetvā. Sākiyakoliyamallarajjavasena tīṇi rajjāni. Rukkhamūleti nigrodhamūle. Vatvā pakkāmi, pakkamantiyā cassā mahāsatto ākāraṃ dassesi suvaṇṇathālaggahaṇāya, sā ‘‘tumhākaṃ taṃ pariccattamevā’’ti pakkāmi.
“作日中住”:即由进入种种等至而作日间之住。他依着经中所说的方式——“宁可皮肉筋腱干枯,乃至身体血肉干竭”——立下了四支精进。显示巴利原文
Divāvihāraṃ katvāti nānāsamāpattiyo samāpajjanena divāvihāraṃ viharitvā. ‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohita’’ntiādinā sutte (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) āgatanayena caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā.
“九由旬”:这是从高度上说的,宽度有十二由旬,据说长度一直延伸到铁围山那么长。魔罗张开手臂逼近,说:“起来,悉达多!我才是适合这金刚座的人。”说着,便令自己的证人作证,并示意随从。一时间,他们齐声喧嚷:“这个才适合!这个才适合!”菩萨听见后,伸出手来。关于此事,有这样的说法:“……”显示巴利原文
Navayojananti ubbedhato vuttaṃ, puthulato dvādasayojanā, dīghato yāva cakkavāḷā āyatāti vadanti. Ajjhottharanto upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘uṭṭhehi so, siddhattha, ahaṃ imassa pallaṅkassa anucchaviko’’ti vatvā tattha sakkhiṃ otārento attano parisaṃ niddisi. Ekappahāreneva – ‘‘ayameva anucchaviko, ayameva anucchaviko’’ti kolāhalamakāsi, taṃ sutvā mahāsatto…pe… hatthaṃ pasāreti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
这大地没有心,没有识,不知乐与苦;
它却也因我布施之力,震动了七次。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, aviññāya sukhaṃ dukhaṃ; Sāpi dānabalā mayhaṃ, sattakkhattuṃ pakampathā’’ti. (cariyā. 1.124);
「净化宿住随念智后」:这是将前后文义连接起来,以狮子观望的方式相联系。「思择轮回与还灭后」:这是指对四谛的作意。「为此结跏趺座」:这是以结跏趺座来显示他所证得的殊胜。因为在那里,他不舍弃已达顶点的解脱之乐,同时还在期间作意缘起支,就这样一坐结跏趺坐。「一些天众」:这是指除了已证得道、现证灭,且在一定程度上了知佛陀功德的天众之外的其他天众。「还有其他成就佛陀性的功德」:这是将意思连接起来:从毗舍佉月月圆日开始,日日夜夜如此,由于恒常入定的因缘,在那些佛陀功德之上,是否还有其他能让人们了知“这是佛陀”并表明佛陀本性的法呢?显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ visodhetvāti ānetvā sambandho sīhāvalokanañāyena. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ sammasitvāti catusaccamanasikāraṃ sandhāyāha. Imassa pallaṅkassa atthāyāti pallaṅkasīsena adhigatavisesaṃ dasseti. Tattha hi sikhāppattavimuttisukhaṃ avijahanto antarantarā ca paṭiccasamuppādaṅgaṃ manasikaronto ekapallaṅkena nisīdi. Ekaccānanti yā adhigatamaggā sacchikatanirodhā ekadesena ca buddhaguṇe jānanti, tā ṭhapetvā tadaññesaṃ devatānaṃ. Aññepi buddhattakarāti visākhāpuṇṇamato paṭṭhāya rattindivaṃ evaṃ niccasamāhitabhāvahetukānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ upari aññepi buddhattasādhakā, ‘‘ayaṃ buddho’’ti buddhabhāvassa paresaṃ vibhāvanā dhammā kiṃ nu kho atthīti yojanā.
「以不眨眼者」:由于法喜遍满,净信舒展而安住不动,故目不眨动。「宝经行处」:指由诸天所造的宝石经行处。由于在那里对七部论宝及具足无量理趣的法宝进行思择,此处据说也因此得名为“宝屋塔庙”。「如此」:指下文将述的方式。“六色光芒从齿间放出,犹如六牙象族”,这是用作比喻的说法。显示巴利原文
Animisehīti dhammapītivipphāravasena pasādavikasitaniccalatāya nimesarahitehi. Ratanacaṅkameti devatāhi māpite ratanamayacaṅkame. Ratanabhūtānaṃ sattannaṃ pakaraṇānaṃ tattha ca anantanayassa dhammaratanassa sammasanena taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātantipi vadanti. Evanti vakkhamānākārena. Chabbaṇṇānaṃ rasmīnaṃ dantehi nikkhamanato chaddantanāgakulaṃ viyāti nidassanaṃ vuttaṃ.
「下铜殿量」:指九层楼中最底层的第一铜殿下方,其大小与铜殿相当。然而,《犍度注疏》中则说:“与宝库房等量。”显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇoti navabhūmakassa sabbapaṭhamassa lohapāsādassa heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo. Khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 5) pana tattha ‘‘bhaṇḍāgāragabbhappamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
“Paccagghe”:意为“新的、崭新的”。有人解为“各因价高而新”,那并不正确。因为诸佛世尊不会接受或受用昂贵的物品。此处的“团食”,是就乳粥和蜜丸而言。“这思惟”是指:“我应当先为谁说法呢?”这样的寻思。显示巴利原文
Paccaggheti abhinave. Paccekaṃ mahagghatāya paccaggheti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Na hi buddhā bhagavanto mahagghaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti paribhuñjanti vā. Piṇḍapātanti ettha manthañca madhupiṇḍikañca sandhāya vadati. Ayaṃ vitakkoti – ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti ayaṃ parivitakko.
“以博学”是指藉由获得禅定而成就的智者素质,其特征为证悟与多闻。“以聪慧”是指由于获得禅定所带来的守护慧,依此具有善巧的聪敏。“有智慧者”是指兼具三因结生慧,以及于诸事中知晓何为当行、何为不当行之慧;此处应如此理解其义。“大损失者”意为遭受重大损失者。此句的完整含义是:应当先说明“连来的足迹都没有”,再接着说“我若前往那里,纵然去了并听闻其开示的佛法,恐怕连听闻后所生的净信也不会生起”。那么,难道世尊不能以其佛陀威神之力,令他们了知佛法吗?确实不能。若无声闻弟子闻他说法的音声,便不能现观佛法;否则,即使不具其他因缘也应能现观,但事实并非如此。当知确有经证:“诸比丘,有两种缘令正见生起:他说的法音与自身的如理作意。”圣典中仅提及罗摩证得禅定,未述优陀迦证得,这是在叙述菩萨当时与他们相遇的因缘。因为此前,那位大人(菩萨)亦于彼处精勤修行,当他获悉罗摩迅速成就了诸禅定,便心生警觉与强烈震动。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍiccenāti samāpattipaṭilābhasaṃsiddhena adhigamabāhusaccasaṅkhātena paṇḍitabhāvena. Veyyattiyenāti samāpattipaṭilābhapaccayena pārihāriyapaññāsaṅkhātena byattabhāvena. Medhāvīti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātāya taṃtaṃitikattabbatāpaññāsaṅkhātāya ca medhāya samannāgatoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Mahājāniyoti mahāparihāniko. Āgamanapādāpi natthīti idaṃ paṭhamaṃ vattabbaṃ, athāhaṃ tattha gaccheyyaṃ, gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotapasādopi natthīti yojanā. Kiṃ pana bhagavatā attano buddhānubhāvena te dhammaṃ ñāpetuṃ na sakkāti? Āma, na sakkā. Na hi parato ghosaṃ antarena sāvakānaṃ dhammābhisamayo sambhavati, aññathā itarapaccayarahitassapi dhammābhisamayena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca taṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya parato ca ghoso ajjhattañca yonisomanasikāro’’ti (a. ni. 2.127). Pāḷiyaṃ rāmasseva samāpattilābhitā āgatā, na udakassa, taṃ tassa bodhisattena samāgatakālavasena vuttaṃ . So hi pubbepi tattha yuttappayutto viharanto mahāpurisena khippaññeva samāpattīnaṃ nibbattitabhāvaṃ sutvā saṃvegajāto mahāsatte tato nibbijja pakkante ghaṭento vāyamanto nacirasseva aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbattoti addasā’’ti. Ete aṭṭha brāhmaṇāti sambandho. Chaḷaṅgavāti chaḷaṅgaviduno. Mantanti mantapadaṃ. ‘‘Nijjhāyitvā’’ti vacanaseso, mantetvāti attho. Viyākariṃsūti kathesuṃ.
“随咒文”是指依据称为相咒的吠陀章句而作判断。“来到”指依此结论而行。这些婆罗门无法如经中所说“仅有两种趣向,别无其他”那般确定决断,便遵行既有的说法,并不期待这位伟人究竟成佛。然而,以憍陈如为首的这五位修行者,因早已确信“他必当来成佛”,故超越了咒文的字面意义。“满钵”指因内心净信而作布施。“无疑惑”指心中无有犹豫,不会在两种可能性之间摇摆不定。显示巴利原文
Yathāmantapadanti lakkhaṇamantasaṅkhātavedavacanānurūpaṃ. Gatāti paṭipannā. ‘‘Dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.199-200; ma. ni. 2.384, 398) vuttaniyāmena nicchinituṃ asakkontā brāhmaṇā vuttameva paṭipajjiṃsu, na mahāpurisassa buddhabhāvappattiṃ paccāsīsiṃsu. Ime pana koṇḍaññādayo pañca ‘‘ekaṃsato buddho bhavissatī’’ti jātanicchayattā mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Puṇṇapattanti tuṭṭhidānaṃ. Nibbitakkāti nibbikappā, na dvedhā takkā.
“播种时”即播种的时节。为播种而取出种子时,从中选取最优之先行布施,称为“种子先施”。至于“刈获先施”等布施法,亦同此理:即于该事的初始,从最先获得的部分中取出精华而行布施。谷物果实尚未完全成熟、尚为嫩苗时所行的布施,即立此名。“刈获时”即收割庄稼之时。将割下的庄稼用手束拢,一握一握地扎起,称为“束扎”。进而,为适应一人所能搬运的重量,将多个小束捆成大捆,则称为“捆”。于打谷场堆积这些禾捆之日,取出最先的部分行施,称为“打谷场先施”。碾实谷粒后,于米粒聚堆之日,取出最先的部分行施,称为“物先施”。将谷物储藏入库之日所行的布施,称为“仓先施”。“取出”是指从打谷场取出谷物。所以称为“已布施了九种最先的施舍”,这是为随顺其成为久存者中最为尊贵的心愿,于修习声闻波罗蜜达到极致时所作出的行为。因为当三种菩萨于各自的波罗蜜修行达到最高点时,其所造作的无论福业或非福业,均将引发极为深重的果报……显示巴利原文
Vappakāleti vapanakāle. Vapanatthaṃ bījāni nīharaṇantena tattha aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ bījaggadānaṃ nāma. Lāyanaggādīsupi eseva nayo. Dhaññaphalassa nātipariṇatakāle puthukakāle. Lāyaneti sassalāyane. Yathā lūnaṃ hatthakaṃ katvā veṇivasena bandhanaṃ veṇikaraṇaṃ. Veṇiyo pana purisabhāravasena bandhanaṃ kalāpo. Khale kalāpānaṃ ṭhapanadivase aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ khalaggaṃ. Madditvā vīhīnaṃ rāsikaraṇadivase aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ bhaṇḍaggaṃ. Koṭṭhāgāre dhaññassa pakkhipanadivase dānaṃ koṭṭhaggaṃ. Uddharitvāti khalato dhaññassa uddharitvā. Navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattāti idaṃ tassa rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvatthāya katābhinīhārānurūpaṃ pavattitasāvakapāramiyā ciṇṇante pavattitattā vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇampi hi bodhisattānaṃ taṃtaṃpāramiyā sikhāppattakāle pavattitaṃ puññaṃ apuññaṃ vā garutaravipākameva hoti, dhammassa ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ sacchikiriyāya vinā kathaṃ rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvasiddhīti. Bahukārā kho ime pañcavaggiyāti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakameva paricayavasena āḷārudakānussaraṇaṃ viya.
285 “空隙”:指两者中间的区域。因此说“在相距三牛呼那么远的地方”。在尚未连接变化时,本应使用属格,但因与“之间”一词结合,在语法上要求使用业格,故而不得使用属格,改用业格。所以注释说:“然而由于与‘之间’一词结合,便采用了业格的表达”。显示巴利原文
285.Vivareti majjhe. Tenāha ‘‘tigāvutantare ṭhāne’’ti. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kata’’nti.
征服:以遍知通达的方式超越一切三地法。于四地法——即毫无遗漏的应知一切法,由于彻底断除了所知障,便以一切知智了知。以染着、嗔恚、愚痴等烦恼。那些善法与无记法虽非所断,但因平息了与之相应的烦恼,故亦说为已断除,因此说“舍弃一切三地法而安住”。所缘性:即以之为所缘。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā pariññābhisamayavasena atikkamitvā. Catubhūmakadhammaṃ anavasesaṃ ñeyyaṃ sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇassa pahīnattā sabbaññutaññāṇena avediṃ. Rajjanadussanamuyhanādinā kilesena. Appahātabbampi kusalābyākataṃ tappaṭibaddhakilesamathanena pahīnattā na hotīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito’’ti. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena.
虽就世间法的证悟而言,世间之主的证悟方式亦非依他人教导而得,但在出世间法上,更无丝毫依他人教导之处,故说:“在出世间法方面,我根本没有老师”。“对等人”:指在戒等功德上堪为与之相当的人。“有因”:指具备与法相应及神变等特性。“以方式”:指以自证等特定方式。关于“四圣谛”这句话,是因为不存在能开示这些所知之事的其他老师,所以这样说。“自悟者”:指完全依靠自己、以自生智慧而觉悟的人。因彻底远离烦恼的热恼,达至“清凉”,由此获得真正的“寂静”。“将击”:意为将要击响。为引导应调伏众生证得涅槃,世尊作宣告等,故世尊的说法称为“不死的大鼓”。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi lokiyadhammānampi yādiso lokanāthassa adhigamo, na tādiso adhigamo parūpadeso atthi, lokuttaradhamme panassa lesopi natthīti āha ‘‘lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthī’’ti. Paṭibhāgapuggaloti sīlādīhi guṇehi paṭinidhibhūto puggalo. Sahetunāti sahadhammena sapāṭihīrakatāya. Nayenāti abhijānanatādividhinā. Cattāri saccānīti idaṃ tabbinimuttassa ñeyyassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Sayaṃ buddhoti sayameva sayambhuñāṇena buddho. Vigatapariḷāhatāya sītibhūto. Tato eva nibbuto. Āhañchanti āhanissāmi. Veneyyānaṃ amatādhigamāya ugghosanādiṃ katvā satthu dhammadesanā amatadundubhīti vuttā.
「无边胜者」:意为拥有无边智慧、已战胜烦恼的人。所谓「即使如此名称亦可存在」的意思是:在这样一位如同色宝般珍贵的人身上,理应具备这般的智慧。这是指他出家的因缘——这确实是他出家的缘起,且他早已累积了充足的修行功德。事实上,世尊正是为了与他相见,才亲自步行踏上了那条路。显示巴利原文
Anantañāṇo jitakilesoti anantajino. Evampi nāma bhaveyyāti evaṃvidhe nāma rūparatane īdisena ñāṇena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ayaṃ hissa pabbajjāya paccayo jāto, katādhikāro cesa. Tathā hi bhagavā tena samāgamatthaṃ padasāva taṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji.
「具足部分」:指具足一切肢节及附属诸分支。「感到厌恶」:即变得苦恼不堪,意思就是内心生起了忧恼。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsasampannāti aṅgapaccaṅgasaṅkhātaavayavasampannā. Aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭo hoti, domanassaṃ āpajjatīti attho.
「生于无烦天」:指出生在无烦天界中。「解脱」:是由最上果位的解脱而成就的解脱。至于「他们舍弃了人的身体,达至天相应」,这是指优波迦等人舍离了人的有身,由断除下分结而仅仅生于无烦天;接着又因证得最上道果,超越了所谓「天相应」——即超越了上分结。显示巴利原文
Avihaṃ upapannāseti avihesu nibbattā. Vimuttāti aggaphalavimuttiyā vimuttā. Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upajjhagunti te upakā dayo mānusaṃ attabhāvaṃ jahitvā orambhāgiyasaṃyojanappahānena avihesu nibbattamattāva aggamaggādhigamena dibbayogaṃ uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaṃ samatikkamiṃsu.
286 「制定」:他们立下了「不应礼敬」之类的规章(律藏大品12),所以才说「制定了规定」。「从精勤」:即由于过去曾不间断地行持那些难行的苦行。「显扬」:指言语的生起,也就是把话说出来。他们说「他不会证得任何殊胜」,是为了不让他心中懊丧。「你们可能会去往某处」是说不要生起这种思虑。「光」:指生起的观智光明。「相」:指禅修业处的相。所谓「仅以一句话」,便是仅凭这句话。忆念起「他从前也从未说过任何妄语」,因此记起了此事。「如实说者」:由此,大众便对他生起了恭敬。显示巴利原文
286.Saṇṭhapesunti ‘‘neva abhivādetabbo’’tiādinā (mahāva. 12) saṇṭhaṃ kiriyākāraṃ akaṃsu. Tenāha ‘‘katikaṃ akaṃsū’’ti. Padhānatoti pubbe anuṭṭhitadukkaracaraṇato. Pabhāvitanti vācāsamuṭṭhānaṃ, vacīnicchāraṇanti attho. ‘‘Ayaṃ na kiñci visesaṃ adhigamissatī’’ti anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ. ‘‘Mayaṃ yattha katthaci gamissāmā’’ti mā vitakkayittha. Obhāsoti vipassanobhāso. Nimittanti kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ. Ekapadenevāti ekavacaneneva. ‘‘Anena pubbepi na kiñci micchā vuttapubba’’nti satiṃ labhitvā. Yathābhūtavādīti uppannagāravā.
他一直待在寺院内,如同年轻王子般,得到那些比丘的护持照料。「垢」:指内心的种种杂染。从村里由比丘们取回呈献的食物,是属于他的,因此他称为「受献食者」;而世尊就是那位受献食者。至于「这段经文之道」,是指从「诸比丘,有这两种遍求」开始,直到「如今不再有后有」这一句为止,整段即为经文开示的范畴。在这里,注疏的解释是:「你们也登上了我与五群比丘所走的道路,圣遍求便是你们的遍求。」然而,通过「诸比丘,我自己是生法……证得了无上离轭安稳涅槃」,一直到「诸比丘,五群比丘众这般被我教导……证得无上离轭安稳涅槃……如今不再有后有」,正是在阐明同一句经文的意义。所以才总结说:「世尊先前所说‘你们也登上了我与五群比丘的道路,圣遍求是你们的遍求’这句话,正是为了显示这唯一的连结而引用的。」显示巴利原文
Antovihāreyeva ahosi daharakumāro viya tehi bhikkhūhi pariharito. Maleti saṃkilese. Gāmato bhikkhūhi nīhaṭaṃ upanītaṃ bhattaṃ etassāti nīhaṭabhatto, tena nīhaṭabhattena bhagavatā. Ettakaṃ kathāmagganti – ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanā’’ti ārabhitvā yāva – ‘‘natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti padaṃ, ettakaṃ desanāmaggaṃ. Kāmañcettha – ‘‘tumhepi mamañceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ ārūḷhā, ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanā’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. Tena pana – ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, attanā jātidhammo samāno…pe… asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ ajjhagamanti, atha kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū mayā evaṃ ovadiyamānā…pe… anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ ajjhagamaṃsu…pe… natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti imasseva suttapadassa attho vibhāvitoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā yaṃ pubbe avaca tumhepi mamañceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ āruḷhā, ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanāti. Imaṃ ekameva anusandhiṃ dassento āharī’’ti.
287 「于出家者」:即便是对出家为比丘的人。由于以贪婪、粘着等方式去受用,所以依于五种欲乐,便成为卑贱遍求。以邪命而活也属于卑贱遍求,为了区别这一点,才特别说明「以五种欲乐」——因为这是指带有欲贪的受用。现在,为了在衣、食、住、药四种资具中拣择出对五欲的染着,故而又说「其中」等。「受用味」:指由于受用资具为缘而生起的喜悦与心悦。不过,这里是取其近似意而称为「味」,并非指真正本质上的味道。若据本质而言,喜悦与心悦的所缘是法尘,而非味尘。「无观察受用」:即缺乏省思的受用,意思是不依观照,而以贪婪、粘着等方式去受用。所谓「执着」,是形容被渴爱紧紧系缚。「陶醉」:指陷入昏昧、愚痴与放逸之中。「沉溺」:即深深陷入,指心进入并粘着于每一个所缘上。「不见过患」:就是不知如此带有欲贪的受用所隐藏的过失。能借此出离、超越那由无观察受用所带来的过患,所以称之为「出离」,也就是指那观察省思的智慧。显示巴利原文
287.Anagāriyānampīti pabbajitānampi. Pañcakāmaguṇavasena anariyapariyesanā hoti gadhitādibhāvena paribhuñjanato. Micchājīvavasenapi anariyapariyesanā hotīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogassa adhippetattā. Idāni catūsu paccayesu kāmaguṇe niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paribhogarasoti paribhogapaccayapītisomanassaṃ. Ayaṃ pana rasasamānatāvasena gahaṇaṃ upādāya ‘‘raso’’ti vutto, na sabhāvato. Sabhāvena gahaṇaṃ upādāya pītisomanassaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ siyā, na rasārammaṇaṃ. Appaccavekkhaṇaparibhogoti paccavekkhaṇarahito paribhogo, idamatthitaṃ anissāya gadhitādibhāvena paribhogoti attho. Gadhitāti taṇhāya baddhā. Mucchitāti mucchaṃ mohaṃ pamādaṃ āpannā. Ajjhogāḷhāti adhiogāḷhā, taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitā. Ādīnavaṃ apassantāti sacchandarāgaparibhoge dosaṃ ajānantā. Apaccavekkhitaparibhogahetuādīnavaṃ nissarati atikkamati etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ.
「罗网堆」:指罗网的聚集。猎人张设罗网时,并非只设一张,也不仅张设于一处,而是在观察种种野兽所经的来路之后,于多处一一设下众多罗网。因此,内心将这些罗网总括为一,而称为「罗网堆」。又或者说,由于网具的网眼数量繁多,故称「罗网堆」。显示巴利原文
Pāsarāsinti pāsasamudāyaṃ. Luddako hi pāsaṃ oḍḍento na ekaṃyeva, na ca ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne oḍḍeti, atha kho taṃtaṃmigānaṃ āgamanamaggaṃ sallakkhetvā tattha tattha oḍḍento bahūyeva oḍḍeti, tasmā te cittena ekato gahetvā ‘‘pāsarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vāgurassa vā pāsapadesānaṃ bahubhāvato ‘‘pāsarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ.
7. 小象迹喻经的注释显示巴利原文
7. Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
288 「白幢」:指白色覆盖、白色庄严之意。先前将「白庄严」理解为马的装饰,此处则是指在战车的轮辐、轮框、车轭等部件上所作的庄严。「如此被说」:即指在《相应部·大品》中,以「以白……」等方式所宣说的那些话。这是为了在不太广大的战场上,便于策马驰骋,而如此宣告。「车兵、御者」:指此二者,或者再加上持兵器者,共为三人。显示巴利原文
288.Setaparivāroti setapaṭicchado, setavaṇṇālaṅkāroti attho. Pubbe pana ‘‘setālaṅkārā’’ti assālaṅkāro gahito, idha cakkapañjarakubbarādirathāvayavesu kātabbālaṅkāro. Evaṃ vuttenāti evaṃ ‘‘setāya suda’’ntiādinā pakārena saṃyuttamahāvagge (saṃ. ni. 5.4) vuttena. Nātimahā yuddhamaṇḍale sañcārasukhatthaṃ. Yodho sārathīti dvinnaṃ, paharaṇadāyakena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā.
绕城右旋而行,是为了令城市庄严。据说,这是那位婆罗门生闻在其继位之后,依其族姓成就而世代相传的习惯。因此,经中才有「从这些天以来」等语。由于这一惯例的影响,城市居民也各自依循而行。「吉祥者」:指那些致力于宣说吉祥祝祷之论的人。「瑞相者」:则是为了求得善的瑞祥。此处之「等」字,囊括了礼赞等行为。「繁荣吉祥成就」:指声誉上的成就与吉祥上的成就,以及眷属的成就与富有光辉的成就,这便是它们的意思。显示巴利原文
Nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti nagarasobhanatthaṃ. Idaṃ kira tassa brāhmaṇassa jāṇussoṇiṭṭhānantaraṃ jātisiddhaṃ paramparāgataṃ cārittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ito ettakehi divasehī’’tiādi. Cārittavasena nagaravāsinopi tathā tathā paṭipajjanti. Puññavādimaṅgalakathane niyuttā māṅgalikā. Suvatthipattanāya sovatthikā. Ādi-saddena vandīādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yasasirisampattiyāti yasasampattiyā sirisampattiyā ca, parivārasampattiyā ceva vibhavasobhāsampattiyā cāti attho.
他在自己该去乞食的时间,朝着城市的方向走去。在“以为智者”这一短语中,“以为”是不变词,与“认为”同义。引入引述词“iti”的含义来显示其意,便解作“认为是智者”。这是以征求对方同意的方式而说的,因此他才会说“还是,不是智者?”当那位婆罗门再次提起“尊者婆蹉姓认为沙门乔达摩是否智辩明达”这一已说的话题时,便用了“以为智者”。所以,这里的意思是:“尊者婆蹉姓,您认为沙门乔达摩是智者,还是不这么认为?若您同意,就请说说看。”显示巴利原文
Nagarābhimukhopāyāsi attano bhikkhācāravelāya. Paṇḍito maññeti ettha maññeti idaṃ ‘‘maññatī’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ nipātapadaṃ. Tassa iti-saddaṃ ānetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘paṇḍitoti maññatī’’ti āha. Anumatipucchāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘udāhu no’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññati bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiya’’nti hi vuttamevatthaṃ puna gaṇhanto ‘‘paṇḍito maññe’’ti āha. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhavaṃ vacchāyano, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ paṇḍitoti maññati, udāhu no’’ti, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṃ kathehīti adhippāyo.
这是在表达:“我算什么呢?这不是我所能了解的范围。”由于问的是“是谁”,而这是缺失因由情况下的转向格,所以解释为“从何而知?”同样地,其意思是:“我能凭哪一点知道呢?能知晓沙门乔达摩智辩明达的那个因由,在我身上并不存在。”只有是佛陀的人才能了知,非佛陀者在任何情况下都无法了解佛陀智慧的力量。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,这实在是微小、卑浅、仅是小小戒行之事,凡夫以此称赞如来时会说的话。诸比丘,其实还有其他甚深、难见、难彻悟的法……诸比丘,正确地随顺真实功德来称赞如来时,应当用这些来说。”(《长部》1.28)在这里,指的是“他必定也是那样的人吧”这一句。“被赞叹者”:意指他因自身功德而被那些值得赞叹的人们所称赞,并非凭借名声,而是依赞美的自性而值得赞美,因此说“具足一切功德”等。“摩尼宝珠”:指转轮圣王的摩尼宝。为了显示在包括天神在内的世间中,他是一切值得赞美者中最值得赞美的,所以取了“或被称赞者”这第二种解释。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ ko nāma, mama avisayo esoti dasseti. Ko cāti hetunissakke paccattavacananti āha ‘‘kuto cā’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘kena kāraṇena jānissāmī’’ti, yena kāraṇena samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jāneyyaṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ mayi natthīti adhippāyo. Buddhoyeva bhaveyya, abuddhassa sabbathā buddhañāṇānubhāvaṃ jānituṃ na sakkāti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattakaṃ, yena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyya (dī. ni. 1.7), atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā …pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.28) ca. Etthāti ‘‘sopi nūnassa tādisovā’’ti etasmiṃ pade. Pasattha pasatthoti pasatthehi attano guṇeheva so pasattho, na tassa kittinā, pasaṃsāsabhāveneva pāsaṃsoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaguṇāna’’ntiādi. Maṇiratananti cakkavattino maṇiratanaṃ. Sadevake loke pāsaṃsānampi pāsaṃsoti dassetuṃ ‘‘pasatthehi vā’’ti dutiyavikappo gahito.
「义利」:能够被成就,所以是「义」;这个义也就是「住」,所以称为「义住」,也就是某种努力带来的果报利益,因此说「义住即是义利」。或者,「义」就是前面所说的特征,这个义作为「住」存在于其中,所以「义住」就是指原因、理由。「象林居住者」:指为了捕捉大象而居住在大象游荡的森林中的人。「未受训练技艺者」:即未学过驯象技术的人,他们仅仅因为看见了宽大散开的足迹,就下了结论:「哇,这真是头大象啊!」而后面的部分,则是世尊所开示的内容。「已学得技艺的人」:指作为捕象林务员而来的人,他了解宽大足迹和那些高大受用处的不可欺瞒性,不会凭这么一点点迹象就下结论,直到亲眼看见那头巨大的雄象,他才做出最终的判断。「智的足迹」:智能在这里被显现出来,也就是刹帝利贤者等,依循律法被善加调伏后证得禅那等境界。这些正是如来这头香象,用说法的智慧所踏下的足印。之所以说四种,是因为在此处,只选取了所调伏众生中,依刹帝利贤者等而分出的四类。显示巴利原文
Araṇīyato attho, so eva vasatīti vasoti atthavaso, tassa tassa payogassa ānisaṃsabhūtaṃ phalanti āha ‘‘atthavasanti atthānisaṃsa’’nti. Attho vā vuttalakkhaṇo vaso etassāti atthavaso, kāraṇaṃ. Nāgavanavāsikoti hatthināgānaṃ vicaraṇavane tesaṃ gahaṇatthaṃ vasanako. Anuggahitasippoti asikkhitahatthisippo āyatavitthatassa padamattassa dassanena ‘‘mahā vata, bho nāgo’’ti niṭṭhāgamanato. Parato pana bhagavatā vuttaṭṭhāne. Uggahitasippo puriso nāgavanikoti āgato āyatavitthatassa padassa uccassa ca nisevitassa byabhicārabhāvaṃ ñatvā tattakena niṭṭhaṃ agantvā mahāhatthiṃ disvāva niṭṭhāgamanato. Ñāṇaṃ pajjati etthāti ñāṇapadāni, khattiyapaṇḍitādīnaṃ dhammavinaye vinītattā vinayehi adhigatajjhānādīni. Tāni hi tathāgatagandhahatthino desanāñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānāni. Cattārīti pana vineyyānaṃ idha khattiyapaṇḍitādivasena catubbidhānaṃyeva gahitattā.
289 于众人中,以智慧敏锐而称为智者,这实是就其能洞察微细义理而言,故说“于通达微细义理上极为敏锐”。这里的“所作”一词,是“已成就”的同义词。“外道之论”:他人依此而宣说,或由此而宣说,故称“外道之论”,即外道的教义。为他所宣说,即是“外道之论”;以争论性的话语摧破他论,便是“破他说”。此二者和合,故经中说“了悟外道之论,及于与他辩论中得成所作之练达”,意即于外道教义及摧破他论方面已达纯熟。“以能贯穿毛发者为喻”,意指如同能贯穿毛发的弓箭手一般,故说“犹如贯穿毛发的弓箭手”。“毛”即是被多方分裂的细丝,也就是名为微缕的毛发。“如击破一般”,譬如以杵等击破瓦罐等物而了知其形状,意思是彻底地破斥种种恶见。为了显示他们心中盘算:“我们将把义理隐藏、遮蔽之后再发问”,即提出构造好的文字之问,才说了“乃至两句”等。用以宣说者,名为“说”,此指过失;所问之对象,名为“问”,此指义理;发问之工具,亦名为显示巴利原文
289. Puggalesu paññāya ca nipuṇatā paṇḍitasamaññā nipuṇatthassa dassanasamatthatāvasenevāti āha ‘‘sukhumaatthantarapaṭivijjhanasamatthe’’ti. Kata-saddo idha nipphannapariyāyo. Pare pavadanti ettha, etenāti parappavādo, parasamayo. Parehi pavadanaṃ parappavādo, viggāhikakathāya paravādamaddanaṃ. Tadubhayampi ekato katvā pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘viññātaparappavāde ceva parehi saddhiṃ katavādaparicaye cā’’ti, parasamayesu paravādamaddanesu ca nipphanneti attho. Vālavedhirūpeti vālavedhipatirūpe. Tenāha ‘‘vālavedhidhanuggahasadise’’ti. Vālanti anekadhā bhinnassa vālassa aṃsusaṅkhātaṃ vālaṃ. Bhindantā viyāti ghaṭādiṃ saviggahaṃ muggarādinā bhindantā viya, diṭṭhigatāni ekaṃsato bhindantāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Atthaṃ guyhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ katvā pucchissāmā’’ti saṅkhataṃ padapañhaṃ pucchantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘dupadampī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vadanti etenāti vādo, doso. Pucchīyatīti pañho, attho. Pucchati etenāti pañho, saddo. Tadubhayaṃ ekato gahetvā āha ‘‘evarūpe pañhe’’tiādi. ‘‘Evaṃ puccheyya, evaṃ vissajjeyyā’’ti ca pucchāvissajjanānaṃ sikhāvagamanaṃ dasseti. Seyyoti uttamo, paramo lābhoti adhippāyo.
既已说明他人因害怕自己的论说被破斥,而不敢问世尊问题之后,现在为进一步说明他们即使无此畏惧,也仍然不敢发问,于是开始了“再者”等论述。心变得净信,他人甚至愿意将自己的身体毫无保留地托付出去,因为那位修慈者,就如同修习限定慈心遍满的人一般。“具足见”,即因具足了应被看见的殊胜特质,由于这是无上的见,故其意为极为端严、非常值得瞻视。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attano vādavidhamanabhayenapi pare bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ na visahantīti vatvā idāni vādavidhamanena vināpi na visahanti evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittaṃ pasīdati pare attano attabhāvampi vissatthaṃ niyyādetukāmā honti odhisakamettāpharaṇasadisattā tassa mettāyanassa. Dassanasampannāti daṭṭhabbatāya sampannā dassanānuttariyabhāvato, ativiya dassanīyāti attho.
“以皈依而为声闻”:通过世间的皈依而成为声闻;至于通过出世间的皈依而成就声闻性,后文将会说到,且那是就出家的情形而言。此处则是就在家的情形来说。不论在家还是出家,都应理解为通过皈依而成为声闻。因为他们这些善男子,是见来世之过患而生怖畏者;同样,那些具足戒行的善男子也是如此。“以稍稍”一词,说明了“令心无执着”这一句的意义。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanavasenasāvakāti lokiyasaraṇagamanena sāvakā, lokuttarasaraṇagamanena pana sāvakattaṃ parato āgamissati, tañca pabbajitavasena vuccati, idha gahaṭṭhavasena, ubhayatthāpi saraṇagamanena sāvakattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Te hi paralokavajjabhayadassāvino kulaputtā, ācārakulaputtāpi tādisā bhavanti. Thokenāti iminā ‘‘manaṃ anassāmā’’ti padassatthaṃ vadati.
290 「被诵出」:因喜悦与激动而迸发,如此被诵出的言语即为「感兴语」。因此说「诵出了感兴语」。「此法」:指以行道正法为前导的证悟正法。「此」,即正以象迹喻方式宣说的法。「至此」:仅凭那位游方者所说的那套说辞。因为即使通过他所说的那套说辞,以象迹喻方式所说的法,由于它是在证得阿拉汉果之后才被开示的,所以本身已是圆满的;但这只是简略之说,并非广说,因此才说「至此,还未通过广说而成为圆满」。如果有人质难说:既然到了广说时象迹喻才圆满,相应的说法已经开始了,那为何不说那位比丘是「善巧的」呢?这便是质难。显示巴利原文
290. Udāharīyati ubbegapītivasenāti, tathā vā udāharaṇaṃ udānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘udāhāraṃ udāharī’’ti. Assa dhammassāti assa paṭipattisaddhammapubbakassa paṭivedhasaddhammassa. Soti hatthipadopamo hatthipadopamabhāvena vuccamāno dhammo. Ettāvatāti ettakena paribbājakena vuttakathāmaggamattena. Kāmaṃ tena vuttakathāmaggenapi hatthipadopamabhāvena vuccamāno dhammo paripuṇṇova arahattaṃ pāpetvā paveditattā, so ca kho saṅkhepato, na vitthāratoti āha ‘‘na ettāvatā vitthārena paripūro hotī’’ti. Yadi yathā vitthārena hatthipadopamo paripūro hoti, tathā desanā āraddhā, atha kasmā kusaloti na vuttoti codanā.
291 「就长度而言」:此中的「pi」字,也表示在高度上短小,因为她们的身体确实矮小。「高」:指身高高者。「依靠处」:或可说为「在此依靠」,即为了搔痒、止痒而进行的摩擦。此处的「依靠」即指为消除痒感而在肩臂部位的摩擦。故说「在肩臂部位摩擦之处」。「高」:即不低,意为具有高度。「牙疏如黑齿者」:即牙齿稀疏、参差不齐者。因此有「牙齿」等语。「因齿疏」:因为稀疏。「被描画者」:即被涂染,像是被刻画过一般。「因如小象牙般」:由于形状像臼齿一样。「或此」中的「vā」字,表示犹豫之后的确定意味,正如在其他地方出现的「这些沙门婆罗门中一切愚者、一切痴者」等语句中的用法一样。显示巴利原文
291.Āyāmatopīti pi-saddena ubbedhenapi rassāti dasseti. Nīcakāyā hi tā honti. Uccāti uccakā. Nisevanaṃ, nisevati etthāti vā nisevitaṃ. Nisevanañcettha kaṇḍuyitavinodanatthaṃ ghaṃsanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khandhappadese ghaṃsitaṭṭhāna’’nti. Uccāti anīcā, ubbedhavantiyoti attho. Kāḷārikāti viraḷadantā, visaṅgatadantāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘dantāna’’ntiādi. Kaḷāratāyāti viraḷatāya. Ārañjitānīti rañjitāni, vilikhitānīti attho. Kaṇerutāyāti kuṭumalasaṇṭhānatāya. Ayaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo saṃsayitanicchayattho yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181).
「如象林一般」:就像有大象、矮象等留下足迹的象林。从最初直到断除五盖的教法,对于如来而言,即是外道游方者等留下足迹之处。「从最初开始」:即从「你听此」这一句开始。如同善巧的象林守护者,修行者通过寻求而获得衡量尺度。「站在顶端」:指站立于此经的末尾。「同样在此处」:即在「正如这样,婆罗门们」等用作譬喻、进行类比的意义处,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Nāgavanaṃviyāti mahāhatthino vāmanikādīnañca padadassanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ nāgavanaṃ viya. Ādito paṭṭhāya yāva nīvaraṇappahānā dhammadesanā tathāgatassa bāhiraparibbājakādīnañca padadassanabhāvato. Ādito paṭṭhāyāti ca ‘‘taṃ suṇāhī’’ti padato paṭṭhāya. Kusalo nāgavaniko viya yogāvacaro pariyesanavasena pamāṇaggahaṇato. Matthake ṭhatvāti imassa suttassa pariyosāne ṭhatvā. Imasmimpi ṭhāneti ‘‘evameva kho brāhmaṇā’’tiādinā upameyyassa atthassa upaññāsanaṭṭhānepi.
这里的“此”只是取了idha这个词而已,并非是需要特别限定的那个idha。正如后面会说的:“在某些地方,它仅仅是用来填充语句而已。”“世界”是依于世间而说的,因为它与“世界”一词处于同格关系。至于另外两个词,应当理解为只是由于邻近其他词语,才依各自所指的事物而说。“处”指某个地方,这里特指因陀娑罗窟。此处也仅是填充语句,因为并不存在所谓“处等所造”的事物。显示巴利原文
Svāyanti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.190) idha-saddamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na yathāvisesitabbaṃ idha-saddaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katthaci padapūraṇamattamevā’’ti. Lokaṃ upādāya vuccati loka-saddena samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttattā. Sesapadadvaye pana saddantarasannidhānamattena taṃ taṃ upādāya vuttatā daṭṭhabbā. Okāsanti kañci padesaṃ indasālaguhāya adhippetattā. Padapūraṇamattameva okāsāpadisanassapi asambhavato.
“如来”等词的特殊含义,已在《根本法门经注》(中部注1.12)和《清净道论》的复注中加以说明。由于如来归属于七种众生之类,所以说“在此,意指众生世间”。为了说明他于哪一类众生、哪一个界域中出现,接着又说“虽在众生世间出现”等。其中,“即于此轮围界中”是指“就在这一世界界中”。经中说:“诸比丘,这是无有是处、无有机会的:在一个世界界中,会有两位阿拉汉、正自觉者,不先不后地出现。”(长部3.161;中部3.129;增支部1.278;导论57;弥兰陀问经5.1.1)在那里,作为出生之处的十千世界界被称为“一个世界界”。而在这里,是针对这一个世界界说“即于此轮围界中”。因为在历经三次结集的三藏佛语中,虽然安立了行境、令境、生境三种境,却没有任何经典说佛在其他轮围界出现,反而有经文表明佛不会在其他处出现。如何说呢?世尊立足于这一世界界而说:“我没有老师,没有与我同等的人”(中部1.285; 2.341; 大品11; 论事405; 弥兰陀问经4.5.11),“我是唯一的正自觉者”(中部1.2)显示巴利原文
Tathāgata-saddādīnaṃ atthaviseso mūlapariyāyaṭṭhakathā(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12) visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu vutto eva. Tathāgatassa sattanikāyantogadhatāya ‘‘idha pana sattaloko adhippeto’’ti vatvā tatthāyaṃ yasmiṃ sattanikāye, yasmiñca okāse uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattaloke uppajjamānopi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷeti imissā eva lokadhātuyā. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.161; ma. ni. 3.129; a. ni. 1.278; netti. 57; mi. pa. 5.1.1) ettha jātikhettabhūtā dasasahassilokadhātu ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyā’’ti vuttā. Idha pana imaṃyeva lokadhātuṃ sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tisso hi saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane visayakhettaṃ āṇākhettaṃ jātikhettanti tividhe khette ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi, na uppajjantīti pana atthi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405; mi. pa. 4.5.11), ekomhi sammāsambuddho’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; kathā. 405; mahāva. 11) evamādīni imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā – ‘‘kiṃ panāvuso, sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭhāhaṃ, bhante, noti vadeyya’’nti vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā’’ti imaṃ suttaṃ dassentena dhammasenāpatinā ca buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti.
在依“善生”等所说的四种选项中,第一种是为了显示极为接近成佛的修行而说的。因为安住于极为接近的修行中的人,由于出现是必然的,所以被称为“出现”,更不用说已安住于修行顶端的人了。第二种是为了显示从能招感成佛的出家开始,便已贴近修行;第三种是为了显示从圆满成佛之法开始,便在修习趋向成佛的修行,因为大士们自从往生兜率天之后,便不再累积菩提资粮。第四种是为了显示从开始准备成佛之法起,既已得决定必定成正觉,出于出现的必然性,智者便可说“佛出现了”。然而,就如“群山耸立,众河流淌”那样,由于耸立、流动等动作持续不断,便用现在时来表达;同样地,基于为了出现而修行这一事是持续不断的,因此在四种选项中皆说为“出现”。所谓“最先出现之状态”,是指在随后将讲述的一切特色之中,最首先展示出的如来出现的这种存在上的殊异。显示巴利原文
Sujātāyātiādinā vuttesu catūsu vikappesu paṭhamo vikappo buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattidassanavasena vutto. Āsannatarāya hi paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuccati uppādassa ekantikattā, pageva paṭipattiyā matthake ṭhito. Dutiyo buddhabhāvāvahapabbajjato paṭṭhāya āsannapaṭipattidassanavasena, tatiyo buddhakaradhammapāripūrito paṭṭhāya buddhabhāvāya paṭipattidassanavasena. Na hi mahāsattānaṃ tusitabhavūpapattito paṭṭhāya bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Catuttho buddhakaradhammasamārambhato paṭṭhāya. Bodhiyā niyatabhāvāpattito pabhuti hi viññūhi ‘‘buddho uppajjatī’’ti vattuṃ sakkā uppādassa ekantikattā, yathā pana ‘‘tiṭṭhanti pabbatā, sandanti nadiyo’’ti tiṭṭhanasandanakiriyānaṃ avicchedamupādāya vattamānapayogo, evaṃ uppādatthāya paṭipajjanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya catūsu vikappesu ‘‘uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti sabbehi upari vuccamānehi visesehi paṭhamaṃ tathāgatassa uppannatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthitāvisesaṃ.
“世尊”一词,即指那位以“如来、阿拉汉”等功德被称扬者。所谓“此世间”,并非仅指面对大众的世界,而是无余含摄一切;为显明此义,故说“含天神”等语。由此而有“今将开显应所说之事”的说法。“因被生”(Pajātattā),是说由于各自的业与烦恼而生。这里摄取五欲界天,是依排除法,因为其他天已被别的词语涵盖。“含天神”一词,可由分解方式解释,整体为一依主释复合词。对六欲界天的摄取,是依就近联想,因为那是天神出生与居住之处。同理,“梵众天等梵天的摄取”也是如此。而摄取“敌人、怨敌、沙门婆罗门”仅为举例,因为“含沙门婆罗门”一词,已包含了非敌人以及尚未完全断尽罪恶的沙门婆罗门。虽然通过“含天神”等修饰,可知“世间”一词是以有情为所缘,因为那些修饰语具有相同的关联所缘;但在“有毛的”、“有翼的”等词中,尽管关联对象不同,依然可以形成这类复合词。为显示此点,所以说“以众生一词而摄取了众生世间”。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.64) yo ‘‘tathāgato araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. Imaṃ lokanti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhāmattaṃ lokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyena. Tattha hi so jāto tannivāsī ca. Brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādivisesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo loka-saddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti.
无色界有情安住于其不动摇的住处时,亦可获得“因辉耀故名为天”的词源解释。因此说:“由‘含天神’一词,已摄无色界天世间。”由此而有“与生于空无边处天的诸天为伴”的说法(增支部 3.117)。“由‘含魔罗’一词,摄取六欲界天世间”,因为那些天特别受魔罗控制。“有色梵天世间已被摄取,无色梵天世间则另作别摄”。“就四众而言”,是指刹帝利等四众。其余的四众,已由含魔罗等词涵盖。剩下的一切众生世间,即是龙、金翅鸟等各类众生。显示巴利原文
Arūpino sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā ‘‘dibbantīti devā’’ti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’nti (a. ni. 3.117). Samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko gahito tassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato. Rūpī brahmaloko gahito arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyādicatuparisavasena. Itarā pana catasso parisā samārakādiggahaṇena gahitā evāti. Avasesasabbasattaloko nāgagaruḷādibhedo.
至此,已部分摄取了世间并显示了关联;今为显示并非仅部分,而是以种种差别全摄世间以作关联,故说“再者,于此”等语。其中,“以最胜为限”,是指以最上之义来判别。因为在五趣中,天界最为殊胜;天界之中,无色界由于“远离烦恼之苦、具足寂静微妙不动之安住、寿命极长”等殊胜,远超余者,最为高胜。“梵天有大神力”等,是就一万世界中的大梵天而说,因为前面讲了“以最胜为限”。“无上”是指最殊胜的九种出世间法。所说次第,是依状态、随顺听者的意乐而说“含天神”等词语的顺序。所谓“以三种方式”,即具有含天、含魔罗、含梵天这三种状况的方式。所谓“在三处”,即在“含天神”等三个短语中。以如是种种方式——即以含天神等方式——便完全含摄了三界。古代的论师们正是这样进行关联的。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgasova lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagabhivijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devalokova seṭṭho. Tatthāpi arūpino ‘‘dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya, santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya, ativiya dīghāyukatāyā’’ti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya itarehi ukkaṭṭhā. Brahmā mahānubhāvotiādiṃ dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ navalokuttaraṃ. Bhāvānukkamo bhāvavasena paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ anukkamo. Tīhākārehīti devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi. Tīsu padesūti ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu. Tena tenākārenāti sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena. Tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti porāṇā panāhūti yojanā.
“以证智”(Abhiññā)是省略了ya音的表达,其义为“已经证知了”,因此说“以证智,即以超胜的智慧了知”。“遮遣推测等”,即是排除推测、譬喻、义准等方法,唯此方为正量。诸佛世尊于一切处皆能现前亲证,正是由于他们在一切处都拥有无碍的智慧与行境。“无上寂灭之乐”指的是果等至之乐。世尊即便伴随着这种乐,有时也会说法,因而说“即便舍弃”(hitvāpi)。世尊在说法时,当某一刻大众喝彩,或他自身随所听闻审察法义时,便以前分限定那一刹那而入果等至;从等至出定后,就从站立之处继续说法,如所限定的时间而说。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇācāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto. Anuttaraṃ vivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Tena vītimissāpi kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti āha ‘‘hitvāpī’’ti. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti.
“教说”,是由说法者所作交代等规则,进行超越的宣说、令人觉悟。这应依教法来理解,因此说“首先,教说即是一首四句偈”等等。而“教诫”,则是依应受教者的情况,如其过失等应受教的状态,以彼分断除等方法进行调伏,这应依行道之法来理解,因此说“以戒、定、观”等。“于诸善法”,指对于道的善法,或对于无过失的法。如此,果法也被包摄其中。戒与见为“最初”,因为它们是超越人法的基础。对于每种含义,以偈颂或经典方式结集而成的文句之流,即是教法,也就是这里所说的“教说”。然而教说的义理,特指戒等,因此说“世尊在说法时……乃至……开示涅槃”。此中,“开示了戒”是以戒这一词总摄了包括资具的戒。“开示了道”同样包含了道及资具,由这两者便毫无遗漏地涵盖了教法的全部真义。以此通过开示戒等,此处“最初善妙”等性质,是就义理而说,正是义理要表达的。所谓“说法者的安立”,意即通过说法的方式,令说法者的形态得以确立。显示巴利原文
Desakāyattena āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanāti sā pariyattidhammavasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāyā’’tiādi. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ tadaṅgavinayādivasena vinayanaṃ sāsananti taṃ paṭipattidhammavasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhivipassanā’’tiādi. Kusalānanti maggakusalānaṃ, kusalānanti vā anavajjānaṃ. Tena phaladhammānampi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Ādibhāvo sīladiṭṭhīnaṃ tammūlakattā uttarimanussadhammānaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe kathāvadhisaddappabandho gāthāvasena suttavasena ca vavatthito pariyattidhammo, yo idheva ‘‘desanā’’ti vutto. Tassa pana attho visesena sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento…pe… nibbānaṃ dassetī’’ti. Tattha sīlaṃ dassetvāti sīlaggahaṇena sasambhāraṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ. Tathā maggaggahaṇena sasambhāro maggoti tadubhayena anavasesato pariyattiatthaṃ pariyādiyati. Tenāti sīlādidassanena. Atthavasena hi idha desanāya ādikalyāṇādibhāvo adhippeto. Kathikasaṇṭhitīti kathikassa saṇṭhānaṃ kathanavasena samavaṭṭhānaṃ.
“他并非教导有义”:由于那种教导缺乏导向出离的意义,故他不教导有义。或者,“与单一音节等相应”:指在松音等种种音节中,仅以一种方式、或以两种方式与音节结合而组成语言,如泰米尔语;或在一切处皆无振动音,如吉拉塔语;或在一切处皆带送气音,如耶槃那语;或在一切处皆伴随鼻音,如波斯等蛮族语。所有这些语言,都只是依某一部分音节而转起,音节不圆满,因此称为“无音节”。“不涂抹”:即不覆藏、不毁坏,或不遗漏的意思。显示巴利原文
Na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Ekabyañjanādiyuttā vāti sithilādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāreneva, dvippakāreneva vā byañjanena yuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya. Sabbattha niroṭṭhaṃ katvā vattabbatāya sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya. Sabbattheva vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā yavanabhāsā viya. Sabbattheva sānusāratāya sabbaniggahitabyañjanā vā pārasikādimilakkhabhāsā viya. Sabbāpesā ekadesabyañjanavaseneva pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuttā. Amakkhetvāti apalicchetvā avināsetvā, ahāpetvāti vā attho.
世尊为使人了知某义,即使仅开示一偈、一句,也能以彼开示将彼义完全圆满地阐发,故说:“乃至零星的教导,亦无不圆满。”“以拔济为性而安住之心”,即心立足于从杂染分、从轮回之苦中济拔出来的本性而安住。因此,正因为在这里将包含三学的全部教法都称为“梵行”,所以把与“梵行”同位的诸词连接起来以显其义,而说:“他开示法……乃至……阐扬。此处应如此理解其含义。”显示巴利原文
Bhagavā yamatthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ekagāthampi ekavākyampi deseti, tamatthaṃ tāya desanāya sabbaso paripuṇṇameva katvā deseti, evaṃ sabbatthāti āha ‘‘ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti saṃkilesapakkhato vaṭṭadukkhato ca uddharaṇasabhāvāvaṭṭhitena cittena. Tasmāti yasmā sikkhāttayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ idha ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetaṃ, tasmā. Brahmacariyanti iminā samānādhikaraṇāni sabbapadāni yojetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti āha.
唯有彻底远离慢心者,方能在教法中端正而行,而非有慢者,故说“已摧慢故”。“因慢增胜故”,谓慢频频生起。依财物、健康等所起的骄逸,因所缘不固定,尚易断除;而种姓骄与明骄则不然。纵然是刹帝利、婆罗门种姓者,乃至出家人,也都会依凭种姓与明而生起慢,此慢极难断除,故说“多数人……皆生慢”。“因劣种姓故”,即由于低劣的种姓。“不能安住”,也就是不能善加清净、善护于戒,因为是以戒而安住于教法中。或者,“安住”指以证悟圣谛而安住于出世间的住处。事实上,多数具足亲依止者,皆是善生之人,而非恶生之人。显示巴利原文
Dūrasamussāritamānasseva sāsane sammāpaṭipatti sambhavati, na māna jātikassāti āha ‘‘nihatamānattā’’ti. Ussannattāti bahulabhāvato. Bhogārogyādivatthukā madā suppaheyyā honti nimittassa anavaṭṭhānato’ na tathā kulavijjāmadāti khattiyabrāhmaṇakulīnānaṃ pabbajitānampi jātivijjā nissāya mānajappanaṃ duppajahanti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena hi…pe… mānaṃ karontī’’ti . Vijātitāyāti nihīnajātitāya. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkontīti suvisuddhiṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkonti. Sīlavasena hi sāsane patiṭṭhāti. Patiṭṭhātunti vā saccapaṭivedhena lokuttarāya patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhātuṃ. Yebhuyyena hi upanissayasampannā sujātā eva honti, na dujjātā.
“清净”:因显示了贪等烦恼的究竟断除,故以无随烦恼而全然清净。“获得信”:即以凡夫之信而信解。有智者先把握法之成就,信方确立,因其依法为量、依法净信故。“夫妻居住”:说到“夫妻”,通常仅理解为家主与主妇二人。然而,若一位男子有多位妻子,又当如何说?为显示即使仅与一位妻子同住已是拥挤,故特说为“二”。盖贪等有“执取”义,田宅等有“障碍”义;同时,它们又是贪尘垢等的来处与生起处,故二释义通,唯文句有别。“不黏着”:即不执取、无系缚的状态。如是,以不善与善的转起为依处,显示了居家拥挤、出家空旷;今更就善的转起,复明其如何成为非处与处,故说“此外……”等。显示巴利原文
Parisuddhanti rāgādīnaṃ accantameva pahānadīpanato nirupakkilesatāya sabbaso visuddhaṃ. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti pothujjanikasaddhāvasena saddahati. Viññujātikānañhi dhammasampattigahaṇapubbikā saddhāsiddhi dhammapamāṇadhammappasannabhāvato. Jāyampatikā vasantīti kāmaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti vutte gharasāmikagharasāminivasena dvinnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ viññāyati. Yassa pana purisassa anekā pajāpatiyo honti, tattha kiṃ vattabbaṃ? Ekāyapi tāya vāso sambādhoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dve’’ti vuttaṃ. Rāgādinā sakiñcanaṭṭhena, khettavatthuādinā sapalibodhaṭṭhena. Rāgarajādīnaṃ āgamanapathatāpi uppajjanaṭṭhānatā evāti dvepi vaṇṇanā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Alagganaṭṭhenāti asajjanaṭṭhena appaṭibaddhabhāvena. Evaṃ akusalakusalappavattīnaṃ ṭhānabhāvena gharāvāsapabbajjānaṃ sambādhabbhokāsataṃ dassetvā idāni kusalappavattiyā eva aṭṭhānaṭhānabhāvena tesaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「略说」者:即不逐词拆解,而是概括地解释义理。「即使一日」:哪怕仅仅一日。「无缺」:指不犯乃至最轻微的恶作罪,令戒行圆满无缺。「不被烦恼垢所染」:指不被贪爱等烦恼垢所染污。「穿着」:即下身穿衣与上身穿衣。「居家」:是‘agāra’省略后分音节而成之词,表示能令居家得以增长的种种利益。「财聚」:指财富的堆积与聚集。「以系缚义」:因对子女、孙辈等的爱著而形成一种限定的联结,这就是系缚之义。「亲戚」:是指那些被称为‘这些是我们的’的人。「轮转」:指如同祖父、父亲、儿子这般相继流转,这就是轮转之义。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā saṅkhepato atthavaṇṇanā. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā. Kilesamalena amalīnanti taṇhāsaṃkilesādivasena asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ. Bhogakkhandhoti bhogarāsi bhogasamudāyo. Ābandhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘putto nattā’’tiādinā pemavasena saparicchedaṃ sambandhanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī. Pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivattanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo.
292 「学」字虽是通用词,但因紧邻「共活命」一词,又须顾及下文将阐述的差别义,故被确定为特指的词。因此解释说:「诸比丘的、名为增上戒的学。」「学」:因应当学习,故称为学。「共活命」:谓在其中一同活命。「以修学状态」:指以修学及共活命的修学状态。「圆满学者」:指于学处能圆满防护者。「不违越共活命」:指不违越世尊所宣说之教语,即「名身、句身、字身、音节身」的含义。此二者即被称为「修学」。其中,不违越共活命是圆满学处的因缘,因为依凭它,从最初乃至证得道果之前的一切学处方得以圆满。显示巴利原文
292. Sāmaññavācīpi sikkhā-saddo sājīva-saddasannidhānato upari vuccamānavisesāpekkhāya ca visesaniviṭṭhova hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā’’ti. Sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā. Saha ājīvanti etthāti sājīvo. Sikkhanabhāvenāti sikkhāya sājīve ca sikkhanabhāvena. Sikkhaṃ paripūrentoti sīlasaṃvaraṃ paripūrento. Sājīvañca avītikkamantoti – ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 39) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ avītikkamanto hutvāti attho. Idameva ca dvayaṃ ‘‘sikkhana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha sājīvānatikkamo sikkhāpāripūriyā paccayo. Tato hi yāva maggā sikkhāpāripūrī hotīti.
「舍断」:即通过受持而彻底抛弃。以「从舍断之时……即远离者」这一表述,显示了舍断与远离是同时发生的。若如此,为何「舍断后」被说成是前时呢?这是依据应当如此理解的方式来表述的。对于诸法,当考察其缘与缘所生的关系时,即便是同时俱生的法,在把握时也可依照缘与缘所生的状态来显示,而这种把握的展现便有前后次第。因此,对于作为缘的惭、愧、智等法,其舍断的作用被说为前时;对于作为缘所生的诸离,其远离的作用被说为后时。所以经中说「舍断后成为远离者」。或者,「舍断」是依受持的那一刹那而说,「远离」是依后来不再违犯的事物和合的那一刹那而说。显示巴利原文
Pajahitvāti samādānavasena pariccajitvā. Pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya…pe… viratovāti etena pahānassa viratiyā ca samānakālataṃ dasseti . Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pahāyā’’ti kathaṃ purimakālaniddesoti? Tathā gahetabbataṃ upādāya. Dhammānañhi paccayapaccayuppannabhāve apekkhite sahajātānampi paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena gahaṇaṃ purimapacchimabhāveneva hotīti gahaṇapavattiākāravasena paccayabhūtesu hirottappañāṇādīsu pahānakiriyāya purimakālavohāro, paccayuppannāsu ca viratīsu viramaṇakiriyāya aparakālavohāro ca hotīti ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pahāyāti vā samādānakālavasena vuttaṃ, pacchā vītikkamitabbavatthusamāyogavasena paṭiviratoti. Pahāyāti vā –
摧破黑暗之蕴,此日轮升起;
以光芒普照,辉耀而升腾。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nihantvāna tamokhandhaṃ, uditoyaṃ divākaro; Vaṇṇapabhāya bhāseti, obhāsetvā samuggato’’ti ca. (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.578) –
正如这些例子,应当理解为同时发生。又或者,「杀生」:依此而杀害有情,故称杀生;它是导致杀生的因,是以无惭、无愧、愚痴、害意等为先导,以思心所为主的杂染法。通过受持而舍断此杂染法。「从那时……唯是离者」:这一限定词显示,此种离在时间等方面没有任何限制。就像其他受持离的人,也可能因心不坚定,或为了利养、活命等原因而毁坏所持,而此人则不会如此。他从舍断的那一时起,便成为内在的离者。对于「舍断不与取」等文句,也应依此方式理解其义。显示巴利原文
Evamādīsu viya samānakālavasena veditabbo. Atha vā pāṇo atipātīyati etenāti pāṇātipāto, pāṇaghātahetubhūto ahirikānottappadosamohavihiṃ sādiko cetanāpadhāno saṃkilesadhammo, taṃ samādānavasena pahāya. Tato…pe… viratova hotīti avadhāraṇena tassā viratiyā kālādivasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Yathā hi aññe samādinnaviratikāpi anavaṭṭhitacittatāya lābhajīvikādihetu samādānaṃ bhindanteva, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya orato viratoti. Adinnādānaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
“杖”(daṇḍa):即杖击、杖打。在此,杵等打击的特殊器具也被理解为打击的特殊器具,故说“除了杖,其余一切资具”皆放下。为表明远离名为“杖”的恼害他人之行,经中说放下“杖与刀”,因此说“为了伤害他人”等,因为那是恼害的状态,也就是侵害的状态。“具惭者”(lajjī):这里应知,提到惭时,愧也已包含其中。因为,若没有对恶的厌离和对罪的怖畏,便谈不上无羞耻。或者,对于因尊重法、以法为自依而成为自增上的人,他会行惭的作用;这样的人自然也会以世间增上的愧来起作用,这是不言而喻的,因此只说“具惭者”。为何说“具足慈心”(dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno)?难道“dayā”一词不是在“无悲悯者”(adayāpanno)等语境中用来指“悲”(karuṇā)吗?确实如此。然而,这里的“dayā”一词,在含摄“保护”的意味而起用时,既用于慈(mettā),也用于悲(karuṇā);而在此处,是就其于“慈”上的运用而说。显示巴利原文
Daṇḍanaṃ daṇḍanipātanaṃ daṇḍo. Muggarādipaharaṇavisesopi idha paharaṇavisesoti adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇa’’nti. Daṇḍanasaṅkhātassa paraviheṭhanassa parivajjitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ daṇḍasatthānaṃ nikkhepavacananti āha ‘‘parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādi. Vihiṃsanabhāvatoti vibādhanabhāvato. Lajjīti ettha vuttalajjāya ottappampi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi pāpajigucchanapāputtāsarahitaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthi. Yassa vā dhammagarutāya dhammassa ca attādhīnattā attādhipatibhūtā lajjākiccakārī, tassa lokādhipatibhūtaṃ ottappaṃ kiccakaranti vattabbameva natthīti ‘‘lajjī’’icceva vuttaṃ. Dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpannoti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dayā-saddo ‘‘adayāpanno’’tiādīsu karuṇāya vattatīti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana dayā-saddo anurakkhaṇatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya ca karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto. Mijjati siniyhatīti mettā, sā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, mettaṃ cittaṃ etassa atthīti mettacitto, tassa bhāvo mettacittatā, mettāicceva attho.
“悲悯一切众生”(Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī):以此显示这种远离乃以有情为对象,无有限制。“众生”(Pāṇabhūta):即众生生类。“悲悯者”(Anukampaka):即具悲悯之人。然而,由于慈(mettā)是悲(karuṇā)的殊胜条件,故解释说:“即以彼具悲悯的状态”(tāya eva dayāpannatāya)。如此,那些令远离杀生得以成就的法——惭、慈、悲等,其具备的状态已被显示,应知这是与《鹧鸪本生》中的法相随顺的。这里有人问:为何“离杀生”(pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya)用了单数形式?难道不是指远离对一切无余有情的杀害吗?经文确实说“悲悯一切众生而住”(sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati)。正因为如此,注释书中才用了复数形式“以利益悲悯一切众生”(sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako)。确实如此。不过,在经文中,依于“有生命”的共性,开头用了单数;由于……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti etena tassā viratiyā sattavasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Pāṇabhūteti pāṇajāte. Anukampakoti karuṇāyanako. Yasmā pana mettā karuṇāya visesapaccayo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tāya eva dayāpannatāyā’’ti. Evaṃ yehi dhammehi pāṇātipātā virati sampajjati, tehi lajjāmettākaruṇādhammehi samaṅgibhāvo dassito, saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakadhammehīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etthāha – kasmā ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’ti ekavacananiddeso kato, nanu niravasesānaṃ pāṇānaṃ atipātato virati idhādhippetā? Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharatī’’ti. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako’’ti puthuvacananiddesoti? Saccametaṃ, pāṇabhāvasāmaññavasena panettha pāḷiyaṃ ādito ekavacananiddeso kato, sabbasaddasannidhānena puthuttaṃ viññāyamānamevāti sāmaññaniddesaṃ akatvā bhedavacanicchāvasena dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ bahuvacanavasena attho vutto. Kiñca bhiyyo – sāmaññato saṃvarasamādānaṃ, tabbisesato saṃvarabhedoti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ vacanabhedo katoti veditabbaṃ. Viharatīti vuttappakāro hutvā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā attabhāvaṃ harati pavattetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘iriyati pāletī’’ti.
为了说明“不仅是通过身业和语业的努力才算是‘不与取’,而且连对物品的占有欲望和所缘对象都已舍弃”,所以经文说“甚至以心”(cittenapi)等。「盗」(thena):指行偷盗的人,就是贼。「成为清净者」(sucibhūtena):这里“成为清净”,是由于所讨论的语境以及与邻近词语的关联,意指远离偷盗的染污,因此说“正是由于不偷盗的状态而成为清净者”(athenattāyeva sucibhūtena)。此处虽然经文中没有明文说“有惭者、有悲悯者”等,但应该知道,从义理的关联上或从意义上,其实已经表达了这些。正如惭、愧等法是断除杀生的殊胜条件,它们对于断除不与取同样是殊胜条件,所以也应该把相关经文引来解说。此中道理对于后续的各项同样适用。或者可以这样看:“成为清净者”这句话,本身就已经表达了具备惭、愧等品质,以及断除了无惭等不善法,因此才没有另外说“有惭者”等。显示巴利原文
Na kevalaṃ kāyavacīpayogavasena ādānameva, atha kho ākaṅkhapissa pariccattavatthuvisayāvāti dassetuṃ ‘‘cittenapī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Theneti theyyaṃ karotīti theno, coro. Sucibhūtenāti ettha sucibhāvo adhikārato saddantarasannidhānato ca theyyasaṃkilesaviramaṇanti āha ‘‘athenattāyeva sucibhūtenā’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’tiādi na vuttaṃ, adhikāravasena pana atthato vā vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi lajjādayo pāṇātipātapahānassa visesapaccayo, evaṃ adinnādānapahānassapīti, tasmā sāpi pāḷi ānetvā vattabbā. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Atha vā sucibhūtenāti etena hirottappādīhi samannāgamo, ahirikādīnañca pahānaṃ vuttamevāti ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「非圣行」(aseṭṭhacariya):即非圣者的行为,或非殊胜之行。「淫欲」(methuna):指如前文所说,类似于成双成对的那种行为,称为“成对”(methuna),也就是所说的恶行。「远离淫欲」(ārācārī methunā):由此应知,这也显示了远离经中所说七种与淫欲相关的结缚。即如:“婆罗门,于此有一类人……他确实不与女人成就二二交会,但接受女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、揉捏,对此爱乐、希求并由此获得满足”等等。显示巴利原文
Aseṭṭhacariyanti aseṭṭhānaṃ cariyaṃ, aseṭṭhaṃ vā cariyaṃ. Mithunānaṃ vuttākārena sadisabhūtānaṃ ayanti mithuno, yathāvutto durācāro. Ārācārī methunāti etena – ‘‘idha brāhmaṇa, ekacco…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so tadassādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) vuttā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogāpi paṭivirati dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「以真实连接真实」(saccena saccaṃ):将前面的语言真实与后面的语言真实相连接,因为若夹杂丝毫不实,便会造成断裂。所以经文说“因为那个人……”等。
「像姜黄的颜色」(haliddirāgo viya):意思是不牢固、不稳定。这里应当理解,是由于他言论上的立场不稳固,才比喻为姜黄的颜色,并非指这个人本身如此。
「如同石刻一般」(pāsāṇalekhā viyā):此处的道理也一样。
「信」(saddhā):从词源上说,“信在此活动、运作”(saddhā ayati pavattati ettha),所以称为“信处”(saddhāyo);“信处”本身即成为“可信的”(saddhāyiko),就像“应被调伏的”(venayiko)的用法那样;或者说,应当由信去亲近的,就是“可信的”(saddhāyiko),意为“值得相信的”(saddheyya)。这里的意思是,他变成了要为自己所说的话负责的状态,也就是成为了说虚诳语的人。显示巴利原文
Saccena saccanti purimena vacīsaccena pacchimaṃ vacīsaccaṃ sandahati asaccena anantarikattā. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Haliddirāgo viya na thirakato hotīti ettha kathāya anavaṭṭhitabhāvena haliddirāgasadisatā veditabbā, na puggalassa. Pāsāṇalekhā viyāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saddhā ayati pavattati etthāti saddhāyo, saddhāyo eva saddhāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8), saddhāya vā ayitabbo saddhāyiko, saddheyyoti attho. Vattabbataṃ āpajjativisaṃvādanatoti adhippāyo.
「随助者」(anuppadātā):指随力给予援助的人,或以随顺的方式给予帮助的人。那么,是随顺什么、给予什么呢?由于经文中说“和合者”(sahitānaṃ)”,便知道这是针对连结而言的。因此说“连结的随助者”(sandhānānuppadātā)。然而,以随顺的方式来给予连结,即是安立、守护或使之坚固,所以才说“看见两人和合”(dve jane samagge disvā)等。
「园」(ārāma):人们在此欢喜、游乐之处,即值得喜爱的地方,故称为“园”(ārāma)。不过,即使没有前缀“ā-”,这个意义也能成立,因此说“‘乐于和合者’(samaggarāmo)也是经文,在这里意义相同。”显示巴利原文
Anuppadātāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.198) anubalappadātā, anuvattanavasena vā padātā. Kassa pana anuvattanaṃ padānañcāti? ‘‘Sahitāna’’nti vuttattā sandhānassāti viññāyati. Tenāha ‘‘sandhānānuppadātā’’ti. Yasmā pana anuvattanavasena sandhānassa padānaṃ ādhānaṃ, rakkhaṇaṃ vā daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dve jane samagge disvā’’tiādi. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo, ramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Yasmā pana ā-kārena vināpi ayamattho labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho’’ti.
肢节无瑕,以白为覆,唯有一辐之车正在运转;
请看,无恼者正在前来,已断除流转,已脱离束缚。」(saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65; peṭako. 25; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo, ekāro vattatī ratho; Anīghaṃ passa āyantaṃ, chinnasotaṃ abandhana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65; peṭako. 25;dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9) –
在这首偈颂中,“戒”被称为“无过失之肢”(nelaṅga)。正因如此,质多居士说:“尊者!‘无过失之肢’,即是‘戒’的别名。”(saṃ. ni. 4.347; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9)
“柔和”(sukumārā):指不粗鲁,故而柔软。
“属于城者”(purassa esā):此处的“城”(pura)一词,应理解为指居住在城中的人,正如“村庄来了”(gāmo āgato)等用法一样。因此注释说“城市居民的”(nagaravāsīnaṃ)。
“可意”(manāpā):能使心满意、令心增长(manaṃ appāyati vaḍḍheti),故称可意。因此解释为“令心增长的”(cittavuddhikarā)。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya. Sīlañhettha ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – citto gahapati, ‘‘nelaṅganti kho, bhante, sīlānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.347; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9). Sukumārāti apharusatāya mudukā. Purassa esāti ettha pura-saddo tannivāsīvācako daṭṭhabbo ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9) viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nagaravāsīna’’nti. Manaṃ appāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittavuddhikarā’’ti.
“适时说者”等语,显示了远离杂秽语者的修行方式。因为即使是有意义的话语,若加在不恰当的时机,也可能没有利益,反而类似于告知无义的话,所以舍弃杂秽语的人应当避免在不适当的时间说话,故称“适时说者”。再者,即使在适当时机,也应避免虚假不实的话,因为虚假会带来两种无利益,故称“真实说者”。同时,即使说真实的话,也应当只说那些能成就此世与他世利益的话,为显示此义,故称“有义说者”。又,即使说有利益的话,也不应仅仅依附于世间法而说,而应立足于出世间法来宣说,为显示此理,故称“法说者”。进而,为了显示那种利益如何立足于出世间法,故称“律说者”。因为,依五种防护律与五种断律而说的利益,是证得涅槃的因,所以它立足于出世间法。如此,唯有具足这些功德特质的利益之说,在具备说法善巧时才会显得美妙,并能成办其作用,否则便不然,因此说“说有价值之语”。现在,为了阐明这种说法善巧,紧接着说“应时”等。这就是说,以提问等方式,在与言谈对象应对时,审察一向记等记答的差别,建立原因的例证,显示巴利原文
Kālavādītiādi samphappalāpāpaṭiviratassa paṭipattidassanaṃ. Atthasaṃhitāpi hi vācā ayuttakālapayogena atthāvahā na siyāti anatthaviññāpanavācaṃ anulometi, tasmā samphappalāpaṃ pajahantena akālavāditā pariharitabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādī’’ti. Kāle vadantenapi ubhayānatthasādhanato abhūtaṃ parivajjetabbanti āha ‘‘bhūtavādī’’ti. Bhūtañca vadantena yaṃ idhaloka-paraloka-hitasampādakaṃ, tadeva vattabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthaṃ vadantenapi lokiyadhammasannissitameva avatvā lokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vattabbanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dhammavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā ca attho lokuttaradhammasannissito hoti, taṃdassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannañhi saṃvaravinayānaṃ, pañcannañca pahānavinayānaṃ vasena vuccamāno attho nibbānādhigamahetubhāvato lokuttaradhammasannissito hotīti. Evaṃ guṇavisesayuttova attho vuccamāno desanākosalle sati sobhati, kiccakaro ca hoti, na aññathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ desanākosallaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kālenā’’tiādimāha. Pucchādivasena hi otiṇṇavācāvatthusmiṃ ekaṃsādibyākaraṇavibhāgaṃ sallakkhetvā ṭhapanāhetuudāharaṇaṃ saṃsandanādiṃ taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ vibhāventiyā parimitaparicchinnarūpāya vipulatara-gambhīrodāra-paramattha-vitthārasaṅgāhikāya kathāya ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ pare yāthāvato dhamme patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘desanākusalo’’ti vuccatīti evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
293 这样,依顺序阐明了七条根本学处之后,在后面的开示中虽还有断除贪欲、防护根门、具念正知、策励警寤等内容,但为了专门说明这些,便避开前面已说,仅以分解行仪戒的方式令圣典流传。为解释其义,于是说“从伤害种子村和已生村”等。在此,“种子村”:种子的集合、群体,即是种子村。“已生村”:已生、已有、已长成的树、灌木、藤等植物的群体,称为已生村。然而,树木等由于无心,难道就不具有命吗?无心的状态,可从没有动作、被砍后仍能再生、有不同种类、不属于四生而得知。但是,增长也见于珊瑚、石头、盐等,所以增长并非它们有命的理由;它们对境界的执取也仅是一种假想,如同梦中的想象等,同样还有渴望等。既然如此,为何要求远离伤害种子村与已生村呢?因为这是契合沙门的,也是为了保护住在那些树木等中的有情。因此他说:“愚人(凡夫之人)对树有命想……”显示巴利原文
293. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā satta mūlasikkhāpadāni vibhāvetvā satipi abhijjhādipahānaindriyasaṃvarasatisampajaññajāgariyānuyogādike uttaradesanāyaṃ vibhāvetuṃ taṃ pariharitvā ācārasīlasseva vibhajanavasena pāḷi pavattāti tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bījānaṃ gāmo samūho bījagāmo. Bhūtānaṃ jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ rukkhagacchalatādīnaṃ samūho bhūtagāmo. Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato chinne viruhanato visadisajātikabhāvato catuyoniapariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca nesaṃ parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādenaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirati icchitāti? Samaṇasāruppato tannivāsisattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha – ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisa manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi (pāci. 89).
「根种子」一语:根本即是种子,故称为根种子;或以根为种子者,亦称为根种子。对其余各项,道理亦然。枝干种子就是节种子。由于在众缘和合时能产生相似之果,成为殊胜之因,「种子」一词遂约定于能生长、具有坚实果核的事物上。依义成就,此词也在某些根等事物上转用;为遮除将根等视为种子,故另加一「种子」字以作区别,称为「种子种子」,犹如说「色色」「苦苦」。然而,在此除去「种子村与已生村」之后,为何只指出「种子村」呢?不应作此理解。我们不是说过:“根本即是种子,称为根种子;或以根为种子者,亦称为根种子”吗?其中,前分指示「种子村」,后分指示「已生村」。这根种子有两种:即根种子与有根种子者,应知这是以共名说明,或以单存余法而指示。因此他说「五种」等。青草、树木等,即新鲜草类与新鲜树木等。以「等」字兼摄药草、灌木、藤等。显示巴利原文
Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlabījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhaṇasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bījasaddo tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bīja-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti ‘‘rūparūpaṃ (visuddhi. 2.449), dukkhadukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.327; 5.165; netti. 11) ca yathā. Kasmā panettha bījagāmabhūtagāmaṃ uddharitvā bījagāmo eva niddiṭṭhoti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumha – ‘‘mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlabījaṃ etassātipi mūlabīja’’nti. Tattha purimena bījagāmo niddiṭṭho, dutiyena bhūtagāmo, duvidhopesa mūlabījañca mūlabījañca mūlabījanti sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā uddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘pañcavidhassā’’tiādi. Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassāti allatiṇassa ceva allarukkhādikassa ca. Ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
「一食」指一餐饭,有此一食习惯者名为「一食者」。但此人亦可能有夜食,为遮除此事,故说「禁夜食」。纵使如此,他仍可能在午后进食而还是一食者,为遮除此事,便说「远离非时食」。从曙光出现时起,直至日中,这段时间是佛陀等圣者们所常行、习行的进食时间,此外的时间即称为「非时」。在注释书中,由于第二词已遮除了夜食,故特别说明:“过了日中之后,直到日落之间所吃的食物,名为非时食。”显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ bhattaṃ ekabhattaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti ekabhattiko. So pana rattibhojanenapi siyāti tannivattanatthaṃ āha ‘‘rattūparato’’ti. Evampi aparaṇhabhojīpi siyā ekabhattikoti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘virato vikālabhojanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aruṇuggamanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dutiyapadena rattibhojanassa paṭikkhittattā ‘‘atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.
以「诸恶莫作」等为首所开示的世尊教法,与能令极生贪染的观看舞蹈等事不相符合,故称为「与教法不相合」。自己跳舞,或令他人跳舞等,由于同属舞蹈之性,在圣典中只用了一个「舞」字来统摄。同样,也以一个「歌」字、一个「乐」字来统摄,因此说「以跳舞、令跳舞等方式」。这里的「等」字,还包含了唱歌、令唱歌、演奏、令演奏等。在此,「见」也包含了「听」,这是依据以余类代整体之理。或者,随五识各自缘境的特性来说,听闻也可用「见」略说,故只称为「见」。因此说:“以五识不如实了知任何法,仅除了最初的转向。”有时,听不杂乱的歌是许可的,所以特别说「从杂乱的见」。正如在《胜义灯》小部注释中所说:“与法相应的歌咏是许可的,与歌咏相应的法则不许可。”任何的花,无论编结与否,皆不许可。香类,即具有香的物品。即使对彼也说「任何」,故不论粉碎或未粉碎,任何形式的涂香等皆不许可。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124) bhagavato sāsanaṃ accantarāguppattiyā naccādidassanaṃ na anulometīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa ananulomattā’’ti. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ, parehi payojāpiyamānañca naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññena pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddena cāti āha ‘‘naccananaccāpanādivasenā’’ti. Ādi-saddena gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni saṅgayhanti. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena . Yathāsakaṃ visayassa ālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasabbhāvato ‘‘dassanā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Avisūkabhūtassa gītassa savanaṃ kadāci vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘visūkabhūtā dassanā’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paramatthajotikāyaṃ khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ gītaṃ vaṭṭati, gītūpasaṃhito dhammo na vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yaṃ kiñcīti ganthitaṃ vā aganthitaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhajātanti gandhajātikaṃ. Tassapi ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti vacanato pisitassa apisitassapi yassa kassaci vilepanādi na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
“高”是与“高”同义的另一词。“床”即“卧于此”之意。高床与大床,指不适合沙门的床铺,故说为“超出规定尺寸、不得使用的铺设物”。此处座具亦应视为被床所包含。由于所依处被禁止时,依托于此的行为也随之被禁止,因此只说“高床大床”。然而,就实际意义而言,应了知这是指远离坐卧于这类床座的行为。或者,依“高床、大床”及“高床大床”之义,如“以名色为缘而有六处”一般,用一体余法来作此表述;又或者,因先有坐才有卧,故以床来包含座亦是可以理解的。显示巴利原文
Uccāti ucca-saddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ mahāsayanañca samaṇasārupparahitaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘pamāṇātikkantaṃ akappiyattharaṇa’’nti. Āsanañcettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārā kiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā uccāsayanamahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayananti etasmiṃ atthe ekasesena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1), āsanakiriyāpubbakattā vā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇena āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
“木钱”等,指那些流通使用的货币之类。此处“等”(iti)字即表示此类物品。从他人令执取、或对放置之物欣然接受的行为之中,即含有“受持”的意义,因此说“他不自受持,不令受持,不接受放置之物”。又或者,受持有三种:身、语、意。其中,身之受持即亲自执取,语之受持即令他人执取,意之受持即欣然接受。将此三种受持总括而言,即为“受持”,故而说“他不自受持……”。此理亦适用于“受持生谷”等处。由于野麦等副谷已被包含在稻等根谷之中,故说为“七种”。世尊曾言:“比丘们,我允许五种兽药:熊脂、鱼脂、鳄鱼脂、猪脂、驴脂”,这是特别开许的。然而对于这些,因世尊说“应时受持”,故受持是许可的。当有因缘时,可作特别开许,因此说“除了特别允许的”。显示巴利原文
Dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchantīti iti-saddena evaṃpakāre dasseti. Aññehi gāhāpane upanikkhittasādiyane ca paṭiggahaṇattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatī’’ti. Atha vā tividhaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasāti. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyananti tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhātī’’tiādi. Esa nayo āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇātiādīsupi. Nīvārādiupadhaññassa sāliādimūladhaññantogadhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavidhassā’’ti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sukaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ nāma, tassa pana ‘‘kāle paṭiggahita’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā paṭiggahaṇaṃ vaṭṭati. Sati paccayeti āha ‘‘aññatra odissa anuññātā’’ti.
“色欺”:以形貌行骗,即凭借相似的外表欺骗。“肢欺”:以身体的部分行骗,即利用自身的肢体欺骗。“执欺”:以执取的方式行骗。“覆藏欺”:隐藏起来行骗。“压迫”即挤压;“于前分压迫”应联系上下文来理解。显示巴利原文
Sarūpena vañcanaṃ rūpakūṭaṃ, patirūpena vañcanāti attho. Aṅgena attano sarīrāvayavena vañcanaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ. Gahaṇavasena vañcanaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ. Paṭicchannaṃ katvā vañcanaṃ paṭicchannakūṭaṃ. Akkamatīti nippīḷeti, pubbabhāge akkamatīti sambandho.
「心脏」指升等量器的内部。用升等量器称量芝麻等时,被堆高的尖顶就是「顶」。「顶的差别」指将它拂去。显示巴利原文
Hadayanti nāḷiādīnaṃ mānabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ. Tilādīnaṃ nāḷiādīhi minanakāle ussāpitasikhāyeva sikhā. Sikhābhedo tassāhāpanaṃ.
「某些」指《心要略》的老师们和北寺的住众。「杀」指用拳击、鞭打等方式进行的伤害,即恼害的意思。因为「杀」这个词也有恼害的用法,例如「自己打自己而哭泣」等。就像虽然都不可执取,但为了显示出家者不应执取之物的类别,才分别说妇女、少女、婢女、奴隶等;同样,虽然都是从他人那里拿取的不与取性,但为了显示不与取的特殊情况,才分别说秤欺等。然而对于与杀生同义的「杀」一词,并无如此再作分别的必要。因为在那里是自己亲自做,在这里是令他人做,不能等同,如经中说「由身、语、意引发的思即是六种业」。因此,前文所述的义理才是恰当的。而注释书中说「杀即杀害」,那也可能是针对打击等行为说的,因为「杀害」一词也有恼害的用法。显示巴利原文
Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Vadhoti muṭṭhipahārakasātāḷanādīhi vihesanaṃ, vibādhananti attho. Viheṭhanatthopi hi vadha-saddo dissati ‘‘attānaṃvadhitvā vadhitvā rodatī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 879, 881). Yathā hi apariggahabhāvasāmaññe satipi pabbajitehi appaṭiggahitabbavatthuvibhāgasandassanatthaṃ itthikumāridāsidāsādayo vibhāgena vuttā. Evaṃ parassa haraṇabhāvato adinnādānabhāvasāmaññe satipi tulākūṭādayo adinnādānavisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ vibhāgena vuttā, na evaṃ pāṇātipātapariyāyassa vadhassa puna gahaṇe payojanaṃ atthi, tattha sayaṃkāro, idha paraṃkāroti ca na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā chappayogā’’ti vacanato. Tasmā yathāvutto evettha attho yutto. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vadhoti māraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, tampi pothanameva sandhāyāti ca sakkā viññātuṃ māraṇa-saddassapi vihiṃsane dissanato.
294 294. 为了说明衣和钵食的次第仅仅是为了养护身体与腹部,并总括地显示它们可成为八种资具的用途,因此说「那一切……」等。这些(指穿粪扫衣者等)也都是少欲知足的。因为依此而住的人,便不会有多欲或不满足的状态。显示巴利原文
294. Cīvarapiṇḍapātānaṃ yathākkamaṃ kāyakucchipariharaṇamattajotanāyaṃ avisesato aṭṭhannaṃ parikkhārānaṃ antare tappayojanatā sambhavatīti dassento ‘‘te sabbepī’’tiādimāha. Etepīti navaparikkhārikādayopi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva. Na hi tatthakena mahicchatā, asantuṭṭhitā vā hotīti.
又或者,他安乐地住于四方,因此四方成为他的乐住之处,故称“四方者”。其中,他对于有情或诸行,不因畏惧而受阻,故称“无碍者”。依十二种知足而安住知足,称“知足者”。“以任何所获”即不论所得好坏优劣。因能克服怖畏——外在如狮、虎等,内在如欲贪等身心厄难——故称“能忍怖畏者”。没有令身心僵硬的畏惧,故“无畏”。独自一人,无伴侣,因此像犀牛角一样独行,这是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Catūsu disāsu sukhaṃ viharati, tato eva sukhavihāraṭṭhānabhūtā catasso disā assa santīti vā cātuddiso. Tattha cāyaṃ satte vā saṅkhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatīti appaṭigho. Dvādasavidhassa santosassa vasena santussanako santussamāno. Itarītarenāti uccāvacena. Parissayānaṃ bāhirānaṃ sīhabyagghādīnaṃ, abbhantarānañca kāmacchandādīnaṃ kāyacittupaddavānaṃ abhibhavanato parissayānaṃ sahitā. Thaddhabhāvakarabhayābhāvena acchambhī. Eko asahāyo. Tato eva khaggamigasiṅgasadisatāya khaggavisāṇakappo careyyāti attho.
“有翼的鸟”:因为翅折或未生翼的鸟不能飞翔,故经中以“有翼的”一词加以限定,特指能飞的鸟,而说为“有翼的鸟”。为了说明这样一位比丘——他没有任何为储蓄而受用的情形,没有出于期待的存放,也没有任何储存——所以说“此中略义是”等。“圣”:由于过失从那里离去,或由于远离诸过失,故称“圣”,即无过失者。“内”:指于自身。“无过患的乐”:指非物质的乐,因为已无烦恼与过失。显示巴利原文
Chinnapakkho , asañjātapakkho vā sakuṇo gantuṃ na sakkotīti ‘‘pakkhī sakuṇo’’ti pakkhi-saddena visesetvā sakuṇo pāḷiyaṃ vuttoti āha ‘‘pakkhayutto sakuṇo’’ti. Yassa sannidhikāraparibhogo kiñci ṭhapetabbaṃ sāpekkhāya ṭhapanañca natthi, tādiso ayaṃ bhikkhūti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’tiādimāha. Ariyanti apenti tato dosā, tehi vā ārakāti ariyoti āha ‘‘ariyenāti niddosenā’’ti. Ajjhattanti attani. Niddosasukhanti nirāmisasukhaṃ kilesavajjarahitattā.
295 295. 如前述,于戒律仪中安住之后,方可期望根律仪,因为根律仪以此为基础,且护持于它,故说“这位比丘具足此圣戒蕴”。关于其余文句,即“不取于相……”等,依《清净道论》(1.15)所说,应按照其注释书《显扬深义》(1.15)中的解释来理解。因为根律仪的特相是不执取色等对象的总体相与细相,故说它具有不被烦恼所浸染的乐,以及不散乱的乐。显示巴利原文
295. Yathāvutte sīlasaṃvare patiṭṭhitasseva indriyasaṃvaro icchitabbo tadadhiṭṭhānato, tassa ca paripālakabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhū’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘na nimittaggāhī hotī’’tiādīsu padesu. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.15) vuttaṃ, tasmā tassa līnatthappakāsiniyaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.15) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Rūpādīsu nimittādiggāhaparivajjanalakkhaṇattā indriyasaṃvarassa kilesehi anavasittasukhatā avikiṇṇasukhatā cassa vuttā.
296 「资具成就」:即资具的圆满。这四种——戒律仪、知足、根律仪、正念正知,是林野住者的资粮。否则便会落入被畜生议论的境地,如同伊私升迦的父亲等人那样。林栖的女人发出恐怖的声音,若有人因此而不逃走,她们便用手抓住他的头……做出种种事来。或者,这是名为「违犯施设」的黑点,又或者是名为「邪思惟」的痣。对于那样的喜悦,应观察其显著地生生灭灭。显示巴利原文
296.Paccayasampattinti paccayapāripūriṃ. Ime cattāroti sīlasaṃvaro santoso indriyasaṃvaro satisampajaññanti ime cattāro araññavāsassa sambhārā. Tiracchānagatehi vattabbataṃ āpajjati isisiṅgassa pituādayo viya. Vanacarakehīti vanacarakamātugāmehi. Bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, tāvatā apalāyantānaṃ hatthehi sīsaṃ…pe… karonti. Paṇṇattivītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kāḷakaṃ vā. Micchāvitakkasaṅkhātaṃ tilakaṃ vā. Tanti pītiṃ vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhānato khayato sammasanto.
「远离」:即远离人群,由此说为「空的」。而这种远离应以寂静无声为特征,故又说「少声、少喧响」。具房舍性质的坐卧具,因可依止而住,称为「住所坐卧具」。床、椅等,以及其上应铺设的褥垫、枕头,因与床椅相关,称为「床椅坐卧具」。毛毯等因应铺设于地面,称为「铺设坐卧具」。树下等是需返回之处,因作为经行等的场所,称为「处所坐卧具」。显示巴利原文
Vivittanti janavivittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suñña’’nti. Sā ca vivittatā nissaddabhāvena lakkhitabbāti āha ‘‘appasaddaṃ appanigghosa’’nti. Āvasathabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ viharitabbaṭṭhena vihārasenāsanaṃ. Masārakādi mañcapīṭhaṃ tattha attharitabbaṃ bhisiupadhānañca mañcapīṭhasambandhito mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ. Cimilikādi bhūmiyaṃ santharitabbatāya santhatasenāsanaṃ. Rukkhamūlādi paṭikkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ caṅkamanādīnaṃ okāsabhāvato okāsasenāsanaṃ.
说了「显示适合的」之后,为了阐明怎样才算是适合本身,于是接着说「于此……」等。「无覆」:即没有任何覆盖——既没有瓦片盖顶,乃至于连树枝也不曾遮蔽。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anucchavikaṃdassento’’ti vatvā tameva anucchavikabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Acchannanti iṭṭhakachadanādinā antamaso rukkhasākhāhipi na channaṃ.
「食后」是指用完餐之后。「结跏趺坐」是指将双腿在下方交叠系缚而坐。下半身的正直安立,仅由「坐」一词便已表明。在「身正直」中,「身」一词指上半身,因此说「将上半身保持正直」。为说明此正直安立的具体相状与作用,才说了「十八……」等。「不俯」即不向前倾。「不堕落」即不散逸,不逾越业处之道。正因如此,业处才能前后相续地获得殊胜,增长、增广。「近于口」是指在口的附近,即鼻尖或上唇。此处「遍」(pari-)一词与「对向」(abhi-)同义,故说「对向业处」,意思是遮止心向外缘取种种外境,唯以业处为前导。而「周」(pari-)是摄持之义,如「导引」等词中的用法。「出离」之义是对治而脱离,因此「已摄持的出离之念」,意思是:成就了全面把握、不忘失,舍弃了忘失的正念,安立了最上的念与正知。显示巴利原文
Bhattassapacchatoti bhattabhuñjanassa pacchato. Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnaṃ adhobandhanavasena nisajjaṃ. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṭṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti. Ujuṃ kāyanti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na oṇamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati, vīthiṃ na vilaṅgheti. Tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesappattiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Mukhasamīpeti mukhassa samīpe nāsikagge vā uttaroṭṭhe vā. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānasatinti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
「依镇伏之力」:此处镇伏是指令(不善法)不生起、不现行,而非由对治而彻底断除。说「已断除」,是就禅那尚未证得而说其类似断除的状态。即便如此,此心并非如眼识那样本性上已离贪欲,而是依于修习之力。因此说「非如眼识」。同理:眼识本性即离贪欲、无瞋恚,并非由修习镇伏而成;而此心则是由修习而清净,故无瞋恚、离昏沉睡眠、不掉举、无疑惑。此处「此两者」指正念与正知。显示巴利原文
Vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ na paṭipakkhena suppahīnatā. Pahīnattāti ca pahīnasadisataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ jhānassa anadhigatatā. Tathāpi nayidaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya sabhāvato vigatābhijjhaṃ, atha kho bhāvanāvasena. Tenāha ‘‘na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenā’’ti. Eseva nayoti yathā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sabhāvena vigatābhijjhaṃ abyāpannañca, na bhāvanāya vikkhambhitattā, na evamidaṃ. Idaṃ pana cittaṃ bhāvanāya parisodhitattā abyāpannaṃ vigatathinamiddhaṃ anuddhataṃ nibbicikicchañcāti attho. Idaṃ ubhayanti satisampajaññamāha.
297 「断尽而舍弃」:此处断尽和舍弃,即令那些未生的智慧不得生起。如此,诸盖法成为广大慧、无上慧及部分有限慧不生起之因,又对另一部分慧破坏其能力,故说它们「令慧减弱」。此初禅在应调伏者的相续中安立时,智慧于此运行,故称「智足迹」;智慧于此作用,故称「智行使」。显示巴利原文
297.Ucchinditvā pātentīti ettha ucchindanaṃ pātanañca tāsaṃ paññānaṃ anuppannānaṃ uppajjituṃ appadānameva. Iti mahaggatānuttarapaññānaṃ ekaccāya ca parittapaññāya anuppattihetubhūtā nīvaraṇā dhammā itarāya ca samatthataṃ vihanantiyevāti paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā vuttā. Idampi paṭhamajjhānaṃ veneyyasantāne patiṭṭhāpiyamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pajjati etthāti ñāṇapadaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ vaḷañjeti etthāti ñāṇavaḷañjaṃ.
299 尚未达到结论者,亦可能拥有外道智慧所未踏入的领域。若如此,为何在不通于他者的道智之句上,不说已到结论?因此说「即使在道刹那」等。「于三宝中达到结论」,是指对佛陀的善自觉、法的善法性、僧的善行道,以智慧达到结论、决定。虽然初道即已完全断除疑惑,一切圣弟子皆无犹豫和疑惑,但于智慧达到极圆满的阿罗汉,在其境界中智慧尤为深入,非不还者等所能及,故说「以最上道而于彼处达到结论」,意指于三宝上有殊胜的智慧决定。此处未详释的内容,已容易理解。显示巴利原文
299.Natāva niṭṭhaṃ gato bāhirakānaṃ ñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānānipi siyunti. Yadi evaṃ anaññasādhāraṇe maggañāṇapade kathaṃ na niṭṭhaṅgatoti āha ‘‘maggakkhaṇepī’’tiādi. Tīsu ratanesu niṭṭhaṃ gato hotīti buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattitañca ārabbha ñāṇena niṭṭhaṃ nicchayaṃ upagato hoti. Kāmañcettha paṭhamamaggeneva sabbaso vicikicchāya pahīnattā sabbassapi ariyasāvakassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā natthi, tattha pana yathā paññāvepullappattassa arahato savisaye ñāṇaṃ savisesaṃ ogāhati, na tathā anāgāmiādīnanti ratanattaye sātisayaṃ ñāṇanicchayagamanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘aggamaggavasena tatthaniṭṭhāgamanaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
第八、《大象迹喻经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Mahāhatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
300 「丛林」:此处指无贪、不柔软、因无水而干硬粗糙的地块,称为「丛林」。由于此地域多为丛林,故整体亦以「丛林」称之;生于彼丛林、或存在于彼处的,称为「丛林象」,即属于丛林者。如此,亦摄入了河中行象。如同所应统摄者,能统摄者亦被「丛林」一词所包。「行于地表」:此语不排除行于水中者,因其足不可见。「诸有情」虽是通称,但因与「足迹」一词相邻,即成限定语,故说「有足有情」。「足迹」即足,如「粪」、「尿」等词中,「gata」与「jāta」无别义。「集合」即总摄、或纳入。「以大性」即由广大之体。显示巴利原文
300.Jaṅgalānanti ettha yo nipicchalena amuduko nirudakatāya thaddhalūkhabhūmippadeso, so ‘‘jaṅgalo’’ti vuccati. Tabbahulatāya pana idha sabbo bhūmippadeso jaṅgalo, tasmiṃ jaṅgale jātā, bhavāti vā jaṅgalā, tesaṃ jaṅgalānaṃ. Evañhi nadīcarānampi hatthīnaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti. Samodhātabbānaṃ viya hi samodhāyakānampi jaṅgalaggahaṇena gahetabbato. Pathavītalacārīnanti iminā jalacārino na nivatteti adissamānapādattā. Pāṇānanti sādhāraṇavacanampi ‘‘padajātānī’’ti saddantarasannidhānena visesaniviṭṭhameva hotīti āha ‘‘sapādakapāṇāna’’nti. ‘‘Muttagata’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) gata-saddo anatthantaro viya, jāta-saddo anatthantaroti āha ‘‘padajātānīti padānī’’ti. Samodhānanti samavarodhaṃ, antogamaṃ vā. Mahantattenāti vipulabhāvena.
「善法」指无过失且乐异熟的法,并非仅是无过失的法。因为这里应依《善三法》中所说的方法来把握善法,不应依《巴希提咖经》中所说的方法。为何说「摄有四种」?难道这里不是只意指一种摄吗?并非如此,因为未把握其义理,只是执取了尚未确定义理的字面。「摄」这个词,依其自身的义理即有四种——这正是此处的意思。或者,义理本身亦未确定差别,以共相而成为可把握的,在「入于摄」这里,即成为可用「摄」这个词来言说的,这并无任何过失;唯有在差别已被确定之后,它才可能只有一种,而非在此之前。「同类摄」指同一种类的摄,或对同一种类者的摄。然而在《界论注》中,仅说「生类摄」,那是因为「生」这个词是有所待的,当说「以生的摄」时,由于未提及其他可关联的对象,便自然理解为「以自身的生」的摄,因此那样说。而在这里,如同在《色蕴注释》等中,为清晰显示,才说「同类摄」。「共生」指在其中共同产生;以共生的摄为「共生摄」,即是以共生处等方式的摄。当说「一切车兵」时,所有车战士因以车作战的行为而成为一类。显示巴利原文
Kusalā dhammāti anavajjasukhavipākā dhammā, na anavajjamattadhammā. Kusalattike āgatanayena hi idha kusalā dhammā gahetabbā, na bāhitikasutte āgatanayena. Catubbidho saṅgahoti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ekavidhovettha saṅgaho adhippetoti? Na, atthaṃ aggahetvā aniddhāritatthassa saddasseva gahitattā. Saṅgaha-saddo tāva attano atthavasena catubbidhoti ayañhettha attho. Atthopi vā aniddhāritaviseso sāmaññena gahetabbataṃ patto ‘‘saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti ettha saṅgaha-saddena vacanīyataṃ gatoti na koci doso, niddhārite visese tassa ekavidhatā siyā, na tato pubbeti. Sajātisaṅgahoti samānajātiyā, samānajātikānaṃ vā saṅgaho. Dhātukathāvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘jātisaṅgaho’’icceva vuttaṃ, taṃ jāti-saddassa sāpekkhasaddattā jātiyā saṅgahoti vutte attano jātiyāti viññāyati sambandhārahassa aññassa avuttattāti katvā vuttaṃ. Idha pana rūpakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 594) viya pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sajātisaṅgaho’’icceva vuttaṃ. Sañjāyanti etthāti sañjāti, sañjātiyā saṅgaho sañjātisaṅgaho, sañjātidesavasena saṅgahoti attho. ‘‘Sabbe rathikā’’ti vutte sabbe rathayodhā rathena yujjhanakiriyāya ekasaṅgahoti. ‘‘Sabbe dhanuggahā’’ti vutte sabbe issāsā dhanunā vijjhanakiriyāya ekasaṅgahoti āha ‘‘evaṃ kiriyavasena saṅgaho’’ti. Rūpakkhandhena saṅgahitanti rūpakkhandhena ekasaṅgahaṃ rūpakkhandhoteva gaṇitaṃ, gahaṇaṃ gatanti attho.
它仅伴随一半的谛,因为它是道谛与苦谛的一部分。即使只含摄了谛的一部分,也仍然属于谛的范畴,因此说「因为包含于诸谛中」。现在,为了阐明那个义理,从教法和世间两方面引用譬喻来加以说明,故说了「如同……」等语。在这里,「比丘们,这大约有一百五十条学处」这句话,是在宣说那部经时依当时已制定的学处而说的,但那之后则有了二百多条学处。由于包含于学中,因此属于增上戒学。然而,在此处提出「即使是在学戒,也同时是在学三学」的说法,是不相应的。因为在那个时候,若他断除应断的,在应防护处成就防护,这对他来说就是增上戒学;若他在其中内心无散乱,这对他来说就是增上心学;若他在其中进行审察,这对他来说就是增上慧学。如是,这是说明善男子确实以各自形态可得的来修习三学,并非仅仅由于学之间的包含关系。因此,注释中说:「那种如实状态的防护,在这里就是增上戒学;那种如实状态的定,在这里就是增上心学;那种如实状态的慧,在这里就是增上慧学。这三学,他缘取那个所缘,依凭那个念,通过那个作意,去学习、修习、多修。」那么,这显示巴利原文
Diyaḍḍhamevasaccaṃ bhajati maggasaccadukkhasaccekadesabhāvato. Saccekadesantogadhampi saccantogadhameva hotīti āha ‘‘saccānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ sāsanato ca lokato ca upamaṃ āha ritvā dīpetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sādhikamidaṃ, bhikkhave, diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasatanti idaṃ yasmiṃ kāle taṃ suttaṃ desitaṃ, tadā paññattasikkhāpadavasena vuttaṃ, tato paraṃ pana sādhikāni dvesatāni sikkhāpadānīti. Sikkhānaṃ antogadhattā adhisīlasikkhāya. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlaṃ sikkhantopi tisso sikkhā sikkhatī’’ti visamoyaṃ upaññāso. Tattha hi yo pahātabbaṃ pajahati, saṃvaritabbato saṃvaraṃ āpajjati, ayamassa adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tattha cetaso avikkhepo, ayamassa adhicittasikkhā. Yā tattha vīmaṃsā, ayamassa adhipaññāsikkhā. Iti so kulaputto sarūpato labbhamānā eva tisso sikkhā sikkhatīti dīpito, na sikkhānaṃ antogadhatāmattena. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yo tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā, yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayamettha adhicittasikkhā, yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhā. Imā tisso sikkhā tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotī’’ti. Idha pana saccānaṃ antogadhattā sacca-saddābhidheyyatāmattena catūsu saccesu gaṇanantogadhā hontīti? Na, tatthāpi hi nippariyāyato adhisīlasikkhāva labbhati, itarā pariyāyatoti katvā ‘‘sikkhānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「被摄于四圣谛」等说法,是指不脱离它们,正是指其被包含于它们之中。如此,通过「就像一只象足迹……」等所展示的象足迹譬喻才得以成立,这一点应当了知。进入一谛、二谛或三谛计数的法,不能仅依《善三法》来理解,而应依三法和二法中随宜可得的文句来理解。其中,进入一谛计数的法,应视为无为法;进入二谛计数的法,是善法,同样也是不善法和无记法;进入三谛计数的法,是有为法;同样,对于其他三法和二法的文句,也应随宜分别解说这个义理。因此说「即是一……乃至……都成为进入」。因为部分由于被总体所包含,如同以共相统摄差别,以合集而获得摄益。因此说「因为包含于谛中」。说法的次第:即先列出圣谛,然后以解说苦谛的方式去分别五取蕴。而在其中,又通过解释色蕴,首先分别内在的地界。这就是此说法的次第。显示巴利原文
Catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti ca tato amuccitvā tasseva antogadhataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘yathā ca ekassa hatthipadassā’’tiādinā dassitā hatthipadopamā samatthitā daṭṭhabbā. Ekasmimpi dvīsupi tīsupi saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā dhammāti idaṃ na kusalattikavaseneva veditabbaṃ, atha kho tikadukesu yathārahaṃ labbhamānapadavasena veditabbaṃ. Tattha ekasmiṃ sacce gaṇanaṃ gato dhammo asaṅkhatadhammo daṭṭhabbo, dvīsu saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā kusalā dhammā, tathā akusalā dhammā, abyākatā ca dhammā, tīsu saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā saṅkhatā dhammā, evaṃ aññesampi tikadukapadānaṃ vasena ayamattho yathārahaṃ vibhajitvā vattabbo. Tenāha ‘‘ekasmimpi…pe… gatāva hontī’’ti. Ekadeso hi samudāyantogadhattā viseso viya sāmaññena samūhena saṅgahaṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘saccānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti. Desanānukkamoti ariyasaccāni uddisitvā dukkhasaccaniddesavasena pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ vibhajanaṃ. Tattha ca rūpakkhandhaniddesavasenaādito ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā vibhajananti. Ayaṃ imissā desanāya anukkamo.
301 为了以譬喻阐明此义,因此说「如同……」等。其中,「善生」是指美好、构造良好、发育成熟,这是它的含义。「薄皮」即内膜。因其柔软的性质,是就腹部那一部分而言的。「其余四部分」,是指分为五份的那些部分中,除了那一份以外的其余四份。「其余三部分」,则是指最初分为四份的那些部分中,除了那一份以外的其余三份。显示巴利原文
301. Taṃ panetaṃ upamāhi vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sujātanti sundaraṃ, susaṇṭhitaṃ supariṇatañcāti adhippāyo. Pesiyoti vilīve. Mudubhāvato kucchibhāgaṃ ādāya. Itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāseti pañcadhā bhinnakoṭṭhāsesu itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāse. Itare ca tayo koṭṭhāsetiādito catudhā bhinnakoṭṭhāsesu itare ca tayo koṭṭhāse.
「以王子譬喻」:即以国王长子的譬喻。「亲子」是一种美称,意为由精进从胸中所生的圣种,故称为亲子。「从口所生」:指由口中流出的教法宣说所生,或由作为佛陀法身之口的圣法所生。由此便是「法所生」「法所化」。由于被视作导师的法嗣,故称「法嗣」。因此说「不是物质继承者」。「世尊之子」等语,即指「世尊的儿子」。因具足大智慧等功德,能殊胜地安住于次第中,并能如实、正确地宣说,故能说法者才如此宣说。显示巴利原文
Rājaputtūpamāyāti rañño jeṭṭhaputtaupamāya. Nti piḷandhanaṃ. Ure vāyāmajanitaariyajātiyā oraso. Mukhato jātoti mukhato niggatadhammadesanāya jāto, buddhānaṃ vā dhammakāyassa mukhabhūtaariyadhammato jāto. Tato eva dhammajo dhammanimmito. Satthu dhammadāyādasseva gahitattā dhammadāyādo. Tenāha ‘‘no āmisadāyādo’’ti. Nti ‘‘bhagavato putto’’tiādivacanaṃ. Mahāpaññatādiguṇehi sātisayaṃ anupubbabhāve ṭhitattā sammā yathābhūtaṃ vadamāno vattuṃ sakkonto vadeyya.
全然无怖的涅槃,以及导向涅槃之道。由于远离了贪等尘垢,善逝、正自觉者能教导远离尘垢之法,并为千余位比丘所亲近侍奉——应如此联系理解。显示巴利原文
Akutobhayaṃ nibbānaṃ nibbānagāminiñca. Rāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena vigatarajaṃ dhammaṃ desentaṃ sugataṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ parosahassaṃ payirupāsatīti yojanā.
在说了「应跟随,应亲近」之后,接着说明其原因:「因为有智慧的比丘是能给予帮助的人」。他们虽然是有智慧的人,但并非是孤陋寡闻的,而是能够以教诫和指导来提供帮助的人。前面的比喻是专就长老而引用的,而后一个比喻则是针对世尊和比丘僧团两者而引用的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sevetha bhajathā’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā’’ti. Paṇḍitāpi samānā na appassutā, atha kho ovādānusāsanīhi anuggāhakāti purimā upamā therasseva vasena udāhaṭā, dutiyā pana bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassapi vasena udāhaṭā.
302 「内」指属于有情相续范围内的。 「内」与「各自的」这两个词都是用以指称各个别自体的法,因此说「这两者都只是自身所属的别名」。然而,由于属于自己相续,从可被执取为「我」的角度,针对自我而成立、转起的,称为「内」;由于属于各个有情的相续,则称为「各自的」。因此,《清净道论》的注释中说:「因为在自身中转起,所以是“内”;因为一再地缘于自己而转起,所以是“各自的”。」 「硬」即坚固。由于它以僵硬的状态作为俱生法的立足处,故说「僵硬」。 「粗」指属于粗的本质,也就是粗的本质本身,这是其含义。但由于粗的本质表现为粗涩的样貌,具有粗涩的相状,故说「粗涩」。 「执受」指存在于身体中的八法。其中,由业所生的,在直接意义上称为「执受」,其他共生的则不是执受。但为了说明在此处两者皆因渴爱等而成为执取、抓取、邪执意义上的执受,故说了「身体中的……因为」等语。 在这里,「执取」指以邪执深陷其中;「抓住」指将其据为「我的」;「邪执」指执为「我」。对于修习界业处的禅修者,也显示巴利原文
302.Ajjhattikāti sattasantānapariyāpannā. Ajjhattaṃ paccattanti padadvayenapi taṃtaṃpāṭipuggalikadhammā vuccantīti āha ‘‘ubhayampetaṃ niyakādhivacanamevā’’ti. Sasantatipariyāpannatāya pana attāti gahetabbabhāvūpagamanavasena attānaṃ adhikicca uddissa pavattaṃ ajjhattaṃ, taṃtaṃsattasantānapariyāpannatāya paccattaṃ. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 1.307) ‘‘attani pavattattā ajjhattaṃ, attānaṃ paṭicca paṭicca pavattattā paccatta’’nti. Kakkhaḷanti kathinaṃ. Yasmā taṃ thaddhabhāvena sahajātānaṃ patiṭṭhā hoti, tasmā ‘‘thaddha’’nti vuttaṃ. Kharigatanti kharasabhāvesu gataṃ tappariyāpannaṃ, kharasabhāvamevāti attho. Yasmā pana kharasabhāvaṃ pharusākārena upaṭṭhānato pharusākāraṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pharusa’’nti. Upādinnaṃ nāma sarīraṭṭhakaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ nippariyāyato ‘‘upādinna’’nti vuccati, itaraṃ anupādinnaṃ. Tadubhayampi idha taṇhādīhi ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhavasena upādinnamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sarīraṭṭhakañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ādinnanti abhiniviṭṭhaṃ. Mamanti gahitaṃ. Ahanti parāmaṭṭhaṃ. Dhātukammaṭṭhānikassāti catudhātuvavatthānavasena dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ pariharantassa. Etthāti etasmiṃ dhātukammaṭṭhāne. Tīsu koṭṭhāsesūti tippakāresu koṭṭhāsesu. Na hi te tayo cattāro koṭṭhāsā.
「前面所说种类」指如「头发、身毛」等所描述的那些种类。 「种种自性」:虽皆有坚硬性的共同点,但因由各种成分聚合而成,故就头发等聚合体而言,各具自性,称为种种自性。 「爱着」指期冀。 「欲乐」指渴望。 「渴求」指渴爱的希求。 「遍缠」指渴爱的随眠缠缚。 「执取」指欲取。 「邪执」指以邪见执取,即错误的执著。 这些爱着等并不强。 既然如此,为何在《分别论》中,外在的地界也被详细分别呢?因为在那里是依法的开示方式而详说,这里则是依随顺开示的方式,所以按照前面说过的方法简略说了。显示巴利原文
Vuttappakārāti ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādinā vuttappakārā. Nānāsabhāvatoti satipi kakkhaḷabhāvasāmaññe sasambhāravibhattito pana kesādisaṅghātagatanānāsabhāvato. Ālayoti apekkhā. Nikantīti nikāmanā. Patthanāti taṇhāpatthanā. Pariyuṭṭhānanti taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ. Gahaṇanti kāmupādānaṃ. Parāmāsoti parato āmasanā micchābhiniveso. Na balavā ālayādi. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vibhaṅge bāhirāpi pathavīdhātu vitthāreneva vibhattāti? Yathādhammadesanattā tattha vitthāreneva desanā pavattā, yathānulomadesanattā panettha vuttanayena desanā saṃkhittā.
「集合而显示」:即将其合在一处显示。 「那」:指内地界。 「它容易被把握」:意思是“这不是我的我”。当无我相确定时,在有为法中,苦相与无常相亦自然确定,因为它们与无我相不可分离。 「他扰乱」:即现起扰乱、怪异的行为。而其本质即是悸动,故说「他悸动着」。 「对此」:即对于这内地界。 「无心的状态」:由于见到它仅仅是界,故非心的特性变得明显。 「那两者」:即内外两种地界。显示巴利原文
Yojetvā dassetīti ekajjhaṃ katvā dasseti. Sāti ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Sukhapariggaho hoti ‘‘na me so attā’’ti. Siddhe hi anattalakkhaṇe dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ aniccalakkhaṇañca siddhameva hoti saṅkhatadhammesu tadavinābhāvatoti. Visūkāyatīti visūkaṃ virūpakiriyaṃ pavatteti. Sā pana atthato vipphandanamevāti āha ‘‘vipphandatī’’ti. Assāti ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā. Acetanābhāvo pākaṭo hoti dhātumattatāya dassanato. Taṃ ubhayampīti taṃ pathavīdhātudvayampi.
「比那更殊胜者」:指比外在的大地更为殊胜,意即更为轻细。「它激怒」:意为遭受破坏。「正在消融」:如同盐在普通水中化去一般消融。「随水而去」:谓随水流去,与水同一去向。因此说「就变成了水」。「无有性」:即不存在本身;或者说,「无有」就是不成为那样的法,此种状态即名无有性。「灭」:即消失;此法以坏灭为自性,故称「灭法」;其状态即是「灭法性」,本质上就是坏灭。其余词句也以同样方式理解。因此说:「所有这些词句说的都是无常相。」虽然从宣说坏灭的自性来看,确是在说无常相(在名称上),但其余的苦相、无我相在意义上也已经说了。为了说明这一点,便说:「然而……」等等。显示巴利原文
Tato visesatarenāti tato bāhiramahāpathavito visesavantatarena, lahutarenāti attho. Kuppatīti luppati. Vilīyamānāti pakatiudake loṇaṃ viya vilayaṃ gacchantī. Udakānugatāti udakaṃ anugatā udakagatikā. Tenāha ‘‘udakameva hotī’’ti. Abhāvo eva abhāvatā, na bhavatīti vā abhāvo, tathāsabhāvo dhammo. Tassa bhāvo abhāvatā. Vayo vināso dhammo sabhāvo etassāti vayadhammo, tassa bhāvo vayadhammatā, atthato khayo eva. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘sabbehipi imehi padehi aniccalakkhaṇameva vutta’’nti. Viddhaṃsanabhāvassa pana paveditabbattā kāmaṃ aniccalakkhaṇameva vuttaṃ sarūpato, itarānipi atthato vuttānevāti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi.
「仅住于须臾」:即仅住一刹那,此名为「小住」;极微小之住即是「小住者」,意为极其短暂的刹那存在者。因此说「唯小住者」。「由于住立的微细」:那住立之相仅依单一生起的心而有的法,正因如此,便转而具有其他状态。因为仅凭一心生起的刹那,在究竟意义上,有情的寿命就被限定了。因此说:「因为此人……」等等。显示巴利原文
Mattaṃ khaṇamattaṃ tiṭṭhatīti mattaṭṭho, appamattaṭṭho mattaṭṭhako, atiittarakhaṇikoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘parittaṭṭhitikassā’’ti. Ṭhitiparittatāyāti ekacittapavattimattatāṭhānalakkhaṇassa itarabhāvena . Ekassa cittassa pavattikkhaṇamatteneva hi sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanakkhaṇo paricchinno. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi.
「命」:指命根。「乐与苦」:指乐受和苦受。舍受因也具可意和不可意的性质,所以包含在乐与苦之中。「自体」:指除去命、受、识三者之后所剩的诸法。「唯」:即纯粹,不掺杂常的观念。「与同一心相应」:即与同一心俱在,属于同一心刹那。「刹那迅速流转」:由于这种极短暂性,命等诸法的刹那极为轻快、极短暂地流转、消逝。「这」:指偈颂中所说的内容。显示巴利原文
Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhāti sukhadukkhā vedanā. Upekkhāpi hi sukhadukkhāsveva antogadhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvato. Attabhāvoti jīvitavedanāviññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhadhammā vuttā. Kevalāti attaniccabhāvena avomissā. Ekacittasamāyuttāti ekena cittena sahitā ekacittakkhaṇikā. Lahuso vattate khaṇoti tāya eva ekakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiittaro jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati vītivattatīti attho. Idanti gāthāvacanaṃ.
因为众生的命,只有在入出息得以前后相续运转时才能延续,若不得此相续运转便不能延续,所以说命系属于入出息。同样,命也只有在四大的平衡获得维持时才能延续。譬如,当地界、水界等任何一界紊乱时,即使是有力之人,也会身体僵直,或因严重腹泻等而身体溃烂,或受极热所苦,或关节断裂,乃至命终。命也唯有在适时获得段食时才得以延续,得不到便会耗尽;并且唯有识持续时才能延续,若识不持续,命便不延续。在上述关于‘命’的说法中,以‘如是’一词,还涵盖了系属于威仪、系属于冷热等方面。因为命只有在四威仪保持平衡时才能延续,若某一种过盛,寿行便会断绝;同样,命只有在冷热平衡时才延续,为极寒或极热所征服的人便会死去。显示巴利原文
Yasmā sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ aparāparasañcaraṇaṃ labhamānameva pavattati, na alabhamānaṃ, tasmā assāsapassāsūpanibaddhaṃ. Tathā mahābhūtānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Pathavīdhātuyā hi āpodhātuādīnaṃ vā aññatarapakopena balasampannopi puriso patthaddhakāyo vā, atisārādivasena kilinnapūtikāyo vā, mahāḍāhapareto vā, sañchijjamānasandhibandhano vā hutvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kabaḷīkārāhārānaṃ yuttakāle labhantasseva jīvitaṃ pavattati, alabhantassa parikkhayaṃ gacchati, viññāṇe pavattamāneyeva ca jīvitaṃ pavattati, na tasmiṃ appavattamāne. Jīvitanti ettha iti-saddena iriyāpathūpanibaddhatāsītuṇhūpanibaddhatādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Catunnañhi iriyāpathānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva jīvitaṃ pavattati, aññatarassa pana adhimattatāya āyusaṅkhārā upacchijjanti, sītuṇhānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati, atisītena pana atiuṇhena vā abhibhūtassa vipajjatīti.
「对由渴爱执受的」:以此词说明它是缘所生,从而彰显其自身的坏灭性。因为苦随观直接对治渴爱执,无常随观直接对治慢执,无我随观直接对治见执,由这三种随观,必定能令这些执著也随之消失,故说‘不会成为’。这里之所以唯独显示外地界的消失,是为了显示依此观察而生起的随观。显示巴利原文
Taṇhupādinnassāti iminā hi paccayuppannatākittanena sarasapabhaṅgutaṃyeva vibhāveti. Dukkhānupassanāya taṇhāggāhassa aniccānupassanāya mānaggāhassa anattānupassanāya diṭṭhiggāhassa ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato ekaṃseneva tīhi anupassanāhi gāhāpi vigacchantīti āha ‘‘noteva hotī’’ti. Ekaṃyeva āgataṃ bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā antaradhānadassanapavattajotanāya.
「把握」:即对界的把握。「建立者」:指开始教导的人。「显示耳门的力量」:这是一个连接句。借由显示业处行者的力量,实际上彰显了业处自身的威力。「以言语撞击」:恰好说明了耳门的力量。所谓‘力’:即见内地界如同外地界,亦无心识,恰如树木虽被咒骂或击打亦无反应,此即是力。「以正现行、正生起的状态」:即彼时正在现行的状态。「以现行生起的状态」:当那不可意之声所缘现前时,于耳门依作意而生起的速行中之受是苦,因此说‘依亲依止缘’。「受等」:即‘受是无常’等教示中所说的受,以及想等诸法。这些法与触同处一地,并非前述那种受。「所缘即是名为界者」:即以已把握的、名为地界者作为所缘。「跃入」:即观察心以思惟的方式渗入‘这是无常’、‘这是苦’、‘这是无我’。由此显明心未向外散乱。「明净」:即显示业处已入心路。「住立」:由不断获得更加殊胜的状态而安住,因摧破对立方而变得不动摇。「解脱」:以此显示从渴爱、慢、见的执取中殊胜解脱。然而在注疏中,依其来源,释其义为‘获得决定’。显示巴利原文
Pariggahanti dhātupariggahaṇaṃ. Paṭṭhapentoti ārabhanto desento. Sotadvāre balaṃ dassetīti yojanā. Kammaṭṭhānikassa baladassanāpadesena kammaṭṭhānassa ānubhāvaṃ dasseti. Vācāya ghaṭṭanameva vuttaṃ sotadvāre baladassanabhāvato. Balanti ca bāhirāya viya ajjhattikāyapi pathavīdhātuyā acetanābhāvadassanena rukkhassa viya akkosantepi paharantepi nibbikāratā. Sampativattamānuppannabhāvenāti tadā paccuppannabhāvena. Samudācāruppannabhāvenāti āpāthagate tasmiṃ aniṭṭhe saddārammaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātauppattivasena sotadvāre javanavedanā dukkhāti vacanato. Tathā hi ‘‘upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vedanādayopīti ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti ettha vuttavedanā ceva saññādayo ca. Te hi phassena samānabhūmikā na pubbe vuttavedanā. Dhātusaṅkhātameva ārammaṇanti yathāpariggahitaṃ pathavīdhātusaṅkhātameva visayaṃ. Pakkhandatīti vipassanācittaṃ aniccantipi dukkhantipi anattātipi sammasanavasena anupavisati. Etena bahiddhāvikkhepābhāvamāha, pasīdatīti pana iminā kammaṭṭhānassa vīthipaṭipannataṃ. Santiṭṭhatīti iminā uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena avatthānaṃ paṭipakkhābhibhavena niccalabhāvato. Vimuccatīti iminā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhato visesena muccanaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana samuṭṭhānavasena attho vutto ‘‘adhimokkhaṃ labhatī’’ti. Sotadvāramhi ārammaṇe āpāthagateti idaṃ mūlapariññāya mūladassanaṃ. Sotadvārehi āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjayato voṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho, aniṭṭhe ca paṭigho uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī, puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti, tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, sabbaṃ vā bhavaṅgādi. Evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena pariññā. Āgantukatāvakālikapariññā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena itarabhāvavasena ca veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana satipaṭṭhānasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto eva.
即使有人已通过如实把握诸界而作把握,由于无始以来的修习,若仍生起不如理作意,当此心到达“确定”时,便成就了确定的作用——获得一次或两次“习行”,但并非成为习行缘。因为与舍俱的无因心并不能成为习行缘;若能成为,则在《发趣论》善三法中的缘起分等中,便应说“以非道缘而于习行有二,以习行缘而于非道有二”,但实际却说“以非道缘而于习行有一,以习行缘而于非道有一”。此处说“一次或两次”,其中“一次”仅为言辞顺畅。因为第二种无效转起中,确定心并非唯转起一次:转起两次的情况说为“一次”,转起三次的情况说为“两次”。其第二次和第三次的转起,好似获得了习行一般。然而,“到达确定,获得一次或两次习行后,心便沉入有分”,此应是就第二种无效转起而言的。这由所缘的羸弱所致,在《阿毗达摩注》中有明确的规定。但在此处,由于犀利观智之力,不善不可能生起;因此,若是不如理作意者,便可能生起不如理之确定,而非如理;且当面对广大或极大所缘时,速行亦不会生起——显示巴利原文
Yāthāvato dhātūnaṃ pariggaṇhanavasena katapariggahassapi anādikālabhāvanāvasena ayoniso āvajjanaṃ sacepi uppajjati. Voṭṭhabbanaṃ patvāti voṭṭhabbanakiccataṃ patvā. Ekaṃ dve vāre āsevanaṃ labhitvā, na āsevanapaccayaṃ. Na hi upekkhāsahagatāhetukacittaṃ āsevanapaccayabhūtaṃ atthi. Yadi siyā, paṭṭhāne kusalattike paṭiccavārādīsu ‘‘na maggapaccayā āsevane dve, āsevanapaccayā na magge dve’’ti ca vattabbaṃ siyā, ‘‘na maggapaccayā āsevane ekaṃ (paṭṭhā. 1.1.221), āsevanapaccayā na magge eka’’nti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.152) ca pana vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ dve vāreti ettha ca ekaggahaṇaṃ vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vasena vuttaṃ. Na hi dutiye moghavāre ekavārameva voṭṭhabbanaṃ pavattati. Dvikkhattuṃ vā tassa pavattiṃ sandhāya ekavāraggahaṇaṃ, tikkhattuṃ pavattiṃ sandhāya dvevāraggahaṇaṃ. Tattha dutiyaṃ tatiyañca pavattamānaṃ laddhāsevanaṃ viya hoti. Yasmā pana ‘‘voṭṭhabbanaṃ patvā ekaṃ dve vāreāsevanaṃ labhitvā cittaṃ bhavaṅgameva otaratī’’ti idaṃ dutiyamoghavāravasena vuttaṃ bhaveyya. So ca ārammaṇadubbalatāya eva hotīti abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ niyamito. Idha pana tikkhānupassanānubhāvena akusaluppattiyā asambhavavasena ayonisova āvajjato ayoniso vavatthānaṃ siyā, na yoniso, tasmiñca pavatte mahati atimahati vā ārammaṇe javanaṃ na uppajjeyyāti ayamattho vicāretvā gahetabbo.
或者,即使对这确定心作二分考量,若在随顺的受三法中之缘起分等处,确有“以习行缘而于非道有二,以非道缘而于习行有二”的说法,方可成立。但并未如此说。然而,若确定心能作为习行缘,则善与不善亦会成为习行缘。因为对于理应获得习行缘的法,佛并非不曾说“此法即是习行缘”;可是,确定心与善及不善之间的习行缘关系却被否定——因为《发趣论》说:“善法缘生善法,非以习行缘。不善……非以习行缘。”若说这是依不同感受而说的,那么也应如《发趣论》中“转向对善蕴、不善蕴以无间缘为缘”那样,说出“以习行缘为缘”。若说因种类不同故未说,那么如欲界对色界等不同地之法,虽种类不同,仍有习行缘关系;即便种类不同,也应当说。同理,若如“转向对有因诸蕴以无间缘为缘”是依种类不同而说,也应当说“以习行缘为缘”,却并未说。因此,在受三法中,通过“以习行缘而于非道有一,以非道缘而于习行有一”这样的数目抉择,应知:由于确定心的习行缘性本不存在,此无效转起当由审察来把握。显示巴利原文
Etasseva vā satipi duvidhatāparikappane so ca yadi anulome vedanāttike paṭiccavārādīsu ‘‘āsevanapaccayā na magge dve, na maggapaccayā āsevane dve’’ti ca vuttaṃ siyā, (labbheyya), na ca vuttaṃ. Yadi pana voṭṭhabbanampi āsevanapaccayo siyā, kusalākusalānampi siyā. Na hi āsevanapaccayaṃ laddhuṃ yuttassa āsevanapaccayatāpi dhammo āsevanapaccayo hotīti avutto atthi, voṭṭhabbanassa pana kusalākusalānaṃ āsevanapaccayabhāvo avutto – ‘‘kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca kusalo dhammo uppajjati nāsevanapaccayā. Akusalaṃ…pe… nāsevanapaccayā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.93-94) vacanato paṭikkhitto ca. Athāpi siyā asamānavedanānaṃ vaseneva vuttanti ca, evamapi yathā – ‘‘āvajjanā kusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ akusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’tipi vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ jātibhedā na vuttanti ce? Bhūmibhinnassa kāmāvacarassa rūpāvacarādīnaṃ āsevanapaccayabhāvo viya jātibhinnassapi bhaveyyāti vattabbo eva siyā, abhinnajātikassa ca vasena yathā – ‘‘āvajjanā sahetukānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’tipi vattabbaṃ siyā, na ca vuttaṃ. Tasmā vedanāttikepi ‘‘āsevanapaccayā na magge ekaṃ, na maggapaccayā āsevane eka’’nti evaṃ gaṇanāya niddhāriyamānāya voṭṭhabbanassa āsevanapaccayattassa abhāvā ayaṃ moghavāro upaparikkhitvā gahetabbo.
再者,确定心由路心、果报与相续转起,故可得名为“转向”;由令不相似的速行生起,故可得名为“作意”。然而,《发趣论》中并未说“确定心对善蕴以无间缘为缘”等,而只说是“转向”。而且,当确定心针对不能成为所缘前生的色等所缘转起时,它住立于速行生起之处后,便沉入有分。“住立于速行处”意思是,它在速行生起之处转起两次,并非说它自身作为速行而住立。此处所言的“获得习行”,是指其如同习行,故被称为习行。因它有广散的特性,转起两次或三次,便类似于习行。正因其有广散性,故被称为能令表色等生起者。广散心虽如同速行,但由于不能多次转起,也不能稳固安立,故非严格意义上的习行。因此,这里不说确定心具有习行的意义。然而,在注疏中,如同将果心说成道的异名一样,乃权宜之说。显示巴利原文
Voṭṭhabbanaṃ pana vīthivipākasantatiyā āvaṭṭanato āvajjanā, tato visadisassa javanassa karaṇato manasikāroti ca vattabbataṃ labheyya, evañca katvā paṭṭhāne ‘‘voṭṭhabbanaṃ kusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādi na vuttaṃ, ‘‘āvajjanā’’icceva (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) vuttaṃ, tampi voṭṭhabbanato paraṃ catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā javanānaṃ ārammaṇapurejātaṃ bhavituṃ asakkontaṃ rūpādiṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ javanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Javanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvāti ca javanassa uppajjanaṭṭhāne dvikkhattuṃ pavattitvāti attho, na javanabhāvenāti. Āsevanaṃ labhitvāti cettha āsevanaṃ viya āsevananti vuttovāyamattho. Vipphārikattā cassa dvikkhattuṃ vā tikkhattuṃ vā pavattiyeva cettha āsevanasadisatā. Vipphārikatāya hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakatā cassa vuccati. Vipphārikampi javanaṃ viya anekakkhattuṃ appavattiyā asuppatiṭṭhitatāya ca na nippariyāyato āsevanabhāvena vattatīti na imassa āsevanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana phalacittesu maggapariyāyo viya pariyāyavasena vuttaṃ.
“此”指通过“即使”等所述,贪等一次也不生起而修观的瑜伽行者。“达到顶点”即到达最高处。由于不被敌对法所伏,观智明净,故称“犀利观者”。他的所缘已被把握——通过“我的速行这样运行了”确立有速行的有无,这便成为业处;或转而舍弃那个所缘后,随即把握作为根本业处的所缘。其次,“依第二种”指不那么犀利的观行者,即前文所说“另一人依贪等而令速行一次”的情况,因为在此经中说“他的心只跃入界所缘”等。正如《鹌鹑譬喻经》中所说:“当他为断除依着、为舍离依着而修行时,有时因失念,与依着相应的忆念和思惟便会现行。乌达夷!念的生起是缓慢的,但他迅速将之断除、驱除、灭除,使其完全消失。”在该经的注释中,先提出诘问:“入流者等尚且断除,凡夫又怎样断除呢?”然后解释说:“一个精勤修观的人,若因失念而突然生起烦恼,便会悚惧,心想:‘像我这样的比丘竟生起烦恼!’于是发起精进,增长观,以道断除烦恼。这样,他就被称为断除。”因此有这样的话:“他的心……显示巴利原文
Ayanti ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā vutto ekavārampi rāgādīnaṃ anuppādanavasena vipassanāya kammaṃ karonto yogāvacaro. Koṭippattoti matthakaṃ patto. Paṭipakkhehi anabhibhūtattā visadavipassanāñāṇatāya tikkhavipassako. Ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti ‘‘evaṃ me javanaṃ javita’’nti sārammaṇassa javanassa hutvā abhāvavavatthāpanassa kammaṭṭhānabhāvato, tathā āvajjanavasena vā taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vissajjetvā tāvadeva mūlakammaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti. Dutiyassa pana vasenāti ‘‘aparassa rāgādivasena ekavāraṃ javanaṃ javatī’’tiādinā vuttassa nātitikkhavipassakassa vasena ‘‘tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṃ pakkhandatī’’tiādinā imasmiṃ sutte āgatattā. ‘‘Tamenaṃ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṃ upadhipaṭinissaggāya kadāci karahaci satisammosā upadhipaṭisaṃyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti. Dandho udāyi satuppādo, atha kho naṃ khippameva pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṃ gametī’’ti laṭukikopame. Tassa hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sotāpannādayo tāva pajahantu, puthujjano kathaṃ pajahatī’’ti codanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ‘‘āraddhavipassako hi satisammosena sahasā kilese uppanne ‘mādisassa nāma bhikkhuno kileso uppanno’ti saṃvegaṃ katvā vīriyaṃ paggayha vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggena kilese samugghāteti, iti so pajahati nāmā’’ti attho vutto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṃ pakkhandatītiādinā imasmiṃ sutte āgatattā’’tiādi. Indriyabhāvane ca majjhimassa vasena ayamattho veditabbo.
“以把握故”:即依界之把握。当遇到割截骨髓等不可意所缘,如遭受辱骂,他便在耳门受苦;同样,遇到殴打捶击等不可意所缘,他就在身门受苦。显示巴利原文
Pariggahavasenāti dhātupariggahavasena. Mammacchedanādivasena pavattaakkosanādiṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ patvā sotadvāre kilamati puggalo, tathā pothanapaharaṇādikaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ patvā kāyadvāre kilamati.
“现行”:即全面现行。对于不可意境而言,所谓现行,就是指以殴打捶击等方式进行的加害,故说“加害”,即恼害之意。其法性如此:犹如受到掌击等即刻产生变化一般,其本性即是这样。而世尊所说“诸比丘,即使有人用锯子……”等教诫,是诸佛不共之法,因此有“即使忆念世尊所说……乃至忆念锯喻之教诫”等语。有人说,那也只是教法而已。然而,即使在那些正被锯割的人当中,也能不生嗔心、毫无变异,如此忆念导师的教法,也就是忆念正行法相。比丘的功德:这里指证得圣法所成就的功德。这也是一切圣者的功德,因此忆念它,即是忆念僧众。显示巴利原文
Samudācarantīti sabbaso uddhaṃ ācaranti. Tayidaṃ amanāpehi samudācaraṇaṃ nāma pothanapaharaṇādivasena upakkamanamevāti āha ‘‘upakkamantī’’ti, bādhantīti attho. Tathāsabhāvoti yathā pāṇippahārādīhi ghaṭṭitamatto vikāraṃ āpajjati, tathāsabhāvo. ‘‘Ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacenā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.232) ovādadānaṃ nāma anaññasādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikanti āha ‘‘vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatāti anussarantopi…pe… kakacūpamovādaṃ anussarantopī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassapi pariyattidhammabhāvatoti keci . Yaṃ pana kakacokantakesupi manussesu appadussanaṃ nibbikāraṃ, taṃ satthusāsanaṃ anussarantopi sammāpaṭipattilakkhaṇaṃ dhammaṃ anussaratiyevāti evaṃ vā ettha attho veditabbo. Bhikkhuno guṇanti ariyadhammādhigamanasiddhaṃ guṇamāha. So ca sabbesampi ariyānaṃ guṇoti taṃ anussarantopi saṅghaṃ anussarati evāti vuttaṃ.
此处是指“观舍”。因此,“舍”不能依止于善而安住,意思是,以观的力量,对于一切行所摄之法,未能获得中舍。所谓“六支舍”,即如同六支舍那样,对于可意与不可意境,因其同样无变异之相,而得六支舍之名。故说“而此……”等。当处于可意或不可意境时,若生起“我得利了,我善得利了”等欢喜,这即是将其安立于六支舍的层面。显示巴利原文
Vipassanupekkhā adhippetā, tasmā upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātīti vipassanāvasena sabbasmimpi saṅkhāragate ajjhupekkhanaṃ na labhatīti attho. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāti chaḷaṅgupekkhā viya chaḷaṅgupekkhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāsāmaññena . Tenāha ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādi. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāṭhāne ṭhapeti ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me’’tiādinā attamanataṃ āpajjanto.
303 “水所成”:以粘结为特性的水;因为到达了水的体性,故称水所成,意思是达到了水界自性,或谓获得了水界。然而,那称为水界的湿润性,存在于一切水中,包括与组合物相关的地水等。故说“遍一切水的湿润相”,意指流动性相。“激增”:是指通常的激增,即“以暴流的方式增长”。所以说“这是它通常的激增”。为显示另一种情况,则说“而在水劫之时……”等。“沉没”:此处的“沉没”指完全淹没,不仅仅是向下沉,故说“向上……乃至……到达”。显示巴利原文
303.Āpogatanti ābandhanavasena āpo, tadeva āposabhāvaṃ gatattā āpogataṃ, sabhāveneva āpobhāvaṃ vā pattanti attho. Yasmā pana so āpobhāvasaṅkhāto allayūsabhāvo sasambhārapathavīsasambhāraudakādigate sabbasmimpi āpasmiṃ vijjati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbaāpesu gataṃ allayūsabhāvalakkhaṇa’’nti, dravabhāvalakkhaṇanti attho. ‘‘Pakuppatī’’ti pākatikapakopaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘oghavasena vaḍḍhatī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ayamassa pākatiko pakopo’’ti. Itaraṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘āposaṃvaṭṭakāle panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ogacchantīti ettha ogamananti pariyādānaṃ adhippetaṃ, na adhogamanamattanti āha ‘‘uddhane…pe… pāpuṇantī’’ti.
304 “遍一切火”:指在一切以燃料等而有种种差别的火界部分中,已去、已转起。正如“喜”即是“喜所成”,“火”即是“火所成”,意思是仅以燃烧作用而转起而已。同样,“水所成”、“风所成”也应如此了知,因此说“如前”等。“以一日疟等病类”:即由一日疟等疾病差别。“受暑热”:指被暑热所征服。“老化”:即成为衰老。为了显示在此身体中由火界所生的衰老过程当依明显的衰老来了知,故说“诸根损减”等。“皱纹白发等”:指皱纹、白发之状态,以及肢节弛缓。“被激怒”:即被扰动。据说把酥反复煎煮百次,然后投入冷水中取出,称为百洗酥。“热恼”:是超过身体正常体温的热性;“遍烧”:是由于身体燃烧而转起的猛烈大烧——这就是它们之间的差别。“食”:指吞咽。“啖”:指咀嚼。“尝”:指品尝。“正熟”:是依均衡的消化之火而说;“不正熟”:也应依不均衡的消化之火来了知。“成为味等”:即成为味、血、肉、脂、筋、骨、骨髓、精液之性。“差别”:指种种不同的、彼此不相像的状态。意思是:在所吞咽等食物的消化中产生味,缘于彼味而生起味界。同样,由味的消化成为“血”等,这一切都显示巴利原文
304.Sabbatejesu gatanti indhanādivasena anekabhedesu sabbesu tejokoṭṭhāsesu gataṃ pavattaṃ. Yathā pīti eva pītigataṃ, evaṃ tejo eva tejogataṃ, tejanavasena pavattimattanti attho. Evaṃ āpogataṃ, vāyogatañca veditabbanti āha ‘‘purime’’tiādi. Ekāhikajarādibhāvenāti ekāhikādijarābhedena. Usumajātoti usmābhibhūto. Jīratīti jiṇṇo hoti. Tejodhātuvasena labbhamānā imasmiṃ kāye jarāpavatti pākaṭajarāvasena veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘indriyavekallatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Valipalitādibhāvanti valitapalitabhāvaṃ, aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sithilabhāvañca. Kuppitenāti khubhitena. Satakkhattuṃ tāpetvā tāpetvā sītūdake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappīti vadanti. Sarīre pakatiusumaṃ atikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīrassa dahanavasena pavatto mahādāho paridāhoti ayameva tesaṃ viseso. Asitanti suttaṃ. Khāyitanti khāditaṃ. Sāyitanti assāditaṃ. Sammā paripākaṃ gacchatīti samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā vasena vuttaṃ. Asammāparipākopi visamapākiniyā gahaṇiyā vasena veditabbo. Rasādibhāvenāti rasarudhiramaṃsamedanhāruaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjasukkabhāvena. Vivekanti puthubhāvaṃ aññamaññaṃ visadisabhāvaṃ. Asitādibhedassa āhārassa pariṇāme raso hoti, taṃ paṭicca rasadhātu uppajjatīti attho. Evaṃ rasassa pariṇāme ‘‘rudhira’’ntiādinā sabbaṃ netabbaṃ.
“青林”(haritanta)即青翠本身,其中的“anta”是词缀,如同“林野”(vananta)、“经”(suttanta)等词。“刮皮”(cammanillekhana)即刮去表皮后所丢弃的碎屑。显示巴利原文
Haritantanti haritameva, anta-saddena padavaḍḍhanaṃ kataṃ yathā ‘‘vanantaṃ suttanta’’nti. Cammanillekhanaṃ cammaṃ likhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ.
305 “嗳气、打嗝等”:此处的“等”字应理解为涵盖能引起呕吐、喷嚏等的气。“大小便等”:通过此处的“等”字,可知还包括排出胆汁、痰涎、唾沫等的风,以及热气。尽管“kucchi”一词是腹部的同义词,但因为“koṭṭha”指的是内部,此处即以“kucchi”指称腹内的其余部分,故说“腹中的风即肠外的风”。“屈伸等”:通过“等”字,涵括了瞻视、回顾、举足等一切身体活动。“水依此而流”(ossavanaṃ),即覆障之处;“此处”即指这一位置。显示巴利原文
305.Uggārahikkārādīti ettha ādi-saddena uddekakhīpanādipavattakavātānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Uccārapassāvādīti ādi-saddena pittasemhalasikādinīharaṇavātassa ceva usumavātassa ca saṅgaho veditabbo. Yadipi kucchi-saddo udarapariyāyo, koṭṭha-saddena pana abbhantarassa vuccamānattā tadavasiṭṭho udarapadeso idha kucchi-saddena vuccatīti āha ‘‘kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā’’ti. Samiñjanapasāraṇādīnīti ādi-saddena ālokanavilokanauddharaṇādikā sabbā kāyikakiriyā saṅgahitā. Avasavati udakaṃ etasmāti ossavanaṃ, chadananto. Idhāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne.
306 「无有情性」即无我所作。因为所示现的四大,只是无我所的界,纯粹只是界,无有情、无命者,以此来显示这个意义。「包围」即以包围的状态而住,被围绕。因此说「这些」等,意指像木材等依靠特定的组合而被安放。否则,就不能称为「屋」。因此说「但就木材等」等。为了彰显经文中「朋友,譬如」等语所说明的意义,而说出「如同木材等」等语。显示巴利原文
306.Nissattabhāvanti anattakataṃ. Yathādassitā hi catasso dhātuyo anattaniyaṃ kevalaṃ dhātumattā nissattanijjīvāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Parivāritoti parivāritabhāvena ṭhito parivuto. Tenāha ‘‘etānī’’tiādi, kaṭṭhādīni sannivesavisesavasena ṭhapitānīti adhippāyo. Aññathā agārasamaññāya bhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kaṭṭhādīsu panā’’tiādi. Yadatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, āvuso’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kaṭṭhādīnī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
前文虽以“仅是身体的”等语,不分别、仅以一分的方式也说到了所造色,但并未将受等作为蕴而摄受宣说,同样,也未将渴爱作为集谛而宣说。而其余诸谛则完全未曾宣说。因此他说:“前文……未宣说”。“当眼净色灭时”:即眼净色坏灭了。“受损”:即被先前的虫等所损毁。“被障”:即无脓等产生,只是被遮蔽。“相应的”:指与之相应,意即适合眼识生起。当色所缘现于眼门时,所起的作意也依于心所依处;有眼时便存在,无眼时则不存在,故说“缘眼而生的作意”。“有分、转向”:不仅对所缘缘如此,于净色缘也是如此,故说“缘眼与色”。“Nti”指眼门中唯作意界之心。“系于其他所缘者”:即专心于其他所缘的人。“与他们相应者”:即与那些眼、色及其转向相应。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ heṭṭhā ‘‘mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.302) avibhāgena ekadesena ca upādārūpampi kathitaṃ, tathā vedanādayo khandhabhāvena pariggahetvā na kathitā, tathā taṇhāpi samudayasaccabhāvena. Itarāni pana saccāni sabbena sabbaṃ na kathitāni. Tenevāha ‘‘heṭṭhā…pe… na kathitānī’’ti. Cakkhupasāde niruddheti cakkhupasāde vinaṭṭhe. Upahateti pubbakimiādīhi upaddute. Palibuddheti pubbādiuppattiyā vinā paṭicchādite. Tajjoti tassānurūpo, cakkhuviññāṇuppattiyā anurūpoti attho. Cakkhussa rūpārammaṇe āpāthagate uppajjanamanasikāro hadayasannissayopi cakkhumhi sati hoti, asati na hotīti katvā ‘‘cakkhuṃ paṭicca uppajjanamanasikāro’’ti vutto. Bhavaṅgāvaṭṭanaṃ tassa yathā ārammaṇapaccaye, evaṃ pasādapaccayepi hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca rūpe ca paṭiccā’’ti. Nti cakkhudvāre kiriyamanodhātucittaṃ. Aññavihitassāti aññārammaṇapasutassa. Tadanurūpassāti tesaṃ cakkhurūpatadābhogānaṃ anurūpassa.
“显示四谛”:意指由自相及义准而显示四谛。“成为彼类者”或“达到彼类者”,即如实者,也就是如眼识生起那般、具足缘相者之义。“三因所生色”:即时节、业、食所生之色。于此,其时虽亦有有分心、转向心等起色,然唯取无眼识等起色而说。“被摄入”:犹如城市纳入王国,即在色蕴中被摄归、被归属。因提及“如实者”,故受等唯是与眼识相应者,识亦唯是眼识本身。“行”:唯指思,因行蕴以思为上首,此是意趣。然而,其中触、命根、作意、心住性亦是行蕴法。合说“五蕴”,即合而计数。“聚集”:即依各自之缘而会合。“结合”:即由相互为缘而共聚一处之状态。显示巴利原文
Cattāri saccāni dasseti sarūpato atthāpattito cāti adhippāyo. Tappakāro bhūto, tappakāraṃ vā patto tathābhūto, tassa, yathā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, tādisassa paccayākārasamavetassāti attho. Tisamuṭṭhānarūpanti utukammāhārasamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ. Idañca satipi tadā bhavaṅgāvaṭṭanacittasamuṭṭhānarūpe kevalaṃ cakkhuviññāṇasamuṭṭhitarūpassa abhāvamattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti nagaraṃ viya rajje rūpakkhandhe saṅgahetabbataṃ gahetabbataṃ gacchati. ‘‘Tathābhūtassā’’ti vuttattā vedanādayo cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāva, viññāṇampi cakkhuviññāṇameva. Saṅkhārāti cetanāva vuttā cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhassāti adhippāyo. Tattha pana phassajīvitindriyamanasikāracittaṭṭhitiyopi saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāva. Ekato saṅgaho ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’ti ekato gaṇanā. Samāgamoti yathāsakaṃ paccayavasena samodhānaṃ. Samavāyoti aññamaññassa paccayabhāvena samavetatāya samuditabhāvo.
“缘所生法依此而生起”,故称“缘起”,亦即缘相。观察缘法者,亦观察缘所生法;观察彼者,亦观察缘法,故说“此缘起”等。“以欲作的方式”:即渴爱的方式。“以著的方式”:即期待的方式。“以随顺的方式”:即染著的方式。“深入己心”:指如进入所缘、如吞咽、如决断,以坚固执取之方式。欲贪于此被调伏、被断除,故称“欲贪调伏”,亦即欲贪的断除,是为涅槃。“引取”:指经中未直接以自相说明的内容,亦可由义理引取而来,应以收录的方式摄持。为显示引取之理,他说“于这些中”等。“于此三处”:即依前所说乐、苦等方面,在三个现观之处。“见”:即由遍知现观等所生之正见,亦即如实知见。同样,“思惟”等亦应如是理解。“修习通达”:谓依修习而通达,非仅以为所缘。“此道”:即此八支圣道,由通达四圣谛而转起。至此,即于一眼门中,由依处摄门之理令四谛业处达于顶点,世尊教法即已实行,成为广大、圆满。显示巴利原文
Paccayuppannadhammo paṭicca samuppajjati etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo, paccayākāro. Paccayadhamme passantopi paccayuppannadhamme passati, te passantopi paccayadhamme passatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yo paṭiccasamuppāda’’ntiādi. Chandakaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanavasena. Ālayakaraṇavasenāti apekkhākaraṇavasena. Anunayakaraṇavasenāti anurajjanavasena. Ajjhogāhitvāti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya gilitvā viya niṭṭhapetvā viya daḷhaggahaṇavasena. Chandarāgo vinayati pahīyati etthāti chandarāgavinayo chandarāgapahānañcāti vuccati nibbānaṃ. Āharitvāti pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatampi atthato ānetvā saṅgaṇhanavasena gahetabbaṃ. Āharaṇavidhiṃ pana dassento ‘‘yā imesū’’tiādimāha. Imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti yathāvuttesu sukhadukkhādīsu tīsu abhisamayaṭṭhānesu. Diṭṭhīti pariññābhisamayādivasena pavattā sammādiṭṭhi yāthāvadassanaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkappādayopi yathārahaṃ veditabbā. Bhāvanāpaṭivedhoti bhāvanāvasena paṭivedho, na ārammaṇakaraṇamattena. Ayaṃ maggoti ayaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena pavatto aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Ettāvatāpīti evaṃ ekasmiṃ cakkhudvāre vatthu pariggahamukhenapi catusaccakammaṭṭhānassa matthakaṃ pāpanena bahuṃ vipulaṃ paripuṇṇameva bhagavato sāsanaṃ kataṃ anuṭṭhitaṃ hoti.
有分心生起并灭去之后,即成为转向心的缘,故说“即使它灭后”。这是就那些被深度睡眠所征服的人而说,故说“唯是微弱力者”;而对于被昏沉睡眠所障的人,有分心有时也可能成为转向的缘。“就在有分时”:指有分心独自转起的时候。对于禅那熟练者、业处熟练者、典籍熟练者,由于极其熟悉,即使不作意,意也会转起。例如,有人因极熟典籍而如不间断地诵念时,因其心投入他处,便不觉“已诵此多,尚余此多”。“四因生者”:指一切由四种因所生的色法,不同于前面唯由三种因所生。因为触与思是首要而粗显的,所以被摄入行蕴,并非没有其他法。“只审察一部分”:指并未毫无遗漏地说明前面所指示的意义,唯以说明一部分的方式而解说,从而触及教法。“在此处”:即于“朋友,内眼”等处,以六门方式解说前所指示的意义之处。“前文缺略说的”:指“所造色,四种无色蕴,上三圣谛”等在解释中被略去的一切义理。“依彼彼门”:即依眼门等各各门类。以四谛方式开始的教导,亦以四谛而结束,所以他说显示巴利原文
Uppajjitvā niruddhameva bhavaṅgacittaṃ āvajjanacittassa paccayo bhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ niruddhampī’’ti. Mandathāmagatamevāti mahatiyā niddāya abhibhūtassa vasena vuttaṃ, kapimiddhaparetassa pana bhavaṅgacittaṃ kadāci āvajjanassa paccayo bhaveyyāti. Bhavaṅgasamayenevāti bhavaṅgasseva pavattanasamayena paguṇajjhānapaguṇakammaṭṭhānapaguṇaganthesu tesaṃ paguṇabhāveneva ābhogena vināpi manasikāro pavattati. Tathā hi paguṇaṃ ganthaṃ paguṇabhāveneva nirantaraṃ viya ajjhayamāne aññavihitatāya ‘‘ettako gantho gato, ettako avasiṭṭho’’ti sallakkhaṇā na hoti. Catusamuṭṭhānampīti sabbaṃ catusamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ, na pubbe viya tisamuṭṭhānamevāti adhippāyo. Pubbaṅgamattā oḷārikattā ca phassacetanāva saṅkhārakkhandhoti gahitā, na aññesaṃ abhāvā. Ekadesameva sammasantoti yathāuddiṭṭhaṃ atthaṃ heṭṭhā anavasesato aniddisitvā ekadesameva niddisanavasena desanāya āmasanto. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti yathāuddiṭṭhassa atthassa ‘‘ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, cakkhu’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.306) chadvāravasena niddisanaṭṭhāne. Heṭṭhā parihīnadesananti – ‘‘yaṃ upādārūpaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhā upari tīṇi ariyasaccānī’’ti niddesavasena parihīnaṃ atthajātaṃ sabbaṃ. Taṃtaṃdvāravasenāti cakkhudvārādikaṃ taṃtaṃdvāravasena. Catusaccavasena āraddhā desanā catusacceneva pariyosāpitāti āha ‘‘yathānusandhināva suttantaṃ niṭṭhapesī’’ti.
《大象足迹喻经》的注释(Mahāhatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā)中,隐义的阐明已经完毕。显示巴利原文
Mahāhatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
9. 大心材喻经注(Mahāsāropamasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
9. Mahāsāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
307 “不久离去”:指离去不久,离开之后没过多久。“仅以其特征”:意思是只凭剃发、披袈裟等自己原先的外在特征。“分别生起”:指因行为不端和邪见而被执行举罪甘马后,变得与外道相似,单独存在。“善男子”:只是从出身而说为善男子。“未混杂”:指没有掺杂,无种姓杂交。这里以生为开端,讲说生所依的苦,故说“陷入”,即陷入生者,因为有情从出生时起,即如被由生因所带来的苦侵入而受逼迫。对于老等,道理相同。四种资具可获得:指利得,即四种可得的资具被妥善准备、妥善整治。“誉说”:指称赞功德。“不为人知”:指由于被尊崇所蔽而不为人知,这是为了显示利养等不会生起。因此说“连少量食物、衣物也得不到”。“少威势”:即少威力。这种少威势由缺乏优越性成就和缺乏眷属成就而显现出来。这里为了显示无眷属成就,说“随从极少”。显示巴利原文
307.Nacirapakkanteti na ciraṃ pakkante, pakkantassa sato na cirasseva. Saliṅgenevāti muṇḍiyakāsāyaggahaṇādinā attano purimaliṅgeneva. Pāṭiyekke jāteti vipannācāradiṭṭhitāya pakāsanīyakammakaraṇato paraṃ aññatitthiyasadise visuṃ bhūte. Kulaputtoti jātimattena kulaputto. Asambhinnāyāti sambhedarahitāya, jātisaṅkaravirahitāyāti atto. Jātisīsena idha jātivatthukaṃ dukkhaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘otiṇṇoti yassa jāti anto anupaviṭṭhā’’ti. Jāto hi satto jātakālato paṭṭhāya jātinimittena dukkhena anto anupaviṭṭho viya vibādhīyati. Jarāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Cattāro paccayā labbhantīti lābhā, catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ labbhamānānaṃ sukatabhāvo suṭṭhu abhisaṅkhatabhāvo. Vaṇṇabhaṇananti guṇakittanaṃ. Apaññātāti sambhāvanāvasena na paññātā. Lābhādinibbattiyābhāvadassanañhetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ghāsacchādanamattampi na labhantī’’ti. Appesakkhāti appānubhāvā. Sā pana appesakkhatā adhipateyyasampattiyā ca parivārasampattiyā ca abhāvena pākaṭā hoti. Tattha parivārasampattiyā abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘appaparivārā’’ti āha.
有些人由于无知,或因其他利益,把并非心材的东西当作心材来制作,因此为加以区别,说“用心材作成心材之物”,以此说明“轴、轮、轭、犁等”。“梵行”:指摄属三学的教法梵行。把大树作为譬喻:道果是心材,智见是肤材,定是树皮,戒是外皮,而四种资具由于动摇不定,故称为枝叶。因此,即指通过利养、恭敬、名闻而产生。他以为“我得心材了”,意谓于此教法中应当证得的心材,因为出现了这些利养等,便自以为已经证得,于是停止精进,以为应作已作。显示巴利原文
Sārenapi keci ajānanena aññālābhena vā asārabhūtampi kattabbaṃ karontīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sārena sārakaraṇīya’’nti vuttanti taṃ dassento ‘‘akkhacakkayuganaṅgalādika’’nti āha. Brahmacariyassāti sikkhāttayasaṅgahassa sāsanabrahmacariyassa. Mahārukkhassa maggaphalasārassa ñāṇadassanapheggukassa samādhitacassa sīlapapaṭikassa cañcalasabhāvā saṃsappacārīti ca cattāro paccayā sākhāpalāsaṃ nāma. Tenevāti lābhasakkārasilokanibbattaneneva. Sāro me pattoti imasmiṃ sāsane adhigantabbasāro nāma iminā lābhādinibbattanena anuppattoti vosānaṃ niṭṭhitakiccaṃ āpanno.
310 「智见」:即属于智的见,它是通过现证对象而生起的神通智。「微细色」:指天等之众的色,或其他性质微细的色。因此说到‘乃至……而住’,因为这里是以突出说明的方式,将天眼称为‘智见’。显示巴利原文
310.Ñāṇadassananti ñāṇabhūtaṃ dassanaṃ visayassa sacchikaraṇavasena pavattaṃ abhiññāñāṇaṃ. Sukhumaṃ rūpanti devādīnaṃ, aññampi vā sukhumasabhāvaṃ rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘antamaso…pe… viharantī’’ti, dibbacakkhu hi idha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ‘‘ñāṇadassana’’nti gahitaṃ.
311 「成就非时解脱」:为了以经文本身说明所指的非时解脱,这里提出了“什么是非时解脱”等问题。因为八等至(入定)有时节与非时节之分;然而,通过道而解脱的人,则没有时节或非时节的限制。若有信心强猛且观智已生起者,在行走、站立、坐着、进食之时,并非不可能证得道果。因此,通过道解脱而解脱的人,没有时节与非时节的分别,这就称为‘非时解脱’。所以经文说‘因为是世间等至……’等等。显示巴利原文
311.Asamayavimokkhaṃārādhetīti ettha adhippetaṃ asamayavimokkhaṃ pāḷiyā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘katamo asamayavimokkho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannañhi samāpajjanasamayopi atthi asamayopi, maggavimokkhena pana vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthi. Yassa saddhā balavatī, vipassanā ca āraddhā, tassa gacchantassa tiṭṭhantassa nisīdantassa bhuñjantassa ca maggaphalapaṭivedho nāma na hotīti na vattabbaṃ, iti maggavimokkhena vimuccantassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthīti so asamayavimokkho. Tenāha ‘‘lokiyasamāpattiyo hī’’tiādi.
「不动摇,不毁坏」,故称「不动」,即任何时候皆无退失的性质。由于一切烦恼止息,心得以解脱,故称「心解脱」。因此说‘阿拉汉果解脱’。‘以此义为目的’,即‘为了这个目的’,是指教法梵行,这是它的最高终极。如同开头的核心喻那样,以果来结束开示,因此是‘随顺连结而结束开示’。此处未详细解释意义的部分,皆易于理解。显示巴利原文
Na kuppati, na nassatīti akuppā, kadācipi aparihānasabhāvā. Sabbasaṃkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cetaso vimuttīti cetovimutti. Tenāha ‘‘arahattaphalavimuttī’’ti. Ayamattho payojanaṃ etassāti etadatthaṃ, sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ, tassa esā paramakoṭi. Yathāraddhassa sāropamena phalena desanā niṭṭhāpitāti āha ‘‘yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesī’’ti. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《小核心喻经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Cūḷasāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
312 「Piṅgaladhātuko」:指具黄褐色本质、肤色或眼目之人。「僧团」:指出家大众之集合,并非约戒等功德可摄受之义而言。「有僧者」(saṅghino):因他们有僧团为眷属,故得此称。「那个他」(sveva):即就彼出家众集合所称呼的那位本身。「以行持修学的方式」:指依据自己构想出来的裸形禁戒等行为学处而施设。「被施设」:各随其所受禁戒及所认定为成就者而施设。「执持邪见者」(laddhikarā):即生起那种邪见之人。「对于大众」:对于凡夫。然而,他连圣教的成就亦未得,何况证得?故绝对唯是盲目的凡夫,所以说「对于未闻教导的盲目愚痴凡夫」。因智者不会置信于不堪信者。「吉祥奴」(maṅgaladāso):在那些吉祥事务中,做本属奴仆之事的奴仆。显示巴利原文
312.Piṅgaladhātukoti piṅgalasabhāvo piṅgalacchaviko, piṅgalakkhoti vā attho. Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho, na sīlādiguṇehi saṅgahitabbabhāvena. Saṅgho etesaṃ atthi parivārabhūtoti saṅghino. Svevāti so eva pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto. Ācārasikkhāpanavasenāti attanā parikappitaacelavatādiācārasikkhāpanavasena. Paññātāti yathāsakaṃ samādinnavatavasena ceva viññātaladdhivasena ca paññātā. Laddhikarāti tassā micchādiṭṭhiyā uppādakā. Bahujanassāti puthujanassa. Tassa pana āgamasampadāpi nāma natthi, kuto adhigamoti ekaṃsato andhaputhujjano evāti āha ‘‘assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassā’’ti. Na hi viññū appasādanīye pasīdanti. Maṅgalesu kātabbadāsakiccakaro dāso maṅgaladāso.
「Tantāvutānaṃ」:指张线织成的布匹。「系缚结使」(gaṇṭhanakilesa):即令于轮回中结缚的烦恼。「以如是之说」:依如是所宣称,或依如是所执取之见。「导出者」(niyyānikā):意指具导向出离、伴随神变且无过失之性质。「若非导出者」:引来接续上下文。那些沙门、婆罗门自称一切知,其事实并非如此;由于非实,便通过说明他们并非导出,以显示那位婆罗门无任何利益可得,故说「通过说明并非导出而指出其毫无利益」。显示巴利原文
Tantāvutānanti tante pasāretvā vītānaṃ. Gaṇṭhanakilesoti saṃsāre bandhanakileso. Evaṃ vāditāyāti evaṃ paṭiññatāya, evaṃ diṭṭhitāya vā. Niyyānikāti niyyānagatisappāṭihīrakā anupārambhabhūtattāti adhippāyo. No ce niyyānikāti ānetvā yojanā. Tesaṃ sabbaññupaṭiññāya abhūtattā tassā abhūtabhāvakathanena tassa brāhmaṇassa na kāci atthasiddhīti āha ‘‘nesaṃ aniyyānikabhāvakathanena atthābhāvato’’ti.
318 「志向沉没者」(līnajjhāsayo):其内心倾向沉没于低劣世间利养,而非趋向涅槃。由于对学处无深切恭敬,故令教法松弛而执取。显示巴利原文
318. Nihīnalokāmise līno ajjhāsayo etassa, na pana nibbāneti. Līnajjhāsayo. Sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ katvā gaṇhāti sikkhāya na tibbagāravattā.
323 「下面」:指紧接在前的经文,即《大核心喻经》。「初禅等法是观的基础」:指初禅等法是观的近因。「在此」:指在这部《小核心喻经》中所提。「灭尽定的基础」:指不来者或阿罗汉能证入灭尽定。「因此」:因为是灭尽定的基础。应知初禅等法比之如实知见,更为殊胜。显示巴利原文
323.Heṭṭhāti anantarātītasutte mahāsāropame. Paṭhamajjhānādidhammā vipassanāpādakāti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā. Idhāti imasmiṃ cūḷasāropame āgatā. Nirodhapādakāti anāgāmino, arahanto vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ samatthā. Tasmāti nirodhapādakattā. Paṭhamajjhānādidhammā ñāṇadassanato uttaritarāti veditabbā.
《小核心喻经》注释中,对于隐晦含义的解说已经完成。显示巴利原文
Cūḷasāropamasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.